2018 Nissan Versa Sedan | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Nissan Versa Sedan Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 702 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2018 Nissan Versa Sedan Owners Manual and Maintenance Information
OM18EM 0N17U1
Table of Contents
2018.5 Nissan Versa Sedan Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information
- OM18EM 5N17U0
- Table of Contents

2018 VERSA SEDAN

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you un-

derstand the operation and maintenance

of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many

miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.

Please read through this manual before

operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-

let explains details about the warranties

covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance

and schedules” section of this manual

explains details about maintaining and

servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a

separate Customer Care/Lemon Law

Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-

solve any concerns you may have with

your vehicle, and clarify your rights un-

der your state’s lemon law.

A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle

best. When you require any service or have

any questions, they will be glad to assist

you with the extensive resources available

to them.

In addition to factory-installed options,

your vehicle may also be equipped with

additional accessories installed prior to de-

livery. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions con-

cerning proper use of such accessories

prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-

cessory. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure

familiarity with controls and maintenance

requirements assisting you in the safe op-

eration of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for

conditions.

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-

tures or taking other actions that

could distract you.

∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-

propriate child restraint systems. Pre-

teen children should be seated in the

rear seat.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

∙ ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety fea-

tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety, emissions or du-

rability and may even violate govern-

mental regulations. In addition, dam-

age or performance problems

resulting from modifications may not

be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-

agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses

the port during normal driving, for ex-

ample remote insurance company

monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,

telematics or engine reprogramming,

may cause interference or damage to

vehicle systems. We do not recommend

or endorse the use of any aftermarket

OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically

approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-

ranty may not cover damage caused by

any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all

features and equipment available on this

model. Features and equipment in your ve-

hicle may vary depending on model, trim

level, options selected, order, date of pro-

duction, region or availability. Therefore,

you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or in-

stalled on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at

the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the

right to change specifications, perfor-

mance, design or component suppliers

without notice and without obligation.

From time to time, NISSAN may update or

revise this manual to provide Owners with

the most accurate information currently

available. Please carefully read and retain

with this manual all revision updates sent

to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-

cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-

tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-

sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any

updates can also be found in the Owner

section of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide

If you have

questions concerning any information in your

Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

Affairs. For contact information, refer to the

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in

this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or seri-

ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce

the risk, the procedures must be fol-

lowed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage to

your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed

carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do

this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to

the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these call attention to an item in the illus-

tration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and certain vehicle components

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive

harm. In addition, certain fluids con-

tained in vehicles and certain products

of component wear contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm.

APD1005

Operating, servicing and maintaining a

passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle

can expose you to chemicals including

engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known

to the State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects or other reproduc-

tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle the en-

gine except as necessary, service your

vehicle in a well-ventilated area and

wear gloves or wash your hands fre-

quently when servicing your vehicle.

For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material – special handling may

apply. For additional information, refer to

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

SiriusXM® services

require a subscrip-

tion after trial

period and are

sold separately or

as a package. The

satellite service is

available only in

the 48 contiguous

USA and DC.

SiriusXM® satellite

service is also

available in

Canada; see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any

form, or by any means, electronic, me-

chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-

erwise, without the prior written permis-

sion of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide NISSAN directly

with comments or questions, please con-

tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask

for the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone

number

– Vehicle identification number (attached

to the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-

tion at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..........0-2

Exterior front ....................................0-3

Exterior rear .....................................0-4

Passenger compartment........................0-5

Instrument panel................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations...........0-8

Warning and indicator lights.....................0-9

1. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

3. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s)

and shoulder height adjuster

(P. 1-10, 1-42)

4. Seats (P. 1-2)

5. Supplemental air bag modules

(P. 1-42)

6. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) (P. 1-42)

7. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)

8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system (P. 1-20)

9. Rear seat belts (P. 1-10)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LIC3852

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-10)

2. Windshield (P. 8-16)

3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)

4. Power windows (if so equipped)

(P. 2-30)

5. Door locks (P. 3-3)

Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-6)

Keys (P. 3-2)

6. Mirrors (P. 3-17)

7. Tire pressure (P. 8-28)

Flat tire (P. 6-2)

Tire chains (P. 8-28)

8. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-22)

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-22)

9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-22)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2461

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Antenna (P. 4-48)

2. Rear window defroster switch

(P. 2-22)

3. Trunk lid release (P. 3-11)

4. Rearview camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)

5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-22)

6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-13)

Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-13)

Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)

7. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-3)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2462

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Interior light (P. 2-32)

2. Sun visors (P. 3-16)

3. Map light (if so equipped) (P. 2-32)

4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-17)

5. Glove box (P. 2-27)

6. Parking brake (P. 5-17)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2463

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Headlight/turn signal switch/fog

light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-22)

2. Driver’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

Horn (P. 2-25)

3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-12)

4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)

5. Vents (P. 4-8)

6. Rear window defroster switch

(P. 2-22)

7. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-42)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

9. Climate controls (P. 4-8)

10. Audio system (P. 4-16)

11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

12. Glove box (P. 2-27)

13. Power outlet (P. 2-26)

14. USB connection port and AUX IN

jack (P. 4-41)

15. Shift lever (P. 5-11)

16. Cup holders (P. 2-27)

17. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)

LII2542

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

18. Cruise control switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-18)

19. Tilt steering (P. 3-16)

20. Audio control switches (P. 4-47)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System switches (P. 4-49)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-26)

22. Fuel-filler door release lever (P. 3-13)

Hood release lever (P. 3-10)

23. Electronic outside rearview mirror

control switch (P. 3-18)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

HR16DE Engine

1. Drive belt location (P. 8-14)

2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)

3. Air cleaner (P. 8-15)

4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)

fluid reservoir (P. 8-9)

5. Fusible link (P. 8-18)

6. Battery (P. 8-11)

7. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)

8. Radiator cap (P. 8-4)

9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-10)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LDI3055

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

2-13

Brake warning

light

2-13

Charge warning

light

2-14

Door open warn-

ing light

2-14

Engine oil pres-

sure warning light

2-14

High temperature

warning light (red)

(if so equipped)

2-15

Warning

light

Name Page

Low fuel warning

light

2-15

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-15

Power steering

warning light

2-17

Seat belt warning

light and chime (if

so equipped)

2-17

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-18

Indicator

light

Name Page

Continuously

Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) po-

sition indicator

light

2-18

Cruise main

switch indicator

light (if so

equipped)

2-18

Front fog light in-

dicator light (if so

equipped)

2-18

Front passenger

air bag status

light

2-18

High beam indi-

cator light (blue)

2-19

Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL)

2-19

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Indicator

light

Name Page

Overdrive OFF

indicator light (if

so equipped)

2-20

Side light and

headlight indica-

tor light (green) (if

so equipped)

2-20

Slip indicator light 2-20

Turn signal/

hazard indicator

lights

2-20

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-20

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats............................................ 1-2

Front manual seat adjustment ................1-3

Folding rear seat (if so equipped) ............. 1-4

Armrest (if so equipped for driver’s side

only).......................................... 1-5

Head restraints/headrests ...................... 1-5

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ................................. 1-6

Non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest components.........................1-7

Remove.......................................1-7

Install.........................................1-8

Adjust ........................................1-8

Seatbelts.......................................1-10

Precautions on seat belt usage...............1-10

Seat belt warning light (if so equipped) .......1-13

Pregnant women.............................1-13

Injured persons...............................1-13

Three-point type seat belt with

retractor .....................................1-13

Seat belt extenders...........................1-17

Seat belt maintenance .......................1-17

Child safety......................................1-18

Infants .......................................1-18

Small children ................................1-19

Larger children ...............................1-19

Child restraints .................................1-20

Precautions on child restraints ..............1-20

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system ............................1-23

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH.................................1-25

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts ......................... 1-27

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using LATCH .....................1-30

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using the seat belts..............1-33

Booster seats ...............................1-38

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...........1-42

Precautions on SRS..........................1-42

Supplemental air bag warning labels ........1-59

Supplemental air bag warning light..........1-60

WARNING

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

properly. For additional information,

refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section.

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls or

make the vehicle move. Unattended

children could become involved in se-

rious accidents.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. The seat may

move suddenly and could cause loss

of control of the vehicle.

∙ The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when the

passenger sits well back and straight

up in the seat. If the seatback is re-

clined, the risk of sliding under the lap

belt and being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-

ally. For additional information about ad-

justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined

in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide

the seat forward or backward to the de-

sired position. Release the lever to lock the

seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up

and lean back. To bring the seatback for-

ward, pull the lever up and lean your body

forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-

back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

LRS2571 LRS2572

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position

with the parking brake fully applied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for

driver’s seat)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to

adjust the seat height until the desired po-

sition is achieved.

FOLDING REAR SEAT (if so

equipped)

䊊

1Pull the knob 䊊

Ato fold each seatback

down.

WARNING

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat when it

is in the fold-down position. Use of

these areas by passengers without

proper restraints could result in seri-

ous injury or death in an accident or

sudden stop.

LRS2573 LRS2833

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

∙ Closely supervise children when they

are around the cars to prevent them

from playing and becoming locked in

the trunk where they could be seri-

ously injured. Keep the car locked,

with the rear seatback and trunk lid

securely latched when not in use, and

prevent children’s access to car keys.

ARMREST (if so equipped for

driver’s side only)

To use the armrest, pull it down to the rest-

ing position.

䊊

AStowed position

䊊

BResting position

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They

may provide additional protection

against injury in certain rear end colli-

sions. Adjustable head

restraints/headrests must be adjusted

properly, as specified in this section.

Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach any-

thing to the head restraint/headrest

stalks or remove the head

restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat

if the head restraint/headrest has been

removed. If the head restraint/headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly ad-

just the head restraint/headrest before

an occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions can

reduce the effectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may in-

crease the risk of serious injury or death

in a collision.

LRS2454

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraints/headrests.

䉱Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not

equipped with a head restraint or headrest

(if applicable).

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalk(s)

to lock them in a desired adjustment

position.

∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch

to secure them to the seat frame.

∙ Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the

head restraint/headrest so the cen-

ter of your ear is approximately level

with the center of the head

restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than

the recommended alignment, place

the head restraint/headrest at the

highest position.

∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been

removed, ensure that it is reinstalled

and locked in place before riding in that

designated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2000 LRS2300

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the

head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest

from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest

properly in a secure place so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Make

sure that the head restraint/headrest is

facing the correct direction. The stalk

with the notch (notches) 䊊

1must be

installed in the hole with the lock knob

䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears. If

your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it

up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and

push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

LRS2305 LRS2306

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat with both feet on the

floor, your chances of being injured or killed

in a collision and/or the severity of injury

may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly

encourages you and all of your passengers

to buckle up every time you drive, even if

your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

WARNING

∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

WARNING

∙ Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal inju-

ries in an accident.

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

∙ Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and all

seat belts fastened, it may indicate a

malfunction in the system. Have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do not

modify the seat belt, add material, or

install devices that may change the

seat belt routing or tension. Doing so

may affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have

activated, they cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN recommends that all seat belt

assemblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was mi-

nor and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during

a collision should also be inspected

and replaced if either damage or im-

proper operation is noted.

∙ All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s inspection in-

structions and replacement recom-

mendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are

damaged.

SSS0014

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT (if so

equipped)

The front driver seat is equipped with a

seat belt warning light.

The front passenger seat may be equipped

with a seat belt warning light.

The warning light, located on the instru-

ment panel, will show the status of the

driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning

light will not light up if the seat is not

occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant

women use seat belts. The seat belt should

be worn snug and always position the lap

belt as low as possible around the hips, not

the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never run

the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal

area. Contact your doctor for specific rec-

ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons

use seat belts. Check with your doctor for

specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

belt properly.

LRS0786

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

∙ Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the

seat belt becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-

vated, the child can be seriously in-

jured or killed if the seat belt retracts

and becomes tight. This can occur

even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle

the seat belt to release the child. If the

seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child

by cutting the seat belt with a suitable

tool (such as a knife or scissors) to

release the seat belt. Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-

tractor and insert the tongue into the

buckle 䊊

Auntil you hear and feel the

latch engage.

∙The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

seat belt to move, and allows you

some freedom of movement in the

seat.

∙If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

LRS2571 LRS2674

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips 䊊

Bas shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over

your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear

seating positions’ three-point seat belts

have two modes of operation:

∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-

tend and retract to allow the driver and

passengers some freedom of movement

in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt

when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks

the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat

belt cannot be extended again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the

buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-

turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt

fully retracts. For additional information, re-

fer to “Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During nor-

mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is ac-

tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension. It can also change the op-

eration of the front passenger air bag.

For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental air bag warning light” in

this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-

tain that the seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

LRS2675

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button

on the buckle 䊊

1. The seat belt automati-

cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock

seat belt movement by two separate

methods:

∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor

∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check the operation as follows:

∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-

ward quickly. The retractor should lock

and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service or to learn more about seat belt

operation.

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. For

additional information, refer to “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To

adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊

and move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position 䊊

2, so the belt passes over

the center of the shoulder. The belt should

be away from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Release the ad-

justment button to lock the shoulder belt

anchor into position.

WRS0139 LRS0242

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down to

make sure it is securely fixed in

position.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

best for you. Failure to do so may re-

duce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it

is not possible to properly fit the

lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender

that is compatible with the installed seat

belts is available for purchase. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and may be used for either the

driver or front passenger seating position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for assistance with purchasing an

extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

∙ Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal injury

in the event of an accident.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-

stall child restraints. If the child re-

straint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

∙To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution rec-

ommended for cleaning upholstery or

carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow

the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not

allow the seat belts to retract until they

are completely dry.

∙If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the

seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the

shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry

cloth.

∙Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such

as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible

wires and anchors, work properly. If

loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other

damage on the webbing is found, the

entire seat belt assembly should be re-

placed.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-

lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be

unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-

lease the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect

them. They need to be properly re-

strained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, includ-

ing doctors, teachers, government traffic

safety offices, and community organiza-

tions. Every child is different, so be sure to

learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re-

straint systems:

∙ Rear-facing child restraints

∙ Forward-facing child restraints

∙ Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year

and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed

in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-

facing child restraints are available for chil-

dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-

straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster

seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-

tal injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. For

additional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the ve-

hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-

chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or

with the vehicle seat belt. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because

your vehicle has a supplemental re-

straint system (air bag system) for the

front passenger. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

NISSAN recommends that infants be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

CHILD SAFETY

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

You should choose a child restraint that fits

your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh

at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a

rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-

sible up to the height or weight limit of the

child restraint. Children who outgrow the

height or weight limit of the rear-facing

child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-

facturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommen-

dations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that

comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness until they

reach the maximum height or weight limit

allowed by the child restraint manufac-

turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight

limit of the harness-equipped forward-

facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends

that the child be placed in a commercially

available booster seat to obtain proper

seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the

booster seat should raise the child so that

the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt

should not cross the neck or face and

should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt

should lie snugly across the lower hips or

upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster

seat can only be used in seating positions

that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the

child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-

ing?

∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over

the front edge of the seat with feet flat

on the floor?

∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt

(lap belt low and snug across the hips

and shoulder belt across mid-chest

and shoulder)?

∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-

justed head restraint/headrest?

∙ Will the child be able to stay in position

for the entire ride?

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

If you answered no to any of these ques-

tions, the child should remain in a booster

seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and

state regulations to confirm your child is

using the correct restraint system before

traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo area. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in a sudden stop or

collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

∙

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installation

of child restraints could result in serious

injury or death of a child or other passen-

gers in a sudden stop or collision:

–

The child restraint must be used and

installed properly. Always follow all

of the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

LRS2690 ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– Infants and children should never

be held on anyone’s lap. Even the

strongest adult cannot resist the

forces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both

a child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children

are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seat than in the front

seat. If you must install a forward-

facing child restraint in the front

seat, refer to “Forward-facing child

restraint installation using the seat

belts” in this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating air bag could se-

riously injure or kill a child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be

used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child re-

straint that will fit the child and ve-

hicle. Some child restraints may

not fit properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items

or equipment to the vehicle. Doing

so could damage the child re-

straint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged

anchorage, and a child could be se-

riously injured or killed in a

collision.

– Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child

restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while in the vehicle.

WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, loose objects can injure occu-

pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal

child restraint anchor system, referred to

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system. Some child restraints

include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to these an-

chors. For additional information, refer to

“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible

child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be

used.

Several manufacturers offer child re-

straints for infants and children of various

sizes. When selecting any child restraint,

keep the following points in mind:

∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-

tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-

dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the child

restraint and check the various adjust-

ments to be sure the child restraint is

compatible with your child. Choose a

child restraint that is designed for your

child’s height and weight. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is less than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH

anchors or the seat belt to install the

child restraint (not both at the same

time).

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not

the lower anchors) to install the child

restraint.

∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-

quires the top tether strap on forward-

facing child restraints be secured to the

designated anchor point on the vehicle.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special an-

chor points that are used with LATCH sys-

tem compatible child restraints. This sys-

tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX

or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint unless the

combined weight of the child and child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint

is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehi-

cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the rear outboard

seating positions only. Do not attempt to

install a child restraint in the center position

using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the loca-

tions shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in

the center rear seating position us-

ing the LATCH lower anchors. The

child restraint will not be secured

properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by in-

serting your fingers into the lower

anchor area. Feel to make sure

there are no obstructions over the

anchors such as seat belt webbing

or seat cushion material. The child

restraint will not be secured prop-

erly if the lower anchors are

obstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

LATCH system lower anchor locations

WRS0756

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located as

shown. A label is attached to the seatback

to help you locate the LATCH lower an-

chors.

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to two an-

chors located at certain seating positions

in your vehicle. With this system, you do not

have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the

child restraint. Check your child restraint for

a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the

instructions provided by the child restraint

manufacturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

LATCH lower anchor location

WRS0700

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear par-

cel shelf 䊊

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

WRS0760

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your hand to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint or try installing by using

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not

all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in

the rear seats:

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat. Position the child restraint

on the seat. Always follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to the ELR

mode when the seat belt is fully re-

tracted.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS2395

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up

on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS2397

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the LATCH sys-

tem:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. For additional

information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted –

step 2

WRS0799

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0800

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint. Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (rear bench out-

board seating positions only).

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

Rear bench seat

LRS2627

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information for head

restraint/headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over

the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the rear seats or in the front passen-

ger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position.

Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and,

therefore, must not be used in the

front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section for

head restraint/headrest adjustment,

removal and installation information.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point (rear seat in-

stallation only). For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”

in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0667

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 2 through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not illu-

minated, refer to "Front passenger air

bag and status light" in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

Forward-facing – step 10

WRS0475

Rear bench seat

LRS2627

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information for head

restraint/headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over

the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a

booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-

structions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-

lision greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s

face and neck and the lap portion

of the belt does not cross the

stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the

child’s arm.

– A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that

has a lap/shoulder belt.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following points

in mind:

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-

erly supported by the booster seat or

vehicle seat. The seatback must be at

or above the center of the child’s ears.

For example, if a low back booster seat

is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be

at or above the center of the child’s ears.

If the seatback is lower than the center

of the child’s ears, a high back booster

seat should be used.

LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place the child in the

booster seat and check the various ad-

justments to be sure the booster seat is

compatible with the child. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-

ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,

“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-

tions of this manual before installing a child

restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat

in the rear seat or in the front passenger

seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in

the front seat, move the seat to the

rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front-facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions.

WRS0699

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the booster seat is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

booster seat fit, try another seating

position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be

sure to follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-

ing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in “Three-point type seat

belt with retractor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front pas-

senger air bag status light may or

may not illuminate, depending on the

size of the child and the type of booster

seat being used. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

Front passenger position

LRS0454 WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important infor-

mation concerning the following systems:

∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-

tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System)

∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-

tem

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head

and chest of the driver and front passenger

in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the chest area of the driver and

front passenger in certain side-impact col-

lisions. The side air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in the out-

board seating positions in certain side-

impact or rollover collisions. In a side im-

pact, the curtain air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags are

designed to inflate and remain inflated for

a short time.

These supplemental restraint systems are

designed to supplement the crash protec-

tion provided by the driver and front pas-

senger seat belts and are not a substitute

for them. Seat belts should always be cor-

rectly worn and the occupant seated a

suitable distance away from the steering

wheel, instrument panel and door finishers.

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS)

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower severity

frontal collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents

∙ The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger seat

is unoccupied. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are sit-

ting well back and upright in the seat.

The front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, if you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting side-

ways or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or death in

a crash. You may also receive serious

or fatal injuries from the front air bag

if you are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always properly use the seat belts.

∙ The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage, then in-

flates the air bags as needed. Failure

to properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

∙ The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sen-

sor (weight sensor) that turns the

front passenger air bag OFF under

some conditions. This sensor is only

used in this seat. Failure to be properly

seated and wearing the seat belt can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

∙ Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured when the

front air bag inflates.

WRS0031

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

WARNING

∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them

in your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

WARNING

∙ Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating front air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill your child. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags:

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event

of a frontal impact, rear impact, or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce

the risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

ARS1045 ARS1046 SSS0101

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on

the floor. The side air bag and curtain

air bag inflate with great force. Do not

allow anyone to place their hand, leg

or face near the side air bag on the

side of the seatback of the front seat

or near the side roof rails. Do not allow

anyone sitting in the front seats or

rear outboard seats to extend their

hand out of the window or lean

against the door. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the previous illustrations.

SSS0162 SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

WARNING

∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who

should always be properly restrained.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the

illustrations.

∙ Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

2. Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

seats) (if so equipped)

3. Front door satellite sensor (driver’s side

shown; front passenger side similar)

4. Crash zone sensor

5. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

6. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

7. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor – located in front passenger

cushion frame)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

9. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

10. Side satellite sensor

WRS0032 LRS3007

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items.

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that there is nothing press-

ing against the rear of the seatback,

such as a child restraint installed in

the rear seat or an object stored on

the floor.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger

seat.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed between the seat cushion and

the center console or between the

seat cushion and the door.

∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is

installed in the front passenger seat,

do not position the front passenger

seat so the child restraint contacts the

instrument panel. If the child restraint

does contact the instrument panel,

the system may determine the seat is

occupied and the passenger air bag

may deploy in a collision. Also the

front passenger air bag status light

may not illuminate. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Child restraints” in

this section.

∙ Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status

light.

∙ If you notice that the front passenger

air bag status light is not operating as

described in this section, get the oc-

cupant classification system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Until you have confirmed with a

dealer that your front passenger seat

occupant classification system is

working properly, position the occu-

pants in the rear seating positions.

∙ Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the

front seat does contact the rear seat,

the air bag system may determine a

sensor malfunction has occurred and

the front passenger air bag status

light may illuminate and the supple-

mental air bag warning light may

flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements

under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in

Canada. However, all of the information,

cautions and warnings in this manual

still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The front

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not in-

flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-

cation of proper front air bag system op-

eration.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat

belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi-

cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op-

eration is based on the severity of a colli-

sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For

the front passenger, the occupant classifi-

cation sensors are also monitored. Based

on information from the sensors, only one

front air bag may inflate in a crash, depend-

ing on the crash severity and whether the

front occupants are belted or unbelted. Ad-

ditionally, the front passenger air bag may

be automatically turned OFF under some

conditions, depending on the weight de-

tected on the front passenger seat and

how the seat belt is used. If the front pas-

senger air bag is OFF, the front passenger

air bag status light will be illuminated (if the

seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illu-

minated, but the air bag will be off). For

additional information, refer to “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” in this sec-

tion. One front air bag inflating does not

indicate improper performance of the sys-

tem.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a dis-

ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-

tact information is contained in the front of

this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by the re-

lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-

tion and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the face and chest of the front occupants.

They can help save lives and reduce seri-

ous injuries. However, an inflating front air

bag may cause facial abrasions or other

injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-

straint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN air bags, seat belts

should be correctly worn and the driver

and front passenger seated upright as far

as practical away from the steering wheel

or instrument panel. The front air bags in-

flate quickly in order to help protect the

front occupants. Because of this, the force

of the front air bag inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close

to, or is against, the front air bag module

during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protec-

tion. Failure to follow all instructions in

this manual concerning the use of

seats, seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with

an occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) that turns the front passenger air

bag on or off depending on the weight ap-

plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-

tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or

OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air

bag status light which is located on

the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

"ON" position, the front passenger air bag

status light on the instrument panel illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off or remains illuminated depending on

the front passenger seat occupied status.

The light operates as follows:

∙ Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:

The light is OFF and the front pas-

senger air bag is OFF and will not inflate

in a crash.

∙ Front passenger seat occupied by a

small adult, child or child restraint as

outlined in this section: The light

illuminates to indicate that the front

passenger air bag is OFF and will not

inflate in a crash.

∙ Occupied front passenger seat and the

passenger meets the conditions as

outlined in this section: The light is

OFF to indicate that the front passen-

ger air bag is operational.

In addition to the above, certain objects

placed on the front passenger seat may

also cause the light to operate as de-

scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information related to the

normal operation and troubleshooting of

this occupant classification sensor system,

please refer to “Normal operation” and

“Troubleshooting” in this section.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below in accordance with U.S.regu-

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag

and other air bags in your vehicle are not

part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

ing the air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the

requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this

vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the

seat by weight. For example, if a child is in

the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn

the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-

dance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regula-

tions is on the seat, its weight and the

child’s weight can be detected and cause

the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat belt

as outlined in this manual should not

cause the front passenger air bag to be

automatically turned OFF. For small adults

it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-

pant takes his/her weight off the seat

cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,

by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could

cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing

the seat belt properly for the most effective

protection by the seat belt and supple-

mental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-

propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If

this is not possible, the occupant classifica-

tion sensor is designed to operate as de-

scribed above to turn the front passenger

air bag OFF for specified child restraints as

required by the regulations. Failing to prop-

erly secure child restraints and to use the

ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or

move in a collision or sudden stop. This can

also result in the passenger air bag inflat-

ing in a crash instead of being OFF. For

additional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the front passenger air bag is designed not

to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object’s weight de-

tected by the occupant classification sen-

sor. Other conditions could also result in air

bag inflation, such as if a child is standing

on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all

vehicle occupants are seated and re-

strained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front pas-

senger air bag is automatically turned OFF

with the seat occupied. The light will not

illuminate when the front passenger seat is

unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

front passenger air bag status light is illu-

minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),

it could be that the person is a small adult,

or is not sitting on the seat properly or not

using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the front passenger air bag status

light may or may not be illuminated, de-

pending on the size of the child and the

type of child restraint being used. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated (indicat-

ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash),

it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure

that the child restraint is installed properly,

the seat belt is used properly and the occu-

pant is positioned properly. If the air bag

status light is still not illuminated, reposi-

tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the front passenger air bag status light

will not illuminate even though you believe

that the child restraint, the seat belts and

the occupant are properly positioned, the

system may be sensing an unoccupied

seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). A

NISSAN dealer can check that the system is

OFF by using a special tool. However, until

you have confirmed with a dealer that your

air bag is working properly, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and

front passenger air bag status light will

take a few seconds to register a change in

the front passenger seat status. For ex-

ample, if a large adult who is sitting in the

front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the

front passenger air bag status light will go

from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then

to OFF. This is normal system operation

and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light , located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will blink. Have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification

sensor system to classify the front passen-

ger based on weight, please follow the pre-

cautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

∙ Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on

the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear

of the seatback.

∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the

front passenger seat.

∙ Make sure that the front passenger

seat or seatback is not forced back

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-

ing against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with your feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your

lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the

“Seat belts” section of this manual.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the

front passenger before the vehicle is

put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by check-

ing the front passenger air bag status

light.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification

sensor system locks the classification

during driving so it is important that you

confirm that the front passenger is prop-

erly classified prior to driving. Also, the

occupant classification sensor system

may recalculate the weight of the occu-

pant when the vehicle comes to a stop

(i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so front

passenger seat occupants should con-

tinue to remain seated as outlined

above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag

status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with no front passenger

and no objects on the front passenger

seat:

This may be due to the following condi-

tions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle

should be checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupy-

ing the front passenger seat:

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag

light is functioning as intended. The

front passenger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small

adult, then this may be due to the following

conditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on

the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person

should be advised not to ride in the front

passenger seat and the vehicle should be

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

3. If the light is OFF with a small adult,

child or child restraint occupying the

front passenger seat.

This may be due to the following con-

ditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and cen-

tered on the seat cushion with his/her

feet comfortably extended to the floor.

∙ The child restraint is not properly in-

stalled, as outlined in the “Child re-

straints” section of this manual.

∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small

adult, child or child restraint should be re-

positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle

should be checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Other supplemental front-impact air

bag precautions

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Such

objects may become dangerous pro-

jectiles and cause injury if the front air

bags inflate.

∙ Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This

is to prevent accidental inflation of

the supplemental air bag or damage

to the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end struc-

ture. This could affect proper opera-

tion of the front air bag system.

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. Tampering includes changes to

the steering wheel and the instru-

ment panel assembly by placing ma-

terial over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by in-

stalling additional trim material

around the air bag system.

∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in seri-

ous personal injury.

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing ma-

terial on the seat cushion or by install-

ing additional trim material, such as

seat covers, on the seat that are not

specifically designed to assure proper

air bag operation. Additionally, do not

stow any objects under the front pas-

senger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may interfere

with the proper operation of the occu-

pant classification sensor (weight

sensor).

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equip-

ment. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the air bag

system.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and

roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental

air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside

of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-

tain air bags are located in the side roof

rails. All of the information, cautions, and

warnings in this manual apply and must

be followed. The side air bags and curtain

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of colli-

sion are similar to those of a higher severity

side impact. They are designed to inflate on

the side where the vehicle is impacted.

They may not inflate in certain side colli-

sions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate

in certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-

ments (for example, during severe off-

roading) may cause the curtain air bags to

inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always

an indication of proper side air bag and

curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke.This smoke is

not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those

with a history of a breathing condition

should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest of the front occupants. Curtain

air bags help to cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in the front and rear

outboard seating positions. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-

ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain air

bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.

Side air bags and curtain air bags do not

provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver and passenger seated up-

right as far as practical away from the side

air bag. Rear seat passengers should be

seated as far away as practical from the

door finishers and side roof rails. The side

air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly

in order to help protect the occupants. Be-

cause of this, the force of the side air bags

and curtain air bags inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close

to, or is against, these air bag modules dur-

ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate

quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bags will remain inflated for

a short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is

in the ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

LRS0259

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door fin-

isher and the front seat. Such objects

may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if a side air bag

inflates.

∙ Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain air bag system com-

ponents will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental inflation of the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

curtain air bag systems.

∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. For example, do not change the

front seats by placing material near

the seatbacks or by installing addi-

tional trim material, such as seat cov-

ers, around the side air bag.

∙ Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems should be

done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation

of electrical equipment should also be

done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-

ing harnesses* should not be modi-

fied or disconnected. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and probing

devices should not be used on the

side air bag or curtain air bag

systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors

are yellow or orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)

(front seats)

WARNING

∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not

activated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to

prevent damage to or accidental acti-

vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-

ing with the pretensioner system may

result in serious personal injury.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work around and on

the pretensioner system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the preten-

sioner system.

∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-

posal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate

with the supplemental air bag system in

certain types of collisions. Working with the

seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help

tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-

comes involved in certain types of colli-

sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased with the

seat belt retractor. These seat belts are

used the same way as conventional seat

belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indi-

cate a fire. Care should be taken not to

inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load

limiters allow the seat belt to release web-

bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against

the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning

light is used to indicate malfunctions

in the pretensioner(s) system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Supplemental

air bag warning light” in this section. If the

operation of the supplemental air bag

warning light indicates there is a malfunc-

tion, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the preten-

sioner system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (lo-

cated on the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front-impact air bag system are placed in

the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may

cause serious injury or death.

WRS0897

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-

tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates for about 7 seconds and

then turns off. This means the system is

operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner

systems may not operate properly. They

must be checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement

procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to

inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-

minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-

mental air bag warning light remains illu-

minated after inflation has occurred. These

systems should be repaired and/or re-

placed as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,

curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-

lated parts should be pointed out to the

person performing the maintenance. The

ignition switch should always be placed in

the LOCK position when working under the

hood or inside the vehicle.

LRS0100

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioner(s) must

also be replaced. The air bag module

and pretensioner(s) should be re-

placed. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

However, the air bag module and pre-

tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected if there is

any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner sys-

tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) should be

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to verify it is still

functioning correctly. The OCS should

be checked even if no air bags deploy

as a result of the impact. Failure to

verify proper OCS function may result

in an improper air bag deployment re-

sulting in injury or death.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

MEMO

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel................................2-2

Meters and gauges..............................2-3

Speedometer and odometer .................2-5

Tachometer ..................................2-8

Engine coolant temperature gauge

(if so equipped) ...............................2-9

Fuel gauge ...................................2-9

Trip computer ...............................2-10

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ......................................2-12

Checking lights ..............................2-13

Warning lights ...............................2-13

Indicator lights ..............................2-18

Audible reminders ...........................2-20

Wiper and washer switch .......................2-21

Switch operation ............................2-21

Rear window defroster switch ..................2-22

Headlight and turn signal switch ...............2-22

Headlight control switch.....................2-22

Instrument brightness control...............2-24

Turn signal switch ...........................2-24

Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............2-25

Horn ...........................................2-25

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch......2-26

Power outlets ..................................2-26

Storage ........................................2-27

Front-door pockets..........................2-27

Seatback pocket (if so equipped) ............2-28

Storagetray.................................2-28

Glovebox....................................2-29

Cup holders .................................2-29

Windows .......................................2-30

Power windows (if so equipped) .............2-30

Manual windows (if so equipped) ............2-32

Interior lights ...................................2-32

Map light (if so equipped) ....................2-33

Trunk light ......................................2-34

1. Headlight/turn signal switch/fog

light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-22)

2. Driver’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

Horn (P. 2-25)

3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-12)

4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)

5. Vents (P. 4-8)

6. Rear window defroster switch

(P. 2-22)

7. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-42)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

9. Climate controls (P. 4-8)

10. Audio system (P. 4-16)

11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

12. Glove box (P. 2-27)

13. Power outlet (P. 2-26)

14. USB connection port and AUX IN

jack (P. 4-41)

15. Shift lever (P. 5-11)

16. Cup holders (P. 2-27)

17. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)

LII2542

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

18. Cruise control switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-18)

19. Tilt steering (P. 3-16)

20. Audio control switches (P. 4-47)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System switches (P. 4-49)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-26)

22. Fuel-filler door release lever (P. 3-13)

Hood release lever (P. 3-10)

23. Electronic outside rearview mirror

control switch (P. 3-18)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Fuel gauge

4. Odometer

Twin trip odometer

Trip computer

5. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) position indicator

6. Instrument brightness control

knob

7. Change/reset button

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3131

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

CAUTION

∙ To clean the meter lens, use a soft

cloth, dampened with water. Never

use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,

thinner or any kind of solvent or paper

towel with a chemical cleaning agent.

They will scratch or cause discolor-

ation to the lens.

∙ Do not spray any liquid such as water

on the meter lens. Spraying liquid

may cause the systems to

malfunction.

1. Tachometer

2. Temperature gauge

3. Odometer

Twin trip odometer

Trip computer

Outside air temperature (if so

equipped)

4. Fuel gauge

5. Speedometer

6. Change/reset button

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2146

2-4 Instruments and controls

7. Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion (CVT) position indicator

8. Instrument brightness control

CAUTION

∙ To clean the meter lens, use a soft

cloth, dampened with water. Never

use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,

thinner or any kind of solvent or paper

towel with a chemical cleaning agent.

They will scratch or cause discolor-

ation to the lens.

∙ Do not spray any liquid such as water

on the meter lens. Spraying liquid

may cause the systems to

malfunction.

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-

eter and odometer. The speedometer is

located on the right side or in the center of

the meter cluster. The odometer is located

within the trip computer.

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2118

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2136

Instruments and controls 2-5

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is dis-

played when the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position.

The odometer 䊊

1records the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer 䊊

2records the dis-

tance of individual trips.

Changing the display

Press the change/reset button 䊊

3to

change the display as follows:

Odometer (ODO) →Trip →Trip

→Instant fuel consumption →Average fuel

consumption →DTE (cruising range) →

Odometer (ODO)

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

3for more

than 1 second resets the currently dis-

played trip odometer to zero.

Average fuel economy and distance to

empty information is also available. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Trip com-

puter” in this section.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3305

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2139

2-6 Instruments and controls

Loose fuel cap warning message

Push the reset button 䊊

Afor more than

1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning message after the fuel cap has

been tightened. For additional information,

refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section of this

manual.

Check tire pressure warning

message (if so equipped)

The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is

displayed when the low tire pressure warn-

ing light is illuminated and low tire pressure

is detected. Check and adjust the tire pres-

sure to the recommended COLD tire pres-

sure shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label. The CHECK TIRE PRES

warning message can be turned off using

the reset button 䊊

Aon the meter, the low

tire pressure warning light will not be

turned off.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3306

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2025

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3307

Instruments and controls 2-7

The low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated until the tires are inflated to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. The

CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is dis-

played each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated. For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in this sec-

tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section,

and “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (rpm).

Do not rev the engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce

engine speed. Operating the engine in

the red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2128

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3598

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2151

2-8 Instruments and controls

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE (if so equipped)

Type A (if so equipped)

Engine coolant temperature monitoring is

performed by the high temperature warn-

ing light. For additional information, refer to

“High temperature warning light” in this

section.

Type B (if so equipped)

NOTE:

The ignition switch must be placed in the

ON position for the gauge to give a read-

ing.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature. The engine coolant tempera-

ture will vary with the outside air tempera-

ture and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates a coolant tem-

perature near the hot (H) end of the nor-

mal range, reduce vehicle speed to de-

crease the temperature. If the gauge is

over the normal range, stop the vehicle

as soon as safely possible. If the engine

is overheated, continued operation of

the vehicle may seriously damage the

engine. For additional information, re-

fer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the

“In case of emergency” section of this

manual for immediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-

ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or

down hills.

Type A (if so equipped): The fuel level seg-

ments 䊊

Awill blink when the amount of fuel

in the tank is getting low.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2501

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2286

Instruments and controls 2-9

Type B (if so equipped): The low fuel warn-

ing light 䊊

Awill turn on when the amount of

fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-

isters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler

door is located on the driver’s side of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

check engine light may come on. Re-

fuel as soon as possible. After a few

driving trips, the light should

turn off. If the light remains on after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

TRIP COMPUTER

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can

be selected by pushing the change/reset

button 䊊

Aon the instrument panel located

near the speedometer. The following

modes can be selected in the display 䊊

∙ Odometer

∙ Trip A

∙ Trip B

∙ Instant fuel consumption

∙ Average fuel consumption

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2287

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2470

2-10 Instruments and controls

∙ Distance to empty

∙ Outside air temperature (if so equipped)

Odometer

The odometer records the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

Trip A

Measures the distance of one specific trip.

Trip B

Measures the distance of a second specific

trip.

Instant fuel consumption

The instant fuel consumption mode shows

the instant fuel economy. The display up-

dates instantly when driving.

Average fuel consumption (mpg

or l (liter)/100 km)

The average fuel consumption mode

shows the average fuel consumption since

the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing

the trip or change button for more than

approximately 1 second. The display is up-

dated every 30 seconds. At about the first

1/3 mi (500 m) after a reset, the display

shows (----).

Distance to empty

The distance to empty mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can

be driven before refueling. The range is

constantly being calculated, based on the

amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the

actual fuel consumption.

The distance to empty includes a low

range warning feature: when the fuel level

is low, the distance to empty is automati-

cally selected and the digits blink in order

to draw the driver’s attention. Press the trip

computer change/reset button 䊊

Aif you

wish to return to the mode that was se-

lected before the warning occurred.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the

distance to empty will display (----).

Outside air temperature (°F or °C)

(if so equipped)

The outside air temperature is displayed in

°F or °C.

The ambient temperature sensor is lo-

cated in front of the radiator. The sensor

may be affected by road or engine heat,

wind directions and other driving condi-

tions. The display may differ from the ac-

tual ambient temperature or the tempera-

ture displayed on various signs or

billboards.

Trip computer reset

Pressing the change/reset button for

more than 3 seconds will reset all modes

except Trip A and distance to empty.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2138

Instruments and controls 2-11

or Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

Power steering warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

or Brake warning light Seat belt warning light and chime (if so

equipped)

Overdrive OFF indicator light

(if so equipped)

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Side light and headlight indicator light

(green) (if so equipped)

Door open warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator light

Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise main switch indicator light

(if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

High temperature warning light (red)

(if so equipped)

Front fog light indicator light

(if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

or Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-12 Instruments and controls

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. The following lights (if

so equipped) will come on:

or , , , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) will

come on briefly and then go off:

or , (red) , , ,

, , ,

If any light does not come on or operate in

a way other than described, it may indicate

a burned out bulb and/or a system mal-

function. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING LIGHTS

This vehicle has various warning lights that

may illuminate to indicate a potential prob-

lem. For additional information, refer to the

specific light in this section.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the ABS warning light illuminates

and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is

operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while

the engine is running or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system

then operates normally but without anti-

lock assistance. For additional information,

refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

or Brake warning

light

This light functions for both the parking

brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on when the

parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid

level. If the light comes on while the engine

is running, with the parking brake not ap-

plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-

lowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have

the warning system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-13

WARNING

∙ Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you

judge it to be safe, drive carefully to

the nearest service station for repairs.

Otherwise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be

dangerous.

∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

∙ If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the

brake warning light and the ABS warning

light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is

not functioning properly. Have the brake

system checked and, if necessary, repaired.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed

driving and abrupt braking. For additional

information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the charging sys-

tem is not functioning properly. Turn the

engine off and check the generator belt. If

the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the

light remains on, have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doing

so will bypass the variable voltage

control system and the vehicle bat-

tery may not charge completely. For

additional information, refer to “Vari-

able voltage control system” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

∙ Do not continue driving if the genera-

tor belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors

are not closed securely while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure

warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If

the light flickers or comes on during nor-

mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,

stop the engine immediately and call a

NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair

shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is

not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For

additional information, refer to “Engine oil”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Such damage is not cov-

ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as

it is safe to do so.

2-14 Instruments and controls

High temperature warning

light (red) (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the high temperature warning

light illuminates and then turns off. This in-

dicates that the high temperature sensor

in the engine coolant system is opera-

tional.

When driving, the high temperature warn-

ing light may turn off. This indicates that the

engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range.

CAUTION

If the high temperature warning light

illuminates while the engine is running,

it may indicate the engine temperature

is extremely high. Stop the vehicle

safely as soon as possible. If the vehicle

is overheated, continuing vehicle op-

eration may seriously damage the en-

gine. For additional information, refer

to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

or Low fuel warning

light

This light comes on when the fuel level in

the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon

as it is convenient, preferably before the

fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be

a small reserve of fuel in the tank when

the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty), show-

ing no more fuel bars.

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-

tors the tire pressure of all tires except the

spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about

1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illumi-

nate.

A CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning

message is also displayed in the odom-

eter.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust

the tire pressure of all four tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel located in the driver’s door opening.

The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-

flated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds

above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge

to check the tire pressure.

The low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated until the tires are inflated to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. The

CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is dis-

played each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated.

Instruments and controls 2-15

For additional information, refer to "Check

tire pressure warning message" in this sec-

tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section

and in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning does not

appear if the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “Tire

pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, have the vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could re-

sult in serious personal injury or

death. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

show on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label located in the driver’s

door opening to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjust-

ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire

is flat and all tires are properly in-

flated, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

2-16 Instruments and controls

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

∙ Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Power steering warning

light

WARNING

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

∙

When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running,

there will be no power assist for the

steering. You will still have control of the

vehicle, but the steering will be harder to

operate.Have the power steering system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the power steering warning light

illuminates. After starting the engine, the

power steering warning light turns off. This

indicates the power steering is operational.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the power steering is not function-

ing properly and may need servicing. Have

the power steering checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When the power steering warning light illu-

minates with the engine running, there will

be no power assist for the steering, but you

will still have control of the vehicle. At this

time, greater steering effort is required to

operate the steering wheel, especially in

sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power

steering” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Seat belt warning light and

chime (if so equipped)

The light and chime remind you to fasten

your seat belts. The light illuminates when-

ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position and remains illuminated

until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the

same time, the chime sounds for about

6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illumi-

nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not

fastened when the front passenger’s seat

is occupied . For 7 seconds after the igni-

tion switch is placed in the ON position, the

system does not activate the warning light

for the front passenger.

Instruments and controls 2-17

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

Supplemental air bag

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position, the supplemental air

bag warning light illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off. This means

the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,

and pretensioner seat belt systems need

servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supple-

mental restraint system (air bag system)

and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-

tion properly. For additional information, re-

fer to “Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

This vehicle has various indicator lights

that may illuminate to indicate a system

status. For additional information, refer to

the specific light in this section.

Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT)

position indicator light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this indicator light shows the shift

lever position. For additional information,

refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch

indicator light (if so

equipped)

The light comes on when the cruise control

main switch is pushed. The light goes out

when the main switch is pushed again.

When the cruise main switch indicator light

comes on, the cruise control system is op-

erational. For additional information, refer

to “Cruise control” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

Front fog light indicator

light (if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi-

nates when the front fog lights are on. For

additional information, refer to “Fog light

switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status light will

be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

off depending on how the front passenger

seat is being used.

2-18 Instruments and controls

For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light” in the

“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the head-

light high beams are on and goes out when

the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes

on when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or

blinks while the engine is running, it may

indicate a potential emission control mal-

function.

The MIL may also come on steady if the

fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the

vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure

the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least

3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light

should turn off if no other potential emis-

sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for

20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds

when the engine is not running, it indicates

that the vehicle is not ready for an emission

control system inspection/maintenance

test. For additional information, refer to

“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance

(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

∙ MIL on steady — An emission control

system malfunction has been de-

tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in

the trip computer. If the fuel-filler cap is

loose or missing, tighten or install the

cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light does

not turn off after a few driving trips, have

the vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has

been detected which may damage the

emission control system. To reduce or

avoid emission control system dam-

age:

– do not drive at speeds above

45 mph (72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on

steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, reduced

fuel economy, and possible damage to

the emission control system.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Overdrive OFF indicator

light (if so equipped)

The overdrive OFF indicator light illumi-

nates when the overdrive OFF mode is se-

lected.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green) (if so

equipped)

The side light and headlight indicator light

illuminates when the side light or head-

lights are on (not including daytime run-

ning or signature lights). If the headlight

switch is in the AUTO position, the side light

and headlight indicator light will illuminate

when the headlights turn on. For additional

information, refer to “Headlight and turn

signal switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC sys-

tem is operating, thus alerting the driver to

the fact that the road surface is slippery

and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working;

this is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after

the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after ap-

proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-

erational. If the light does not come on

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn

signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is

turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the

VDC OFF switch is pushed to the OFF posi-

tion. This indicates the VDC system has

been turned off.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine and the system will operate

normally. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

The VDC indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after

about 2 seconds if the system is opera-

tional. If the light stays on or comes on

along with the indicator light while

you are driving, have the VDC system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

While the VDC system is operating, you

might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-

tem working when starting the vehicle or

accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a disc brake pad requires

replacement, it makes a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-

tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-

pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon

as possible if the warning sound is heard. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is

opened while the key is left in the ignition

switch. Remove the key and take it with you

when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF

position, a chime sounds when the driver’s

door is opened if the headlights or parking

lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off or to

AUTO before leaving the vehicle.

Parking brake reminder chime

A chime sounds if the parking brake is set

and the vehicle is driven. The chime will

stop if the parking brake is released or the

vehicle speed returns to zero.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper

at the following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-

eration can be adjusted (if so

equipped) by turning the knob toward

䊊

A(Slower) or 䊊

B(Faster).

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-

eration

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed op-

eration

Push the lever up 䊊

4to have one sweep

operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 䊊

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several

times.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2789

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2131

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-21

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm the windshield

with the defroster before you wash the

windshield.

CAUTION

∙ Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

∙ Do not operate the washer if the res-

ervoir is empty.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

To defrost the rear window glass, start the

engine and push the rear window defroster

switch on. The rear window defroster indi-

cator light on the switch comes on. Push

the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1Rotate the switch to the position,

and the front parking, tail, license plate,

and instrument panel lights will come

on.

䊊

2Rotate the switch to the position,

and the headlights will come on and all

the other lights remain on.

LIC2116

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2127

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

2-22 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, en-

sure the low beams are engaged and

push the lever forward. The high beam

lights come on and the light illu-

minates. For additional information, re-

fer to “Headlight control switch” in this

section.

䊊

2Pull the lever back to return to the low

beams.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes

the headlight high beams on and off.

The low beams need not be engaged

for this function.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position while the headlight switch is in

the or position, the headlights

will turn off after a period of time.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature

automatically turns off the headlights

after a period of time, you should turn

the headlight switch to the OFF position

when the engine is not running to avoid

discharging the vehicle battery.

Type B (if so equipped)

WIC1509 LIC2128

Instruments and controls 2-23

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

The instrument brightness control oper-

ates when the headlight control switch is in

the or position.

Type A: Press the control 䊊

Ato adjust the

brightness of instrument panel lights.

Type B: Press the control 䊊

Ato adjust the

brightness of instrument panel lights.

Also, Type B is equipped with daytime

brightness control. Brightness can be ad-

justed with the headlight control switch in

the OFF position by pressing the control 䊊

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is

completed, the turn signal cancels au-

tomatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, to signal a lane change.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2289

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2137 WIC1512

2-24 Instruments and controls

Hold the lever until the lane change is

completed.

Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, and release the lever.

The turn signal will automatically flash

three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal

a lane change based on road and traffic

conditions.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so

equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the position, then turn the

fog light switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light

switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low

beams selected for the fog lights to oper-

ate. The fog lights automatically turn off

when the high beam headlights are se-

lected.

To sound the horn, push the center pad

area of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury.

WIC1513 LIC2419

HORN

Instruments and controls 2-25

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC

system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will

be reduced even if the accelerator is de-

pressed to the floor. If maximum engine

power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The indicator will come

on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

The power outlets are for powering electri-

cal accessories such as cellular tele-

phones. The outlets are rated at 12 volt,

120W (10A) maximum.

CAUTION

∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

LIC3344

Instrument panel

LIC3609

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

POWER OUTLETS

2-26 Instruments and controls

∙ Only certain power outlets are de-

signed for use with a cigarette lighter

unit. Do not use any other power out-

let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for additional information

∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

∙ Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear win-

dow defroster is on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned off.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

Console (if so equipped)

LIC3610 LIC2157

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-27

SEATBACK POCKET (if so

equipped)

The seatback pocket is located on the

back of the passenger’s seat. The pocket

can be used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items:

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket or head restraint/headrest.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

STORAGE TRAY

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays

to help prevent injury in an accident or

sudden stop.

LIC1328 LIC3614

2-28 Instruments and controls

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

Use pocket on glove box lid 䊊

Ato store and

hide small objects.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is

hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTION

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

LIC3613

Front

LIC3611

Rear

LIC3612

Instruments and controls 2-29

CAUTION

∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liq-

uid containers.

POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before closing

the windows. Use the window lock

switch to prevent unexpected use of

the power windows.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON position, or

for a period of time after the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s

or passenger’s door is opened during this

period of time, the power to the windows is

canceled.

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger’s side window

switch

4. Right rear passenger’s window

switch

5. Left rear passenger’s window

switch

6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window

switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped

with switches to open or close the front

and rear passenger windows.

Bottle holder

LIC2158 WIC1100

WINDOWS

2-30 Instruments and controls

To open a window, push the switch and

hold it down. To close a window, pull the

switch and hold it up. To stop the opening

or closing function at any time, simply re-

lease the switch.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed,

only the driver’s side window can be

opened or closed. Push it again to cancel

the window lock function.

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates

only the corresponding passenger’s win-

dow. To open the window, push the switch

and hold it down 䊊

1. To close the window,

pull the switch up 䊊

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or

close only the corresponding windows. To

open the window, push the switch and hold

it down 䊊

1. To close the window, pull the

switch up 䊊

LIC0718 LIC0718

Instruments and controls 2-31

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with au-

tomatic operation, press the window

switch down to the second detent and re-

lease it; it need not be held. The window

automatically opens all the way. To stop

the window, lift the switch up while the win-

dow is opening.

MANUAL WINDOWS (if so

equipped)

The side windows can be opened or closed

by turning the hand crank on each door.

The interior light has a three-position

switch and operates regardless of ignition

switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position 䊊

the interior lights illuminate, regardless of

door position. The lights will go off after a

period of time unless the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position.

When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊

the interior lights will stay on for a period of

time when:

LIC0410 LIC3352 SIC2063A

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-32 Instruments and controls

∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob (if

so equipped), a key or the power door

lock switch (if so equipped) while all

doors are closed and the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position.

∙ The driver’s door is opened and then

closed while the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

∙ The key is removed from the ignition

switch while all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer is

activated when:

∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key fob

(if so equipped), a key, or the power door

lock switch (if so equipped).

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊

the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-

less of door position.

The lights will turn off automatically after a

period of time while doors are open to pre-

vent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

MAP LIGHT (if so equipped)

The map light has a three-position switch

and operates regardless of ignition switch

position.

When the switch is in the ON position 䊊

the map light illuminates, regardless of

door position. The light will go off after a

period of time unless the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position.

LIC2126

Instruments and controls 2-33

When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊

the map light will stay on for a period of

time when:

∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob (if

so equipped), a key or the power door

lock switch while all doors are closed

and the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position.

∙ The driver’s door is opened and then

closed while the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

∙ The key is removed from the ignition

switch while all doors are closed.

The light will turn off while the timer is acti-

vated when:

∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key fob

(if so equipped), a key, or the power door

lock switch.

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊

the map light does not illuminate, regard-

less of door position.

The light will turn off automatically after a

period of time while doors are open to pre-

vent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is

opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the

light goes off. For additional information,

refer to “Exterior and interior lights” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TRUNK LIGHT

2-34 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

Doors ...........................................3-3

Locking with key..............................3-4

Locking with inside lock knob.................3-4

Locking with power door lock switch

(if so equipped) ...............................3-5

Automatic door locks (if so equipped) ........3-5

Child safety rear door lock ....................3-6

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-6

How to use remote keyless entry

system .......................................3-7

Hood ...........................................3-10

Trunk lid .........................................3-11

Key operation ................................3-11

Opener operation (if so equipped) ...........3-12

Interior trunk lid release .....................3-12

Fuel-filler door ..................................3-13

Opener operation ........................... 3-13

Fuel-filler cap ................................3-13

Steering wheel .................................3-16

Tilt operation ................................3-16

Sun visors ......................................3-16

Vanity mirror ................................ 3-17

Mirrors ......................................... 3-17

Rearview mirror ............................. 3-17

Outside mirrors ............................. 3-17

1. Master key

2. Valet key

3. Key number plate

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,

it can be duplicated without knowing the

key number.

1. Integrated door lock key fob (2

sets)

2. Key number plate

CAUTION

Do not leave the ignition key inside the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

Type A (if so equipped)

SPA2342

Type B—Remote keyless entry key fob (if

so equipped)

LPD2027

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,

it can be duplicated without knowing the

key number.

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be

opened using the inside or outside door

handles. The doors must be unlocked to

open the doors.

WARNING

∙ Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from unintention-

ally opening the doors, and will help

keep out intruders.

∙ Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows and/or inad-

vertent door lock activation, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others and/or pets un-

attended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and/or pets.

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as

shown.

Manual (if so equipped)

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front

of the vehicle 䊊

1. To unlock, turn the key

toward the rear of the vehicle 䊊

Power (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to

lock or unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front 䊊

1of the

vehicle locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear

䊊

2of the vehicle unlocks that door. From

that position, returning the key to neutral

䊊

3(where the key can only be removed and

inserted) and turning it toward the rear

again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors

䊊

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊

then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move

the inside lock knob to the unlock position

䊊

Driver’s side

LPD2160 LPD2161

Inside lock

SPA2760

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)

To lock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-

ger’s side) to the lock position 䊊

1. When

locking the door this way, be certain not to

leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push

the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas-

senger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s

or front passenger’s side) is moved to the

lock position with the key in the ignition

switch and any door opens, all doors will

lock and then unlock automatically. This

helps to prevent the keys from being acci-

dently locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so

equipped)

∙ All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 24 km/h

(15 mph).

∙

All doors unlock automatically when the

transmission is placed in the P (Park) po-

sition (if so equipped), when the ignition

is turned to the OFF position, or when the

key is removed from the ignition.

WPD0381

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear

doors from being opened accidentally, es-

pecially when small children are in the ve-

hicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on

the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊

the door can be opened from the outside

or the inside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊

the door can be opened only from the

outside.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ The remote keyless entry key fob

transmits radio waves when the but-

tons are pressed. The FAA advises ra-

dio waves may affect aircraft naviga-

tion and communication systems. Do

not operate the remote keyless entry

key fob while on an airplane. Make

sure the buttons are not operated un-

intentionally when the unit is stored

for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn

the interior lights on, and activate the panic

alarm by using the key fob from outside the

vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the ve-

hicle before locking the doors.

The key fob can operate at a distance of

approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.

The effective distance depends on the

conditions around the vehicle.

As many as four key fobs can be used with

one vehicle. For information concerning

the purchase and use of additional key

fobs, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

The key fob will not function when:

∙ The battery is discharged.

∙ The distance between the vehicle and

the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when

the key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the key fob:

∙ Do not allow the key fob, which con-

tains electrical components, to come

into contact with water or salt water.

This could affect the system function.

∙ Do not drop the key fob.

∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply

against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the key fob.

∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If

the key fob gets wet, immediately

wipe until it is completely dry.

SPA2037

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Do not place the key fob for an ex-

tended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key

holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the key fob near equip-

ment that produces a magnetic field,

such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-

ommends erasing the ID code of that

key fob. This will prevent the key fob

from unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding the

erasing procedure, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Close all doors.

4. Press the button on the key fob.

All the doors lock. The hazard warning

lights flash twice and the horn beeps

once to indicate all doors are locked.

∙ When the button is pressed

with all doors locked, the hazard

warning lights flash twice and the

horn beeps once as a reminder that

the doors are already locked.

∙ If a door is open and you press

the button, the doors will lock

but the horn will not beep and the

hazard lights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Silencing the

horn beep feature” in this section.

LPD2028

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Unlocking doors

Press the button on the key fob once.

∙ Only the driver’s door unlocks.

∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if

all doors are completely closed with the

ignition switch in any position except

the ON position.

∙ The interior light turns on and the light

timer activates for 30 seconds when

the interior light switch is in the DOOR

position with the ignition switch in any

position except the ON position.

Press the button on the key fob again

within five seconds.

∙ All doors unlock.

∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if

all doors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without

waiting a period of time by inserting the key

into the ignition switch and placing the ig-

nition switch in the ON or START position,

locking the doors with the key fob, power

door lock switch or pushing the interior

light switch to the off position.

Auto relock

When the button on the key fob is

pressed, all doors will lock automatically

within 1 minute unless one of the following

operations is performed:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ A key is inserted into the ignition switch

and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

∙ Press the button.

Releasing the trunk lid

Press the button on the key fob for

longer than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk

lid. The trunk release button on the key fob

will not operate when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

LPD2029 LPD2030

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you may activate the panic alarm to

call attention by pressing and holding

the button on the key fob for longer

than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on

for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

∙ It has run for a period of time.

∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.

Using the interior light

Press the button on the key fob once

to turn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior

light” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be

deactivated using the key fob.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three

times to confirm that the horn beep fea-

ture has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

LPD2031 LPD2032

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

The hazard warning lights will flash once

and the horn will sound once to confirm

that the horn beep feature has been reac-

tivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does

not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-

gered.

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊

located below the instrument panel

until the hood springs up slightly.

2. Locate the lever 䊊

2in between the

hood and grille and push the lever side-

ways with your fingertips.

3. Raise the hood 䊊

4. Remove the support rod and insert it

into the slot 䊊

Hold the coated parts when removing or

resetting the support rod. Avoid direct

contact with the metal parts, as they

may be hot immediately after the engine

has been stopped.

When closing the hood, return the support

rod to its original position, lower the hood

to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the

latch and release it. This allows proper en-

gagement of the hood latch.

LPD2618

HOOD

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

∙ Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the hood

to fly open and result in an accident.

∙ If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

WARNING

∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Ex-

haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

∙ Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

rear seatback and trunk lid securely

latched when not in use, and prevent

children’s access to car keys. KEY OPERATION

To open the trunk lid, turn the key clock-

wise. To close the trunk lid, lower and push

the trunk lid down securely.

LPD2036

TRUNK LID

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

OPENER OPERATION (if so

equipped)

WARNING

∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Ex-

haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

∙ Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

rear seatback and trunk lid securely

latched when not in use, and prevent

children’s access to car keys.

The trunk lid release is located on the floor

to the left of the driver’s seat.

To open the trunk lid, pull the opener lever

up.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the

trunk lid down securely. INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

LPD2215 LPD0396

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The interior trunk lid release mechanism

provides a means of escape for children

and adults in the event they become

locked inside the trunk.

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the

illuminated release handle until the lock re-

leases and push up on the trunk lid. The

release handle is made of a material that

glows in the dark after a brief exposure to

ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk com-

partment on the trunk lock at the center of

the trunk lid.

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel-filler door release is located below

the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler

door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel-

filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seri-

ously injured if it is misused or mis-

handled. Always stop the engine and

do not smoke or allow open flames or

sparks near the vehicle when

refueling.

LPD2371 LPD2616

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling

may cause fuel overflow, resulting in

fuel spray and possibly a fire.

∙ Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious mal-

function and possible injury. It could

also cause the Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL) to come on.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

to attempt to start your vehicle.

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable

fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Fuel

Recommendation” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

∙ The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-

pear if the fuel-filler cap is not prop-

erly tightened. It may take a few driv-

ing trips for the message to be

displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-

filler cap properly after the LOOSE

FUEL CAP warning appears may cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to illuminate.

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light does

not turn off after a few driving trips,

have your vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and Controls” sec-

tion in this manual.

∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

NOTE:

Changing ignition switch status during

the refueling process may cause a delay

in fuel gauge response.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-

wise to remove.

2. Loop the tether strap around the hook

䊊

1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until it

clicks.

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

message

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message

displays in the trip computer when the

fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly af-

ter the vehicle has been refueled. It may

take a few driving trips for the message to

be displayed. To turn off the warning mes-

sage, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

previously described as soon as pos-

sible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset

button 䊊

Ain the meter for about 1 sec-

ond to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning message after tightening the

fuel-filler cap.

LPD2617 LPD2343

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever 䊊

1down and adjust the

steering wheel up or down 䊊

2to the de-

sired position.

Pull the lock lever 䊊

1up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

1. To block glare from the front, swing

down the sun visor 䊊

2. To block glare from the side, remove

the sun visor from the center mount

and swing the visor to the side 䊊

3. Slide the extension 䊊

3sun visor in or

out as needed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-

turning the extension to its original

position.

∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcibly downward.

LPD0355

WPD0315

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

VANITY MIRROR

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun

visor down and flip open the mirror cover.

REARVIEW MIRROR

The night position 䊊

1reduces glare from

the headlights of vehicles behind you at

night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in

daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror

on the passenger side are closer than

they appear. Be careful when moving

to the right. Using only this mirror

could cause an accident. Use the in-

side mirror or glance over your shoul-

der to properly judge distances to

other objects.

∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-

ing. You could lose control of your ve-

hicle and cause an accident.

SPA1733 WPD0126

MIRRORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Electric control type

The outside mirror remote control will op-

erate only when the ignition switch is in the

ACC or ON position.

Move the small switch 䊊

1to select the right

or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de-

sired position using the large switch 䊊

Move the small switch 䊊

1to the center

(neutral) position to prevent accidentally

moving the mirror.

Manual folding outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to

fold it.

LPD0237 LPD2216

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,

audio and phone systems

RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ...............4-2

RearView Monitor system operation ..........4-3

How to read the displayed lines...............4-3

Difference between predicted and

actual distances..............................4-4

Adjusting the screen .........................4-6

RearView Monitor system limitations .........4-6

System maintenance.........................4-7

Vents............................................4-8

Heater and air conditioner (manual) .............4-8

Controls ......................................4-9

Heater operation ............................4-10

Air conditioner operation ....................4-12

Air flow charts ...............................4-13

Servicing air conditioner ........................4-16

Audio system...................................4-16

Radio........................................4-16

FM radio reception ..........................4-16

AM radio reception .......................... 4-17

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .....4-17

Audio operation precautions ................4-18

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player (Type A) (if so equipped)...............4-26

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player (Type B) (if so equipped)...............4-30

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player (if so equipped) ..................4-35

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection

port (if so equipped) .........................4-41

iPod®* player operation (if so equipped)......4-43

Bluetooth® streaming audio

(if so equipped) ..............................4-45

CD care and cleaning........................4-46

Steering wheel switch for audio control......4-47

Antenna.....................................4-48

Car phone or CB radio ..........................4-48

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(Type A) (if so equipped) ........................4-49

Regulatory Information......................4-50

Using the system............................4-51

Control buttons .............................4-53

Getting started ..............................4-54

List of voice commands .....................4-55

Voice Adaptation (VA) mode .................4-60

Manual control ..............................4-62

Troubleshooting guide ......................4-62

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(Type B) (if so equipped) ........................4-64

Regulatory information ......................4-65

Using the system............................4-66

Control buttons .............................4-67

Connecting procedure ......................4-68

Voice commands ...........................4-69

Making a call ................................4-70

Receiving a call ..............................4-71

During a call .................................4-71

Ending a call.................................4-71

Text messaging (if so equipped) .............4-72

Bluetooth® settings .........................4-73

Manual control ..............................4-74

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in

serious injury or death.

∙

RearView Monitor is a convenience fea-

ture and is not a substitute for proper

backing. Always turn and look out the

windows and check mirrors to be sure

that it is safe to move before operating

the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in showing large stationary

objects directly behind the vehicle, to

help avoid damaging the vehicle.

LHA4456

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ The distance guide line and the ve-

hicle width line should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

level paved surface. The distance

viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle

and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-

cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when

the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)

position. The radio can still be heard while

the RearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-

tor system uses a camera located next to

the trunk handle 䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line 䊊

Aare dis-

played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

∙ Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

LHA3768 LHA2944

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing

up.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle

width guide line should be used as a refer-

ence only when the vehicle is on a level,

paved surface. The distance viewed on the

monitor is for reference only and may be

different than the actual distance between

the vehicle and displayed objects.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown farther than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

closer than it appears on the monitor.

LHA3769 LHA3770

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Backing up near a projecting

object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the

object in the display. However, the vehicle

may hit the object if it projects over the

actual backing up course.

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the

position 䊊

Bin the display. However, the po-

sition 䊊

Cis actually at the same distance as

the position 䊊

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position 䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

LHA2946 LHA3619

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the

shift lever in R (reverse)

2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

3. The screen will display the Brightness

settings.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust

the setting up or down.

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button

again to display the Contrast settings.

6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust

the setting up or down.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to

complete the adjustment.

∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the

RearView Monitor while the vehicle is

moving.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show

every object.

∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-

ner areas of the bumper cannot be

viewed on the RearView Monitor be-

cause of its monitoring range limita-

tion. The system will not show small

objects below the bumper, and may

not show objects close to the bumper

or on the ground.

∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance be-

cause a wide-angle lens is used.

∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and out-

side mirrors.

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, ve-

hicle position, road conditions and

road grade.

∙ Make sure that the trunk is securely

closed when backing up.

∙ Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

∙ When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing

water condensation on the lens, a

malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may

malfunction or cause damage result-

ing in a fire or an electric shock.

LHA3639

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not clearly

display objects.

∙ When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on

the screen. This is due to strong re-

flected light from the bumper.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

∙ The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from the

actual color of objects.

∙ Objects on the monitor may not be

clear in a dark environment.

∙ There may be a delay when switching

between views.

∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the

camera, RearView Monitor may not dis-

play objects clearly. Clean the camera.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera 䊊

1, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera

by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-

ing it with a dry cloth.

LHA3768

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by

opening, closing or rotating.

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by

moving the slide as indicated 䊊

WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner

unit. Odor can enter the passenger

compartment through the vents.

Side vents

SAA3126

Center vents

LHA2085

VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual)

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air recir-

culation to allow fresh air into the pas-

senger compartment. This should help

reduce odors inside the vehicle.

1. Rear window defroster switch

2. Fan control dial

3. Air conditioner button

4. Temperature control dial

5. Air intake lever (Air recirculation

and Fresh air)

6. Air flow control dial

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on

and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select

the air flow outlets.

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster out-

lets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

LHA3655

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to

adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To

lower the temperature, turn the dial to the

left. To increase the temperature, turn the

dial to the right.

Fresh air

Move the air intake lever to the posi-

tion. The air flow is drawn from outside the

vehicle.

Air recirculation

Move the air intake lever to the posi-

tion to recirculate air inside the vehicle.

Use the selection:

∙ when driving on a dusty road.

∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering

passenger compartment.

∙ for maximum cooling when using the

air conditioner.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to

the desired position and press the

button to turn on the air conditioner. The

indicator light comes on when the air con-

ditioner is operating. To turn off the air con-

ditioner, press the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window defroster switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to

the foot outlets. Some air also flows from

the defrost outlets.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position for normal heating.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side

and center vents.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost

outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the

windows, turn the fan control dial

to the maximum position and the tem-

perature control dial to the full hot posi-

tion.

When the or position is se-

lected, press the button to turn on

the air conditioner for better performance.

This will dehumidify the air and help defog

the windows.

NOTE:

Side vents should direct air flow towards

the front side windows to improve de-

fogging performance.

Bi-level heating

This mode directs cooler air from the side

and center vents and warmer air from the

floor outlets. When the temperature con-

trol dial is moved to the full hot or full cool

position, the air between the vents and the

floor outlets is the same temperature.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs

the windshield.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

When the or position is se-

lected, press the button to turn on

the air conditioner for better performance.

This will dehumidify the air and help defog

the windows.

LHA3765

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield.

This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control

dial to the desired position, and press

the button to activate the air condi-

tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cool-

ing and dehumidifying functions are

added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify

the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Press the button. The indicator

light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

∙ For quick cooling when the outside

temperature is high, move the air intake

lever to the position. Be sure to re-

turn to the position for normal

cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify

the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Press the button. The indicator

light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows

and dehumidify the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Operating tips

∙ Keep the windows closed while the air

conditioner is in operation.

∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or

3 minutes with the windows open to

vent hot air from the passenger com-

partment. Then, close the windows.

This allows the air conditioner to cool

the interior more quickly.

∙The air conditioning system should

be operated for approximately

10 minutes at least once a month.

This helps prevent damage to the

system due to lack of lubrication.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from

the ventilators in hot, humid conditions

as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and

dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK

heating, cooling or defrosting. The air in-

take lever should always be in the

position for heating and defrosting.

LHA3656

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

LHA3657 LHA3658

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

LHA3659 LHA4593

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-

signed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the

earth’s ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant

is required when servicing your NISSAN air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or

lubricants will cause severe damage to

your air conditioner system. For additional

information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-

tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer to service your “environmentally

friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper

equipment.

RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the ON•OFF or

(power) button to turn the radio on. If you

listen to the radio with the engine not run-

ning, the ignition switch should be placed in

the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station sig-

nal strength, distance from radio transmit-

ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other

external influences. Intermittent changes

in reception quality normally are caused by

these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception qual-

ity.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-

hance radio reception. These circuits are

designed to extend reception range, and to

enhance the quality of that reception.

However, there are some general charac-

teristics of both FM and AM radio signals

that can affect radio reception quality in a

moving vehicle, even when the finest

equipment is used. These characteristics

are completely normal in a given reception

area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly

change because of vehicle movement.

Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter-

ference from other vehicles can work

against ideal reception. Described below

are some of the factors that can affect your

radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –

30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range

than stereo FM. External influences may

sometimes interfere with FM station re-

ception even if the FM station is within 25

mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between

the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol-

low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of

the same characteristics as light. For ex-

ample, they will reflect off objects.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

from a station transmitter, the signals will

tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-

ence from buildings, large hills or due to

antenna position (usually in conjunction

with increased distance from the station

transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.

This can be reduced by adjusting the treble

control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-

tive characteristics of FM signals,direct and

reflected signals reach the receiver at the

same time. The signals may cancel each

other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss

of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency,

can bend around objects and skip along

the ground. In addition, the signals can be

bounced off the ionosphere and bent back

to earth. Because of these characteristics,

AM signals are also subject to interference

as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas

with many tall buildings. It can also occur

for several seconds during ionospheric tur-

bulence even in areas where no obstacles

exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic

lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so

equipped)

When the satellite radio is used for the first

time or the battery has been replaced, the

satellite radio may not work properly. This

is not a malfunction. Wait more than

10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the

vehicle outside of any metal or large build-

ing for satellite radio to receive all of the

necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available un-

less there is an active SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription. Satellite radio is

not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If

satellite radio is not operational then

pressing the FM•AM button will switch be-

tween FM and AM bands.

Satellite radio performance may be af-

fected if cargo carried on the roof blocks

the satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satel-

lite antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio an-

tenna can affect satellite radio perfor-

mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite

radio reception.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

∙ Do not force a compact disc into the

CD insert slot. This could damage the

CD and/or CD changer/player.

∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or

CD changer.

∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

∙Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

∙During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the

humidity. If this occurs, remove the

CD and dehumidify or ventilate the

player completely.

∙The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

∙The CD player sometimes cannot

function when the compartment

temperature is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature

before use.

∙Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

∙CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with fin-

gerprints may not work properly.

∙The following CDs may not work

properly:

∙Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

∙Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

∙Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

∙Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

∙3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

∙CDs that are not round

∙CDs with a paper label

∙CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

∙This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to

record or burn CDs.

∙If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

LHA0099

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CHECK DISC:

∙Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

∙Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove

the CD by pressing the EJECT button.

After a short time, reinsert the CD.

The CD can be played when the tem-

perature of the player returns to nor-

mal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio

system (only MP3 or WMA (if so

equipped) CD).

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms

∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital

audio file format. This format allows for

near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction

of the size of normal audio files. MP3

conversion of an audio track from CD-

ROM can reduce the file size by approxi-

mately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no per-

ceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant

and irrelevant parts of a sound signal

that the human ear doesn’t hear.

∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is

a compressed audio format created by

Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The

WMA codec offers greater file compres-

sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor-

age of more digital audio tracks in the

same amount of space when com-

pared to MP3s at the same level of qual-

ity.

∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number

of bits per second used by a digital mu-

sic file. The size and quality of a com-

pressed digital audio file is determined

by the bit rate used when encoding the

file.

∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-

quency is the rate at which the samples

of a signal are converted from analog to

digital (A/D conversion) per second.

∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of

the methods for writing data to media.

Writing data once to the media is called

a single session, and writing more than

once is called a multisession.

∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file

that contains information about the

digital music file such as song title, art-

ist, encoding bit rate, track time dura-

tion, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed

on the Artist/song title line on the dis-

play.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-

istered trademarks and trademarks in the

United States of America and other coun-

tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

Playback order

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or

WMA files is as illustrated.

∙ The names of folders not containing

MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the

display.

∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

∙ The playback order is the order in which

the files were written by the writing soft-

ware. Therefore, the files might not play

in the desired order.

Playback order chart

WHA1078

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling fre-

quency

8kHz-48kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling fre-

quency

32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNI-

CODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of char-

acters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long

time before the music

starts playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music

starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not

match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit

rate files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to

the next song when play-

ing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright

protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back

in the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the de-

sired order.

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port (if so equipped)

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-

vice. USB devices should be purchased

separately as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB

devices. To format a USB device, use a per-

sonal computer.

In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the

front seats plays only sound without im-

ages for regulatory reasons, even when the

vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB

memory devices, USB hard drives and

iPod® players. Some USB devices may not

be supported by this system.

∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play

correctly.

∙ Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may

not appear properly in the display. Using

English language characters with a USB

device is recommended.

General notes for USB (if so equipped)

use:

∙ For additional information, refer to your

device manufacturer’s owner informa-

tion regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

Notes for iPod® (if so equipped) use:

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may

cause a checkmark to be displayed on

and off (flickering). Always make sure

that the iPod® is connected properly.

∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-

main in fast forward or rewind mode if it

is connected during a seek operation. In

this case, please manually reset the

iPod®.

∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will

continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

∙ An incorrect song title may appear

when the Play Mode is changed while

using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).

∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same

order as they appear on an iPod®.

∙ Large video files cause slow responses

in an iPod®. The vehicle center display

may momentarily black out, but will

soon recover.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large

video files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle center display may momen-

tarily black out, but will soon recover.

iPod®* player (if so equipped)

∙ Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not

displayed properly on the vehicle center

screen. We recommend using English

or Spanish language characters with an

iPod®.

∙ Large video podcast files cause slow

responses in the iPod®. The vehicle cen-

ter display may momentarily black out,

but it will soon recover.

∙ If the iPod® automatically selects large

video podcast files while in the shuffle

mode, the vehicle center display may

momentarily black out, but it will soon

recover.

∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may

cause a checkmark to be displayed on

and off (flickering). Always make sure

that the iPod® is connected properly.

∙ The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will

continue to fast forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

∙ An incorrect song title may appear

when the Play Mode is changed while

using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation).

∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same

order as they appear on the iPod®.

∙ The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may

remain in fast forward or rewind mode if

it is connected during a seek operation.

In this case, please manually reset the

iPod®.

∙ If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation

with Dock connector), do not use very

long names for the song title, album

name or artist name to prevent the

iPod® from resetting itself.

∙ Be careful not to do the following, or the

cable could be damaged and a loss of

function may occur:

∙ Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in

(40 mm) radius maximum).

∙ Twist the cable excessively (more

than 180 degrees).

∙ Pull or drop the cable.

∙ Do not force the iPod® cable connec-

tor into the device port.

∙ Close the center console lid on the

cable or connectors.

∙ Store objects with sharp edges in the

storage where the cable is stored.

∙ Spill liquids on the cable and connec-

tors.

∙ Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if

the cable and/or connectors are wet. It

may damage the iPod®.

∙ If the cable and connectors are ex-

posed to water, allow the cable and/or

connectors to dry completely before

connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait

24 hours for it to dry).

∙ If the connector is exposed to fluids

other than water, evaporative residue

may cause a short between the con-

nector pins. In this case, replace the

cable, otherwise damage to the iPod®

and a loss of function may occur.

∙ If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,

connectors cracked, contamination

such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the con-

nectors), do not use the cable. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer to replace the cable with a new

one.

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ When not in use for extended periods of

time, store the cable in a clean, dust free

environment at room temperature and

without direct sun exposure.

∙ Do not use the cable for any other pur-

poses other than its intended use in the

vehicle.

*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so

equipped)

∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may

not be recognized by the in-vehicle au-

dio system.

∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless

connection between a compatible

Bluetooth® audio device and the in-

vehicle Bluetooth® module before using

the Bluetooth® audio.

∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®

audio will vary depending on the de-

vices. Make sure how to operate your

audio device before using it with this

system.

∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped

under the following conditions:

∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free

Phone System.

∙ Checking the connection to the

hands-free phone.

∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio de-

vice in an area surrounded by metal or

far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®

module to prevent tone quality degra-

dation and wireless connection disrup-

tion.

∙ While an audio device is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the device

may discharge quicker than usual.

∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®

Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so

equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Audio

operation precautions” in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. CD insert slot

3. SCAN button

4. DISP (display) button

5. RPT (repeat )/ RDM (random) button

6. TUNE/FOLDER knob / MENU button

7. AUX IN jack

8. AUX button

9. CD button

10. AM button

11. FM button

12. VOL (volume) control knob

/(power) button

13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

14. TRACK button

15. SEEK button

Audio main operation

VOL (volume) control knob/

(power) button

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, then press the (power) but-

ton. If you listen to the radio with the engine

not running, place the ignition in the ACC

position. The mode (radio or CD) that was

playing immediately before the system

was turned off resumes playing.

LHA8804

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.

Pressing the (power) button again

turns the system off.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to the

right to increase volume or to the left to

decrease volume.

MENU button (Bass, Treble, Balance,

Fade, Speed Sensitive Volume and

Clock)

Press the MENU button to change the

mode as follows:

Bass →Treble →Balance →Fade →Spd.

Sen. Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) →AUX IN

Volume →Clock →Clock Adjust

To adjust the Bass, Treble, Fade and Bal-

ance, press the MENU button until the de-

sired mode appears in the display. Press

the SEEK or TRACK button to

adjust the setting to the desired level (-5 to

+5). Balance adjusts the sound between

the right and left speakers. Fade adjusts

the sound between the front and rear

speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality

to the desired level, press the MENU button

repeatedly until the radio or CD display re-

appears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display

will automatically reappear after about

10 seconds.

Speed Sensitive Volume adjusts the vol-

ume of the audio system as the vehicle’s

driving speed changes. It can be set as

follows:

OFF →LOW →MID →HIGH

DISP (display) button

Press the DISP (display) button while a CD is

playing to change the text shown in the

audio display as follows:

For CDs:

Running Time →Album Title: →Artist

Name: →Song Title

For MP3 CDs:

Running Time →Folder Title: →Album Title:

→Artist Name: →Song Title:

If the text information is too long to fully be

displayed on the screen; press and hold the

DISP button for longer than 1.5 seconds to

scroll through the rest of the text.

Press the DISP (display) button while the

radio is playing to toggle the audio display

between station number and RDS.

Clock operation

To turn the clock display on or off, press the

MENU button repeatedly until “Clock” ap-

pears on the display. Turn the

TUNE/FOLDER knob to toggle the setting

(ON or OFF).

Clock set

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until

“Adjust Clock: NO” appears on the dis-

play.

2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to

change to “Adjust Clock: YES”.

3. Press the MENU button.

4. When “Change Hour” appears, turn the

TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the

hours.

5. Press MENU button.

6. When “Change Minute” appears, turn

the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust min-

utes.

7. Press MENU button to finish.

The display will return to the regular clock

display after 10 seconds if no further ad-

justment is performed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

FM/AM radio operation

AM and FM buttons

Press the AM button to change the band to

AM.

If another audio source is playing when the

AM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

Press the FM button to change the band as

follows:

FM1 →FM2 →FM1

If another audio source is playing when the

FM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or

right for manual tuning.

SEEK and TRACK

(tuning) buttons

Press the SEEK button to tune from

low to high frequencies and stop at the

next broadcasting station.

Press the TRACK button to tune from

high to low frequencies and stop at the

next broadcasting station.

Press and hold either button to seek at a

faster speed.

SCAN (tuning) button

Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in

the display window. Scan tuning begins

from low to high frequencies. Scan tuning

stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting

station that has sufficient signal strength.

When scanning, SCAN blinks in the display.

Pressing the SCAN button again during this

5 second period stops scan tuning and the

radio remains tuned to that station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be

set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the AM or FM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press

and hold any of the desired station

memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep

sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come

on and the sound will resume. Pro-

gramming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, and carefully insert the compact

disc into the slot with the label side up. The

compact disc is automatically pulled into

the slot and starts to play.

If the radio is already operating, it automati-

cally turns off and the compact disc begins

to play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded and the radio playing, the

radio turns off and the last used compact

disc starts to play.

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SEEK and TRACK

(Fast Forward, Rewind)

buttons

When the SEEK button or

TRACK button is pressed while the

compact disc is playing, the compact disc

plays at an increased speed while fast for-

warding or rewinding. When the button is

released, the compact disc returns to nor-

mal play speed.

SEEK and TRACK

buttons

When the SEEK button is pressed

while the compact disc is playing, the next

track following the present one starts to

play from the beginning. Press the

SEEK button several times to skip

several tracks. Each time the button is

pressed, the CD advances one additional

track. The track number appears in the dis-

play window. (When the last track on the

compact disc is skipped, the first track is

played.)

When the TRACK button is pressed,

the track being played returns to the be-

ginning. Press the TRACK button sev-

eral times to skip back several tracks. Each

time the button is pressed the CD moves

back one track.

RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) button

Press the RPT/RDM button while a com-

pact disc is playing to change the play pat-

tern as follows:

CD:

TRACK REPEAT →DISC RANDOM →DISC

REPEAT

MP3/WMA CD:

FOLDER REPEAT →TRACK REPEAT →DISC

RANDOM →FOLDER RANDOM →DISC RE-

PEAT

TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently

playing will be repeated.

DISC RANDOM: The order of the tracks on

the disc will be mixed during play.

DISC REPEAT: The disc currently playing will

be repeated.

FOLDER REPEAT: The tracks in the current

folder will be repeated.

FOLDER RANDOM: The order of the tracks in

the folder will be mixed during play.

SCAN (CDs) button

Press the SCAN button for less than 1.5 sec-

onds to scan all tracks of the current disc

for 10 seconds per track. The SCAN icon is

flashed during scan mode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans

through all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN

button is pressed during scan mode.

CD EJECT

When the button is pressed with a

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will

be ejected.

When the button is pressed while the

compact disc is playing, the compact disc

will eject and the system will turn off.

AUX (Auxiliary) button

The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player.

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from

a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3

player or laptop computers.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible

device when it is plugged into the AUX IN

jack.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

Press the MENU button repeatedly until

“AUX IN Volume” appears on the screen to

control the incoming volume level of the

auxiliary input device. Turn the

TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the level be-

tween 0 and +3.

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so

equipped)

For additional information, refer to "Audio

operation precautions" in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. RPT button

3. RDM button

4. Display screen

LHA3016

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5. SCAN button

6. USB button

7. AUX button

8. A-Z button

9. ENTER button and TUNE/MENU knob

10. (back) button

11. SETUP button

12. DISP button

13. Station select (1–6) buttons

14. Forward and Backward

SEEK/TRACK buttons

15. VOL (volume) control knob/

(power) button

16. CD button

17. FM•AM button

Audio main operation

(power) button/ VOL (volume)

control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, then press the (power) but-

ton. If you listen to the radio with the engine

not running, place the ignition in the ACC

position. The mode (radio or CD) that was

playing immediately before the system

was turned off resumes playing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.

Pressing the (power) button again

turns the system off.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to the

right to increase volume or to the left to

decrease volume.

AUX button

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from

a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3

player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX

button to play a compatible device

plugged into the AUX IN jack. Pressing the

AUX button repeatedly will cycle through

available input sources:

AUX line in →USB (if so equipped) →AUX

line in

NOTE:

Sources only shown in menu if they are

connected and/or detected.

DISP (display) button

Pressing the DISP button displays song in-

formation, if available, such as artist, album,

track name, folder name, and source.

NOTE:

The DISP button only provides this infor-

mation in non-radio modes.

How to use the SETUP button

To select and/or adjust several functions,

features and modes that are available for

your vehicle:

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob until the de-

sired item is selected on the menu list

and then press the ENTER button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31

Menu item Result

Audio Selecting this item allows user to adjust various audio settings.

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

AUX Vol. Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options

are LOW, MID, and HIGH.

Clock Selecting this item allows user to adjust various clock settings.

Set Time Allows user to set time manually.

ON/OFF Switches clock display on or off.

Format 12h:24h Allows user to change time format between 12 hour and 24 hour.

Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (Type A)” in this section.

Language Allows user to change system language.

List of Languages Available language are Spanish, Portuguese, English, and French.

Scroll Direction Allows user to change the scrolling direction used by the TUNE/MENU knob.

Clockwise Select up or down and press ENTER button.

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

TUNE/MENU knob/Enter button

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to the left or

right to scroll and then press ENTER to se-

lect desired item.

Clock Set

1. Press the SETUP button.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to select

CLOCK.

3. Press the ENTER button.

4. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to select

“set time”.

5. Press the ENTER button.

6. Rotate the TUNE/MENU knob to adjust

hours.

7. Press the ENTER button.

8. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to adjust

minutes.

9. Press the ENTER button to finish.

The display will return to the regular clock

display after 10 seconds.

A–Z button

When listening to music via USB or iPod®,

pressing the A-Z button will launch a quick

search function in music browser that will

allow user to search for music alphabeti-

cally using the TUNE/MENU knob.

RDM and RPT button

When listening to music via USB or iPod®,

pressing the RDM button will shuffle the

songs being played. Pressing the RPT but-

ton will repeat the song being played.

(back) button

Pressing the (back) button will return

the user to the previous menu.

FM/AM radio operation

FM-AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the

band as follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

If the FM-AM button is pressed for more

than 1.5 seconds, the AUTOSTORE function

will be initiated. The “AST” icon will appear

and “AUTOSTORE” may appear on the dis-

play screen, a beep is heard and the radio

mutes. The system will then automatically

detect the 6 stations with the strongest

frequency and save them as presets. Once

AUTOSTORE is complete, the “AST” icon will

disappear and “AUTOSTORE COMPLETE”

may appear on the display screen.

TUNE/MENU knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to the left or

right for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK/TRACK button

or to tune from low to high or high to

low frequencies and to stop at the next

broadcasting station. Hold either button to

tune continuously. Then release button

once desired frequency is reached.

Station select (1 to 6) memory opera-

tions

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be

set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the AM or FM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

manual or SEEK tuning. Press and hold

any of the desired station memory but-

tons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

3. The station memory position (P1–P6)

will now be displayed next to the band.

Programming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

If the radio is already operating, it automati-

cally turns off and the compact disc begins

to play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with the

system off and the compact disc loaded,

the system will turn on and the compact

disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded and the radio playing, the

radio will automatically be turned off and

the compact disc will start to play.

DISP button

When the DISP button is pressed while a CD

is playing, the display will change as follows:

CD:

Track Time →Album →Artist →Track Time

CD with MP3 or WMA:

Track time→Folder title →Artist →Song

title →Track number

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the SEEK/TRACK

button or for 1.5 seconds while

the compact disc is playing to reverse or

fast forward the track being played. The

compact disc plays at an increased speed

while reversing or fast forwarding. When

the button is released, the compact disc

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK button

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/TRACK button several

times to skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/TRACK

button several times to skip forward

several tracks. If the last track on a CD is

skipped, the first track on the disc is played.

If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA

CD is skipped, the first track of the next

folder is played.

TUNE/MENU knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is

playing, press the ENTER button to view the

track list and press the button again to

view the folder list. To select a folder or

track, turn the TUNE/MENU knob to scroll

through the folders/songs and press the

ENTER button to make selection.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button (Preset station num-

ber 1) is pressed while a compact disc is

playing, the repeat mode is toggled.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM button (Preset station num-

ber 2) is pressed while a compact disc is

playing, the Random mode is toggled.

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CD EJECT button

When the button is pressed with a

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will

eject and the last source will be played.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod®

player operation” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB

(Universal Serial Bus) connection port” in

this section.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so

equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Audio

operation precautions” in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. RPT button

3. RDM button

4. Display screen

LHA4457

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

5. SCAN button

6. SEEK/CAT buttons

7. iPod MENU button

8. BACK button

9. ENTER/SETTING/CLOCK button and

TUNE/SCROLL control knob

10. Station select (1–6) buttons

11. VOL (volume) knob / (power) but-

ton

12. DISP button

13. MEDIA button

14. XM button*

15. FM•AM button

*No satellite radio reception is available

when the XM button is pressed to access

satellite radio stations unless optional sat-

ellite receiver and antenna are installed

and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service

subscription is active. Satellite radio is not

available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume) con-

trol knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the (power) but-

ton while the system is off to call up the

mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,

USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately

before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the

(power) button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-

just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed

Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-

tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-

ing speed changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show

the Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the op-

tions and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button to make a selection.

4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Audio

Bluetooth Takes you to the Bluetooth menu.

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and

right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear

speakers.

Brightness Adjust to brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Contrast Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock Adjust Allows the user to set time manually.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as

the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the

more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting

of 0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Language Select Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob

to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display

will automatically reappear.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37

Clock Set

1. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.

2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Clock Adjust”.

3. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.

4. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to ad-

just hours.

5. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.

6. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust

minutes.

7. Press the ENTER/CLOCK button.

8. Press the BACK button to finish.

iPod MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod® op-

erations.For additional information, refer to

“iPod® player operation” in this section.

DISP (display) button

The DISP (display) button turns the display

screen on or off.

BACK button

Press the BACK button to return to

the previous menu screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the

band as follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

XM band select

Press the XM button to change the band as

follows:

XM1* →XM2* →XM3* →XM1 (satellite, if so

equipped)

When the XM button is pressed while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,

the radio will come on at the station last

played.

The last station played will also come on

when the (power) button is pressed

on.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satel-

lite radio reception will not be available un-

less an optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satel-

lite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii

and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM

button is pressed, the compact disc will

automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will come on.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or

right for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK button or

TRACK button to tune from low to high or

high to low frequencies and to stop at the

next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN

will appear on the screen while the radio is

scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this

5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and

the radio will remain tuned to that station. If

the SCAN button is not pressed within

5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band.

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2). Eighteen channels can

be set for the satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for

XM2, 6 for XM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button, or

choose the satellite band XM1, XM2 or

XM3 using the XM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press

and hold any of the desired station

memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset

number is updated on the display and

the sound is briefly muted.

3. The channel indicator will then come

on and the sound will resume. Pro-

gramming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

If the radio is already operating, it automati-

cally turns off and the compact disc begins

to play.

MEDIA button

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button

until the CD mode is displayed on the

screen.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain

text may be displayed on the screen if the

CD has been encoded with text informa-

tion. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD

is encoded, information such as Artist,

Song and Folder will be displayed.

The track number and the total number of

tracks in the current folder or on the cur-

rent disc are displayed on the screen as

well.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button

or for 1.5 seconds while the compact

disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the

track being played. The compact disc plays

at an increased speed while reversing or

fast forwarding. When the button is re-

leased, the compact disc returns to normal

play speed.

SEEK/CAT button

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/CAT button several times

to skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button

several times to skip forward several

tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,

the first track on the disc is played. If the last

track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is

played.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is

playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to

skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right

to skip ahead a folder.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be

repeated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

EJECT button

When the button is pressed with a

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will

eject and the last source will be played.

When the button is pressed twice

with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will be ejected further for easier CD

removal. If the disc is not removed within

20 seconds, the disc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod®

player operation” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB

(Universal Serial Bus) connection port” in

this section.

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® streaming audio” in this sec-

tion.

4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (if so

equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB connection port is located be-

neath the heater and air conditioner con-

trols. Insert the USB device into the connec-

tion port.

When a compatible storage device is

plugged into the connection port, compat-

ible audio files on the storage device can be

played through the vehicle’s audio system.

The port is illuminated for better visibility

when the headlight switch is in the ON po-

sition.

Audio file operation

AUX or USB button (if so equipped)

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the AUX or USB button

to switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is

playing or another audio source is plugged

in through the AUX IN jack, the AUX or USB

button toggles between the three sources.

MEDIA button (if so equipped)

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the MEDIA button to

switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is

playing or another audio source is plugged

in through the AUX IN jack located in the

center console, the MEDIA button toggles

between the three sources.

Play information

Information about the audio files being

played can be displayed on the display

screen of the vehicle’s audio system. De-

pending on how the audio files are en-

coded, information such as Folder, Song

and Artist will be displayed.

LHA4458

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41

The track number and number of total

tracks in the folder are displayed on the

screen as well.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Reverse or Fast For-

ward) button

Press and hold the or SEEK/CAT

and TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds while an

audio file on the USB device is playing to

reverse or fast forward the track being

played. The track plays at an increased

speed while reversing or fast forwarding.

When the button is released, the audio file

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button

while an audio file on the USB device is

playing to return to the beginning of the

current track. Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK

button several times to skip back-

ward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button

while an audio file on the USB device is

playing to advance one track. Press the

SEEK/CAT or TRACK button several

times to skip forward several tracks. If the

last track in a folder on the USB device is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is

played.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM button is pressed while an

audio file on the USB device is playing, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

All Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will

be played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device

is displayed on the screen unless no pat-

tern is applied.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while an

audio file on the USB device is playing, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be

repeated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device

is displayed on the screen unless no pat-

tern is applied.

TUNE/MENU or TUNE/SCROLL knob

If there are multiple folders with audio files

on the USB device, turn the TUNE/MENU or

TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders.

Turn the knob to the left to skip back a

folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip

ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of

audio files on the USB device, turning the

TUNE/MENU or TUNE/SCROLL knob in ei-

ther direction will return to the first track on

the USB device.

4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that

the iPod® can be controlled with the audio

system controls and display screen, use

the USB Connection port located beneath

the heater and air conditioner controls.

Connect the iPod®-specific end of the

cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the

cable to the USB Connection port on the

vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via

a USB connection, its battery will be

charged while connected to the vehicle

with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. The port is illuminated for better

visibility when the headlight switch is in the

ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®

can only be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,

remove the USB end of the cable from the

USB Connection port on the vehicle, then

remove the cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

∙ iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version

1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic (80GB) (firmware version

1.1.2PC or later)

∙ iPod® Classic (120GB) (firmware version

2.0.1PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware

version 1.3.1 or later)

LHA4458

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43

∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware

version 1.0PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firm-

ware version 1.0.2PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (16GB)

(firmware version 1.0.1PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-

ware version 1.2PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-

ware version 1.1PC or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 1st generation (firmware

version 2.2.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware

version 2.2.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware

version 3.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware

version 4.3.5 or later)

∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or

later)

∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later)

∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPad® (firmware version 4.3.2 or later)

∙ iPad® 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later)

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-

dated to the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, press the iPod MENU button

or MEDIA button repeatedly to switch to

the iPod® mode.

If the audio system is turned off while the

iPod® is playing, the iPod® plays when the

audio system is turned back on.

If the audio system is off, pressing the iPod

MENU button or MEDIA button turns the

audio system on and plays the iPod®.

If the audio system is on, the audio system

automatically begins playing tracks from

the iPod® when it is plugged into the con-

nection port.

SEEK/CAT or TRACK

buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK

buttons or to skip backward or

forward one track.

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT or TRACK

buttons or for 1.5 seconds while

a track is playing to reverse or fast forward

the track being played. The track plays at

an increased speed while reversing or fast

forwarding. When the button is released,

the track returns to normal play speed.

(RPT) REPEAT

When the RPT button is pressed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

Repeat Off →1 Track Repeat →All Repeat →

Repeat Off

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

All Repeat: all songs in the current list are

repeated.

Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is ap-

plied.

4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

(RDM) RANDOM

When the RDM button is pressed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

Shuffle Off →Track Shuffle →Album Shuffle

→Shuffle Off

Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list

will be played randomly.

Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list

will be played randomly.

Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is ap-

plied.

BACK button

When the BACK button is pressed, it

returns to the previous menu.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

(if so equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio

device that is capable of playing audio files,

the device can be connected to the vehi-

cle’s audio system so that the audio files on

the device play through the vehicle’s

speakers. For additional information, refer

to “FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player” in this section.

NOTE:

For additional information, refer to the

cellular phone Owner’s Manual.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device

to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

the “Bluetooth” option.

3. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Add Phone or Device”. This same

screen can be accessed to remove, re-

place or select a different Bluetooth®

device.

LHA2775

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45

4. The system acknowledges the com-

mand and asks you to initiate connect-

ing from the phone handset. The con-

necting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual.

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,

press the MEDIA button repeatedly until the

Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the

screen with the following information

listed:

∙ Album

∙ Song

∙ Artist

CD CARE AND CLEANING

∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend

the disc. Never touch the surface of the

disc.

∙ Always place the discs in the storage

case when they are not being used.

∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from

the center to the outer edge using a

clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc

using a circular motion.

∙ Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-

trial use.

∙ A new disc may be rough on the inner

and outer edges. Remove the rough

edges by rubbing the inner and outer

edges with the side of a pen or pencil as

illustrated.

LHA0049

4-46 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using

the controls on the steering wheel.

1. SOURCE switch

2. Tuning switch

3. Volume control switch

SOURCE switch

Push the SOURCE switch to change the

mode in the following sequence:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →XM1 (satellite radio, if so

equipped) →XM2 (satellite radio, if so

equipped) →XM3 (satellite radio, if so

equipped) →CD* →USB/iPod®*→

Bluetooth® Audio* (if so equipped) →AUX*

→AM.

* These modes are only available when

compatible media storage is inserted into

the device or connected to the system.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down

to increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

For most audio sources, pushing the tun-

ing switches for more than 1.5 seconds

provides a different function than pressing

for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM:

∙ Push the switch for less than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

preset station.

∙ Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the

next station.

XM (if so equipped):

∙ Push the switch for less than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

preset station.

∙ Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to go to the next or previous

category.

iPod® (if so equipped):

∙ Push the switch for less than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

track number.

CD:

∙ Push the switch for less than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

track number.

∙ Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

folder number (if playing compressed

audio files).

USB (if so equipped):

∙ Push the switch for less than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

track number.

LHA2054

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47

∙ Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

folder number.

Bluetooth®Audio (if so equipped):

∙ Push the switch for less than

1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the

next song.

∙ Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward

the current song.

ANTENNA

The antenna cannot be shortened, but can

be removed. When you need to remove the

antenna, turn the antenna rod counter-

clockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna

rod clockwise and hand tighten.

CAUTION

∙ Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation or the antenna

rod may break during vehicle

operation.

∙ Be sure that the antenna is removed

before the vehicle enters an auto-

matic car wash.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car

phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe

the following precautions; otherwise, the

new equipment may adversely affect the

engine control system and other electronic

parts.

WARNING

∙ A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle op-

eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit

the use of cellular phones while

driving.

∙ If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode (if so

equipped) is highly recommended.

Exercise extreme caution at all times

so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route

the antenna wire next to any harness.

∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the

manufacturer.

∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

∙ For additional information, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

4-48 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WARNING

∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full at-

tention may be given to vehicle

operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-

tery, use a phone after starting the

engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If

you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone

call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to

the in-vehicle phone module, no other

phone connecting procedure is required.

Your phone is automatically connected

LHA3662

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49

with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition with the previously connected cellu-

lar phone turned on and carried in the ve-

hicle.

You can connect up to five different

Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-

vehicle phone module. However, you can

talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes.

∙ Set up the wireless connection be-

tween a cellular phone and the in-

vehicle phone module before using the

hands-free phone system.

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized by the

in-vehicle phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a

recommended phone list and connect-

ing instructions.

∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal;

such as in a tunnel, in an under-

ground parking garage, near a tall

building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-

vent it from being dialed.

∙ When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other per-

son’s voice during a call.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle phone module to

prevent tone quality degradation and

wireless connection disruption.

∙ While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the cellu-

lar phone may discharge quicker than

usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System cannot charge cellular

phones.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Troubleshooting guide” in this section.

You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

∙ Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a differ-

ent location may reduce or eliminate

the noise.

∙ For additional information, refer to the

cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard-

ing the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-

tenna, modification, or attachments

could damage the transmitter and may

violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference

and

2. this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

IC Regulatory information

4-50 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-

lations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system al-

lows hands-free operation of the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands

may not be available so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSANVoice Recognition is initial-

ized, which takes a few seconds. If the

button is pressed before the initialization

completes, the system will announce

“Hands-free phone system not ready” and

will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the

NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe

the following:

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to elimi-

nate surrounding noises (traffic noises,

vibration sounds, etc.), which may pre-

vent the system from recognizing voice

commands correctly.

∙ Wait until the tone sounds before

speaking a command. Otherwise, the

command will not be received properly.

∙ Start speaking a command within

5 seconds after the tone sounds.

∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,

press and release the button located

on the steering wheel. After the tone

sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the

microphone, and voice feedback is given

when the command is accepted.

∙ If you need to hear the available com-

mands for the current menu again, say

“Help” and the system will repeat them.

∙ If a command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Command not

recognized. Please try again.” Make sure

the command is said exactly as

prompted by the system and repeat

the command in a clear voice.

∙ If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or

“Correction” any time the system is

waiting for a response.

∙ You can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by say-

ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-

nounces “Cancel” and ends the Voice

Recognition session. You can also press

and hold the button on the steer-

ing wheel for 5 seconds at any time to

end the Voice Recognition session.

Whenever the Voice Recognition ses-

sion is canceled, a double beep is

played to indicate you have exited the

system.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the

voice feedback, press the volume con-

trol switches (+ or -) on the steering

wheel while being provided with feed-

back. You can also use the radio volume

control knob.

∙ In most cases you can interrupt the

voice feedback to speak the next com-

mand by pressing the button on

the steering wheel.

∙ To use the system faster, you may

speak the second level commands with

the main menu command on the main

menu. For example, press the but-

ton and after the tone say, “Call Redial.”

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a cer-

tain way to speak numbers in voice com-

mands. Refer to the following rules and ex-

amples.

∙ Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two

oh oh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six

two oh oh”

∙ Words can be used for the first 4 digits

places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six

two oh oh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two

sixty two hundred,” and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty

two hundred”

∙ Numbers can be spoken in small

groups. The system will prompt you to

continue entering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

– “Six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

– “Six two zero zero”

∙ Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-

able when using the “Special Number”

command and the “Send” command

during a call).

For additional information, refer to “List

of voice commands” and “Special

number” in this section.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two

star one two three”

∙ Say “plus” for “+” (available only when us-

ing the “Special Number” command).

∙ Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (avail-

able only when storing a phonebook

number).

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as

single digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at

any time. Please use the “Help” command

to get information on how to use the sys-

tem.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the button on the steering

wheel. After interrupting the system, wait

for a beep before speaking your command.

4-52 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak

the second level commands with the main

menu command on the main menu. For

example, press the button and after

the tone say, “Call Redial”.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System are located on

the steering wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initi-

ate a Voice Recognition ses-

sion or answer an incoming

call.

You can also use the but-

ton to interrupt the system

feedback and give a com-

mand at once. For additional

information, refer to “List of

voice commands” and “During

a call” in this section.

PHONE/END

While the Voice Recognition

system is active, press and

hold the button for

5 seconds to quit the Voice

Recognition system at any

time.

TUNING SWITCH

While using the Voice Recogni-

tion system, tilt the tuning

switch up or down to manu-

ally control the phone system.

LHA3002

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you get

started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recogni-

tion. For additional information, refer to “List

of voice commands” in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System using English,

Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the fol-

lowing.

1. Press and hold the button for

more than 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND button for the

hands-free phone system to enter the

voice adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END button to select a

different language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on voice adaptation,

refer to “Voice adaptation (VA) mode” in

this section.

4. The system announces the current

language and gives you the option to

change the language to Spanish (in

Spanish) or French (in French). To select

the current language, press the

PHONE/SEND button. To select a

different language, tilt the tuning

switch or left or right.

NOTE:

You must press the button within

5 seconds to change the language.

5. If you decide not to change the lan-

guage, do not press either button. After

5 seconds, the Voice Recognition ses-

sion will end, and the language will not

be changed.

Connecting procedure

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

Main Menu

“Connect phone” 䊊

“Add phone” 䊊

Initiate from handset 䊊

Name phone 䊊

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel. The system announces the

available commands.

2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊

A. The system

acknowledges the command and an-

nounces the next set of available com-

mands.

3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊

B. The system ac-

knowledges the command and asks

you to initiate connecting from the

phone handset 䊊

The connecting procedure of the cellu-

lar phone varies according to each cel-

lular phone model. For additional infor-

mation, refer to the cellular phone

Owner’s Manual. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for in-

structions on connecting NISSAN rec-

ommended cellular phones.

4-54 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When prompted for a pin code, enter

“1234” from the handset. The pin code

“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN

and cannot be changed.

4. The system asks you to say a name for

the phone 䊊

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells you, then prompts you for

a name again.

Also, if more than one phone is con-

nected and the name sounds too

much like a name already used, the

system tells you, then prompts you for

a name again.

Making a call by entering a phone

number

Main Menu

“Call” 䊊

“Phone Number” 䊊

Speak the digits 䊊

“Dial” 䊊

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” 䊊

A. The system acknowl-

edges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊

B. The system

acknowledges the command and an-

nounces the next set of available com-

mands.

Say: “Special Number” to dial more

than 10 digits or any special charac-

ters.

4. Say the number you wish to call start-

ing with the area code in single digit

format 䊊

C. If the system has trouble

recognizing the correct phone number,

try entering the number in the follow-

ing groups: 3-digit area code, 3-digit

prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-

ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five

five five” as the 1st group, then “one two

one” as the 2nd group, and “three three

five four” as the 3rd group. For dialing

more than 10 digits or any special char-

acters, say “Special Number”. For addi-

tional information refer to “How to say

numbers” in this section.

5. When you have finished speaking the

phone number, the system repeats it

back and announces the available

commands.

6. Say: “Dial” 䊊

D. The system acknowl-

edges the command and makes the

call.

For additional command options, refer to

“List of voice commands” in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press

the button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the

button on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when

you hear the ring tone, press the

button on the steering wheel.

For additional command options, refer to

“List of voice commands” in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call”

“Phonebook”

“Recent Calls”

“Connect Phone”

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55

When you press and release the but-

ton on the steering wheel, you can choose

from the commands on the Main Menu.

The following pages describe these com-

mands and the commands in each sub-

menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before

speaking.

After the main menu, you can say “Help” to

hear the list of commands currently avail-

able any time the system is waiting for a

response.

If you want to end an action without com-

pleting it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at

any time the system is waiting for a re-

sponse. The system will end the Voice Rec-

ognition session. Whenever the Voice Rec-

ognition session is canceled, a double beep

is played to indicate you have exited the

system.

If you want to go back to the previous com-

mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correction”

any time the system is waiting for a re-

sponse.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call”

(Speak name) 䊊

“Phone Number”

(Speak Digits) 䊊

“Special Number” 䊊

“Redial” 䊊

“Call Back” 䊊

(Speak name) 䊊

If you have stored entries in the phone-

book, you can dial a number associated

with a name.

For additional information, refer to “Phone-

book (phones without automatic phone-

book download function)” in this section.

When prompted by the system, say the

name of the phone book entry you wish to

call. The system acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple numbers associated

with the name, the system asks you to

choose the correct number.

Once you have confirmed the name and

location, the system begins the call.

(Speak Digits) 䊊

When prompted by the system, say the

number you wish to call. For additional in-

formation, refer to “How to say numbers”

and “Making a call by entering a phone

number” in this section.

“Special Number” 䊊

For dialing more than 10 digits or any spe-

cial characters, say “Special Number”. When

the system acknowledges the command,

the system will prompt you to speak the

number.

“Redial” 䊊

Use the Redial command to call the last

number that was dialed.

The system acknowledges the command,

repeats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the sys-

tem announces, “There is no number to

redial” and ends the NISSAN Voice Recogni-

tion System session.

“Call Back” 䊊

Use the Call Back command to dial the

number of the last incoming call within the

vehicle.

4-56 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The system acknowledges the command,

repeats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the

system announces, “There is no number to

call back” and ends the NISSAN Voice Rec-

ognition System session.

During a call

During a call there are several command

options available. Press the button

on the steering wheel to mute the receiv-

ing voice and enter commands.

∙ “Help” — The system announces the

available commands.

∙ “Go back/Correction” — The system an-

nounces “Go back,” ends the Voice Rec-

ognition session and returns to the call.

∙ “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces

“Cancel,” ends the Voice Recognition

session and returns to the call.

∙ “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send

command to enter numbers, “*” or “#”

during a call. For example, if you were

directed to dial an extension by an au-

tomated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the com-

mand and sends the tones associated

with the numbers. The system then

ends the Voice Recognition session

and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,

Say “pound” for “#”.

∙ “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call

command to transfer the call from the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

to the cellular phone when privacy is

desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call.

Call transferred to privacy mode.” The

system then ends the Voice Recogni-

tion session.

To reconnect the call from the cellular

phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

System, press the button.

∙ “Mute” — Use the Mute command to

mute your voice so the other party can-

not hear it. Use the mute command

again to unmute your voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phone

network connection is lost while the

Mute feature is on, the Mute feature will

be reset to “off” for the next call so the

other party can hear your voice.

“Phonebook” (phones without

automatic phonebook download

function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not

available when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“Transfer Entry” 䊊

“Delete Entry” 䊊

“List Names” 䊊

For phones that do not support automatic

download of the phonebook (PBAP

Bluetooth® profile), the “Phonebook” com-

mand is used to manually add entries to

the vehicle phonebook.

The phonebook stores up to 40 names for

each phone connected to the system.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s

phonebook if you are currently con-

nected with Phone B.

“Transfer Entry” 䊊

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a

new name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the

name you would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells you, then prompts you for a

name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a

name already stored, the system tells you,

then prompts you for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phone

number stored in the cellular phone’s

memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one

two.” For additional information, refer to

“How to say numbers” in this section.

To transfer a phone number stored in the

cellular phone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowl-

edges the command and asks you to initi-

ate the transfer from the phone handset.

The new contact phone number will be

transferred from the cellular phone via the

Bluetooth® communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to

each cellular phone. For additional infor-

mation, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual.

The system repeats the number and

prompts you for the next command. When

you have finished entering numbers or

transferring an entry, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location

and number.

“Delete Entry” 䊊

Use the Delete Entry command to erase

one entry from the phonebook. After the

system recognizes the command, speak

the name to delete or say “List Names” to

choose an entry.

“List Names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all

the names in the phonebook.

The system recites the phonebook entries

but does not include the actual phone

numbers. When the playback of the list is

complete, the system goes back to the

main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any

time by pressing the button on the

steering wheel. The system ends the Voice

Recognition session.

“Phonebook” (phones with

automatic phonebook download

function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not

available when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

Say a Name

“List Names” 䊊

“Record Name” 䊊

4-58 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

For phones that support automatic down-

load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth®

profile), the “Phonebook” command is used

to manage entries in the vehicle phone-

book. You can say the name of an entry at

this menu to initiate dialing of that entry.

The phonebook stores up to 1,000 names

for each phone connected to the system.

When a phone is connected to the system,

the phonebook is automatically down-

loaded to the vehicle. This feature allows

you to access your phonebook from the

Bluetooth® system and call contacts by

name. You can record a custom voice tag

for contact names that the system has dif-

ficulty recognizing.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s

phonebook if you are currently con-

nected with Phone B. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Record name” in this

section.

“List Names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all

the names and locations in the phone

book.

The system recites the phone book entries

but does not include the actual phone

numbers. When the playback of the list is

complete, the system goes back to the

main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any

time by pressing the button on the

steering wheel. The system ends the Voice

Recognition session. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Record name” in this sec-

tion.

“Record Name” 䊊

The system allows you to record custom

voice tags for contact names in the phone-

book that the vehicle has difficulty recog-

nizing. This feature can also be used to re-

cord voice tags to directly dial an entry with

multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice tags can

be recorded to the system.

“Recent Calls”

Main Menu

“Recent Calls”

“Outgoing” 䊊

“Incoming” 䊊

“Missed” 䊊

Use the Recent Calls command to access

outgoing, incoming or missed calls.

“Outgoing” 䊊

Use the Outgoing command to list the out-

going calls made from the vehicle.

“Incoming” 䊊

Use the Incoming command to list the in-

coming calls made to the vehicle.

“Missed” 䊊

Use the Missed command to list the calls

made to the vehicle that were not an-

swered.

“Connect Phone”

NOTE:

The Add Phone command is not avail-

able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Connect Phone”

“Add Phone” 䊊

“Select Phone” 䊊

“Delete Phone” 䊊

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

Use the Connect Phone commands to

manage the phones connected to the ve-

hicle or to enable the Bluetooth® function

on the vehicle.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-59

“Add Phone” 䊊

Use the Add Phone command to add a

phone to the vehicle. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Connecting procedure” in

this section.

“Select Phone” 䊊

Use the Select Phone command to select

from a list of phones connected to the ve-

hicle. The system will list the names as-

signed to each phone and then prompt

you for the phone you wish to select. Only

one phone can be active at a time.

“Delete Phone” 䊊

Use the Delete Phone command to delete

a phone that is connected to the vehicle.

The system will list the names assigned to

each phone and then prompt you for the

phone you wish to delete. Deleting a phone

from the vehicle will also delete the phone-

book for that phone.

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to

prevent a wireless connection to your

phone.

VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE

Voice Adaptation (VA) allows up to two out-

of-dialect users to train the system to im-

prove recognition accuracy. By repeating a

number of commands, the users can cre-

ate a voice model of their own voice that is

stored in the system. The system is ca-

pable of storing a different Voice Adapta-

tion model for each connected phone.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as fol-

lows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably

quiet outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine

running, the parking brake on, and the

transmission in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for

more than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the

PHONE/SEND button for the

hands-free phone system to enter the

voice adaptation mode or press the

PHONE/END button to select a

different language.”

5. Press the button.

For additional information on selecting

a different language, refer to “Choosing

a language” in this section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is se-

lected automatically. If both memory

locations are already in use, the system

will prompt you to overwrite one. Fol-

low the instructions provided by the

system.

7. When preparation is complete and you

are ready to begin, press the but-

ton.

8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow

the instructions provided by the sys-

tem.

9. When training is finished, the system

will tell you an adequate number of

phrases have been recorded.

10. The system will announce that voice

adaptation has been completed and

the system is ready.

4-60 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The VA mode will stop if:

∙ The button is pressed for more

than 5 seconds in VA mode.

∙ The vehicle begins moving during VA

mode.

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF

or LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the Voice Adaptation mode, the sys-

tem instructs the trainer to say the follow-

ing phrases.The system will prompt you for

each phrase.

∙ phonebook transfer entry

∙ dial three oh four two nine

∙ delete call back number

∙ incoming

∙ transfer entry

∙ eight pause nine three two pause seven

∙ delete all entries

∙ call seven two four zero nine

∙ phonebook delete entry

∙ next entry

∙ dial star two one seven oh

∙yes

∙no

∙ select

∙ missed

∙ dial eight five six nine two

∙ Bluetooth on

∙ outgoing

∙ call three one nine oh two

∙ nine seven pause pause three oh eight

∙ cancel

∙ call back number

∙ call star two zero nine five

∙ delete phone

∙ dial eight three zero five one

∙ record name

∙ four three pause two nine pause zero

∙ delete redial number

∙ phonebook list names

∙ call eight oh five four one

∙ correction

∙ connect phone

∙ dial seven four oh one eight

∙ previous entry

∙ delete

∙ dial nine seven two six six

∙ call seven six three oh one

∙ go back

∙ call five six two eight zero

∙ dial six six four three seven

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-61

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the Voice Recognition system,

it is possible to select menu options by

using the steering wheel controls instead

of speaking voice commands. The manual

control mode does not allow dialing a

phone number by digits. The user may se-

lect an entry from the Phonebook or Re-

cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recog-

nition, exit the manual control mode by

pressing and holding the

PHONE/END button. At that time,

pressing the PHONE/SEND button

will start the Hands Free Phone System.

Operating tips

∙ To enter manual control mode, start the

Voice Recognition system and push the

tuning switch . The system will

speak "Showing Manual Options" when

manual controls are initially activated.

∙ To browse the menu options, push the

tuning switch . The system will al-

ways speak the current menu option.

Depending on the audio display, it will

also show the current menu option.

∙ To select the current menu option,

press the PHONE/SEND button.

∙ To go back to the previous menu, press

the PHONE/END button. If the cur-

rent menu is the Main Menu, pressing

the PHONE/END button will exit

the Phone system.

∙ To exit the manual control mode, press

and hold the PHONE/END button

for 5 seconds.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all

voice commands without difficulty. If prob-

lems are encountered, try the following so-

lutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number,

try each solution in turn, starting with num-

ber 1, until the problem is resolved.

4-62 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “List of voice commands” in this

section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in

the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).

NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be car-

ried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. For additional information, refer to “Voice

Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from

the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be

confirmed by using the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook (phones

without automatic phonebook download function)” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-63

WARNING

∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full at-

tention may be given to vehicle

operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-

tery, use a phone after starting the

engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If

you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone

call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to

the in-vehicle phone module, no other

phone connecting procedure is required.

Your phone is automatically connected

LHA3506

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped)

4-64 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition with the previously connected cellu-

lar phone turned on and carried in the ve-

hicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

connections to other Bluetooth® de-

vices. If your phone does not connect au-

tomatic ally to the system, consult the

phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on

device operation.

You can connect up to five different

Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-

vehicle phone module. However, you can

talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes.

∙ Set up the wireless connection be-

tween a compatible cellular phone and

the in-vehicle phone module before us-

ing the hands-free phone system.

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized or work

properly. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting in-

structions.

∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal;

such as in a tunnel, in an under-

ground parking garage, near a tall

building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-

vent it from being dialed.

∙ When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other per-

son’s voice during a call.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle phone module to

prevent tone quality degradation and

wireless connection disruption.

∙

While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-

tion, the battery power of the cellular

phone may discharge quicker than usual.

The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem cannot charge cellular phones.

∙ For additional information, you can visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

∙ Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a differ-

ent location may reduce or eliminate

the noise.

∙ For additional information, refer to the

cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard-

ing the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-

tenna, modification, or attachments

could damage the transmitter and may

violate FCC regulations.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-65

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference

and

2. this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-

lations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The system allows hands-free operation of

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands

may not be available so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSANVoice Recognition is initial-

ized, which takes a few seconds. If the

button is pressed before the initialization

completes, the system will announce

“Hands-free phone system not ready” and

will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the

NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe

the following:

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to elimi-

nate surrounding noises (traffic noises,

vibration sounds, etc.), which may pre-

vent the system from recognizing voice

commands correctly.

∙ Wait until the tone sounds before

speaking a command. Otherwise, the

command will not be received properly.

∙ Start speaking a command within

5 seconds after the tone sounds.

∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,

press and release the button located

on the steering wheel. After the tone

sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the

microphone, and voice feedback is given

when the command is accepted.

∙ If you need to hear the available com-

mands for the current menu again, say

“Help” and the system will repeat them.

∙ If a command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Command not

recognized. Please try again.” Make sure

the command is said exactly as

prompted by the system and repeat

the command in a clear voice.

∙ If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or

“Correction” any time the system is

waiting for a response.

4-66 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ You can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by say-

ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-

nounces “Cancel” and ends the Voice

Recognition session. You can also press

and hold the button on the steer-

ing wheel for 5 seconds at any time to

end the Voice Recognition session.

Whenever the Voice Recognition ses-

sion is canceled, a double beep is

played to indicate you have exited the

system.

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the

voice feedback, push the volume con-

trol switches (+ or -) on the steering

wheel while being provided with feed-

back. You can also use the radio volume

control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the button on the steering

wheel. After interrupting the system, wait

for a beep before speaking your command.

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak

the second level commands with the main

menu command on the main menu. For

example, press the button and after

the tone say, “Call Redial”.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System are located on

the steering wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initi-

ate a Voice Recognition ses-

sion or answer an incoming

call.

LHA3002

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-67

You can also use the

button to interrupt the sys-

tem feedback and give a

command at once. For addi-

tional information, refer to

“Voice commands” and “Dur-

ing a call” in this section.

PHONE/END

While the Voice Recognition

system is active, press and

hold the button for

5 seconds to quit the Voice

Recognition system at any

time.

Tuning switch

While using the Voice Recog-

nition system, tilt the tuning

switch up or down to manu-

ally control the phone system.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button.

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth ON/OFF Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.

On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on

Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off

Add Phone Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and

complete the connection process.

Delete Phone Delete a phone currently connected to the system.

Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were recorded

using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with Voice Recognition.

Select Phone Choose a phone from a list of previously connected or currently connected phones.

The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. For additional information, refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual.

4-68 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Press the button and say “Phone” to

bring up the phone command menu. The

available options are:

∙ Call

∙ Phonebook

∙ Recent Calls

∙ Messaging (if available)

∙ Select Phone

“Call”

For additional information, refer to “Making

a call” in this section.

“Phonebook”

The following commands are available un-

der “Phonebook”:

∙ (a name)

Say a name in the phonebook to bring

up a list of options for that phonebook

entry. The system will say the name it

interpreted based on the voice com-

mand provided. If the name is incorrect,

say “Correction” to hear another name.

Once the correct phonebook entry is

identified, say “Dial” to dial the number

or “Send Text” to send a text message to

that number. Say “Record Name” to re-

cord a name for the phonebook entry.

Say “Delete Recording” to delete a re-

corded name for the phonebook entry.

∙ List Names

Speak this command to have the sys-

tem list the names in the phonebook

one by one alphabetically. Say “Dial” to

dial the number of the current name or

“Send Text” to send a text message to

that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previ-

ous Entry” to move through the list al-

phabetically. Say “Record Name” to re-

cord a name for the current phonebook

entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a

recorded name for the current phone-

book entry.

“Recent Calls”

The following commands are available un-

der “Recent Calls”:

∙ Incoming Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the incoming call will

be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that

number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous

Entry” to move through the list of in-

coming calls.

∙ Missed Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the missed call will be

displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that

number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous

Entry” to move through the list of

missed calls.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-69

∙ Outgoing Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the

call was to an entry in the phonebook,

the name will be displayed. Otherwise,

the phone number of the outgoing call

will be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that

number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous

Entry” to move through the list of out-

going calls.

∙ Redial

Speak this command to call the last

number dialed.

∙ Call Back

Speak this command to call the num-

ber of the last incoming call to the ve-

hicle.

“Messaging”(if so equipped)

Speak this command to access text mes-

saging functions. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this sec-

tion.

“Select Phone”

Speak this command to select a phone to

use from a list of those phones connected

to the vehicle.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call from a phone connected to

the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System:

NOTE:

Available commands different if system

is in Manual Control mode. For additional

information, refer to “Manual Control” in

this section.

1. Press the button.

2. The system will prompt you for a com-

mand. Say “Call”.

3. Select one of the available voice com-

mands to continue:

∙ “(a name)” — Speak the name of a

phonebook entry to place a call to that

entry. The system will respond with the

name it interpreted from your com-

mand and will prompt you to confirm

that the name is correct. Say “Yes” to

initiate the call or “No” to hear another

name from the phonebook.

∙ “List Names” – Speak this command to

have the system list the names in the

phonebook one by one alphabetically.

Say “Next Entry” or “Previous Entry” to

move through the list alphabetically.

Say “Select” once desired contact is

heard and displayed on screen. Say

“Dial” to dial the number of the current

name or say “Record Name” to record a

name for the current phonebook entry

to be assigned.

4-70 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙

“Phone Number” — Speak this command

to place a call by inputting numbers. For

7– to 10–digit phone number, speak the

numbers. Say “Correction” at any time in

the process to correct a misspoken or

misinterpreted number. For phone num-

bers with more digits or special charac-

ters, say “Special Number”, then speak the

digits. Up to 24 digits can be entered.

Available special characters are “start”,

“pound”, “plus”, and “pause”. When finished,

say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say “Correc-

tion” at any time in the process to correct

a misspoken or misinterpreted number

or character.

∙ “Redial” – Speak this command to dial

the number of the last outgoing call.

The system will display “Re-dialing

<name/number>”. The name of the

phonebook entry will be displayed if it

available, otherwise the number being

re-dialed will be displayed.

∙ “Call Back” – Speak this command to

dial the number of the last incoming

call. The system will display “Calling

back <name/number>”. The name of

the phonebook entry will be displayed if

it available, otherwise the number be-

ing called back will be displayed.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received by the phone con-

nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System, the call information is

displayed on the control panel display.

Press the button to accept the call.

Press the button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, press the button

to access additional options. Speak one of

the following commands:

∙ “(numbers)” – Speak numbers and then

say “Send” or say “Correction” to change

the numbers entered.

∙ “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the

command to mute or unmute the sys-

tem.

∙ “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to

transfer the call to the handset. To

transfer the call back from the handset

to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, press the button and

confirm when prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System allows for call

waiting functionality. If a call is received

while another call is already active, a mes-

sage will be displayed on the screen. Press

the button to hold the active call and

switch to the second call. Press the

button to reject the second call.

While the second call is active, pressing

the button will allow the same com-

mands that are available during any call

and additional commands:

∙ “Switch Call” – Speak this command to

hold the second call and switch back to

the original call.

∙ “End Other Call” – Speak this command

to stay with the second call and end the

original call.

Press the button to accept the call.

Press the button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL

To end an active call, press the but-

ton.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-71

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of “Text-to-Speech.”

Check local regulations before using

the feature.

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of some of the applica-

tions and features, such as social net-

working and texting. Check local

regulations for any requirements.

∙ Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion. If you have to use the feature

while driving, exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while using

the text messaging feature, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle.

NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled if

the connected device does not support

the Message Access Profile (MAP). For

additional information, refer to the

phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and

instructions.

Many phones may require special per-

mission to enable text messaging. Check

the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®

pairing. For some phones, you may need

to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s

Bluetooth menu for text messages to

appear on the headunit. For additional

information, refer to your phone’s Own-

er’s Manual.

Text message integration requires that

the phone support MAP (Message Ac-

cess Profile) for both receiving and send-

ing text messages. Some phones may

not support all text messaging features.

For additional information, refer to

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-

ibility information, as well as your de-

vice’s Owner’s Manual.

The system allows for the sending and re-

ceiving of text messages through the ve-

hicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Messaging”.

3. The system will prompt you for a com-

mand. Say “Send Text”.

4. The system will provide a list of avail-

able commands in order to determine

the recipient of the text message.

Choose from the following:

∙ (a name)

∙ Number

∙ Incoming Calls

∙ Outgoing Calls

∙ Missed Calls

For additional information, refer to

“Voice commands” in this section.

4-72 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access and adjust the settings for the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button:

∙ Bluetooth

Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® system on or off.

∙ Add Phone or Device

For additional information, refer to

“Connecting procedure” in this section.

∙ Delete Phone or Device

Select to delete a phone from the dis-

played list. The system will ask to con-

firm before deleting the phone.

∙ Replace Phone

Select to replace a phone from the dis-

played list. When a selection is made,

the system will ask to confirm before

proceeding. The recorded phonebook

for the phone being deleted will be

saved as long as the new phone’s

phonebook is the same as the old

phone’s phonebook.

∙ Select Phone or Device

Select to connect to a previously con-

nected phone from the displayed list.

∙ Show Incoming Calls

Incoming call information may be dis-

played on the center display screen.

∙ Phonebook Download

Select to turn on or off the automatic

download of a connected phone’s

phonebook.

∙ Text Message

Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text

messaging feature.

∙ New Text Sound

Select to adjust the volume of the

sound that plays when a new text is

received by a phone connected to the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

The setting all the way to the left indi-

cates that the new text sound will be

muted.

∙ Show Incoming Text

Incoming text messages may be dis-

played on the center display screen. Se-

lect “None” to have no display of incom-

ing text messages.

∙ Edit Custom Messages

Select to set a custom message that

will be available with the standard op-

tions when sending a text message. To

set a custom message, send a text

message to your own phone number

while the phone is connected to the

system. Three custom messages can

be set. Custom messages can only be

set while the vehicle is stationary.

∙ Auto Reply

Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply

function. When enabled, the vehicle will

automatically send a predefined text

message to the sender when a text

message is received while driving.

LHA2274

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-73

∙ Auto Reply Message

Select to choose the message that is

sent when the Auto Reply function is

enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or

one of the three custom messages

stored in the system.

∙ Vehicle Signature On/Off

Select to choose whether or not the

vehicle signature is added to outgoing

text messages from the vehicle. This

message cannot be changed or cus-

tomized.

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the Voice Recognition system,

it is possible to select menu options by

using the steering wheel controls instead

of speaking voice commands. The manual

control mode does not allow dialing a

phone number by digits. The user may se-

lect an entry from the Phonebook or Re-

cent Calls lists. To re-activate Voice Recog-

nition, exit the manual control mode by

pressing and holding the

PHONE/END button. At that time,

pressing the PHONE/SEND button

will start the Hands Free Phone System.

4-74 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ..........5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..............5-2

Three-way catalyst ...........................5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover ................5-6

Off-roadrecovery ............................5-6

Rapid air pressure loss .......................5-6

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...........5-7

Ignition switch...................................5-8

Continuously Variable Transmission

(if so equipped) ...............................5-8

Manual transmission (if so equipped) .........5-9

Ignition switch positions......................5-9

Before starting the engine .......................5-9

Starting the engine .............................5-10

Driving the vehicle ...............................5-11

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) (if so equipped) .........................5-11

Manual transmission (if so equipped) ........5-15

Parking brake ..................................5-17

Cruise control (if so equipped) ..................5-18

Precautions on cruise control................5-18

Cruise control operations....................5-18

Break-in schedule ..............................5-20

Fuel efficient driving tips ........................5-20

Increasing fuel economy .......................5-21

Parking/parking on hills ........................5-22

Power steering .................................5-23

Brake system...................................5-24

Brake precautions ...........................5-24

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..............5-24

Brake assist .................................5-25

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .........5-26

Brake force distribution......................5-27

Cold weather driving ...........................5-28

Freeing a frozen door lock ...................5-28

Antifreeze ...................................5-28

Battery......................................5-28

Draining of coolant water....................5-29

Tire equipment ..............................5-29

Special winter equipment ...................5-29

Driving on snow or ice .......................5-29

Engine block heater (if so equipped) .........5-30

WARNING

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the ve-

hicle inspected immediately.

∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-

gine running for any extended length

of time.

∙ Keep the rear vent windows, doors

and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed

while driving, otherwise exhaust

gases could be drawn into the pas-

senger compartment. If you must

drive with one of these open, follow

these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Turn the air recirculation mode off

and set the fan speed control to

the highest level to circulate the

air.

∙ The exhaust system and body should

be inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system,

underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission con-

trol device installed in the exhaust system.

Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst

are burned at high temperatures to help

reduce pollutants.

WARNING

∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-

mals or flammable materials away

from the exhaust system

components.

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

CAUTION

∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability

to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if no-

ticeable loss of performance or other

unusual operating conditions are de-

tected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not race the engine while warming

it up.

∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is

the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-

rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation

has not reached the level to trigger illumi-

nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illu-

minated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-

tion indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-

ing the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

does not monitor the tire pressure of

the spare tire.

∙ The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire pres-

sure (for example, a flat tire while driv-

ing).

∙ The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure of your tires are adjusted. After

the tires are inflated to the recom-

mended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn

off the low tire pressure warning light.

Use a tire pressure gauge to check the

tire pressure.

∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warn-

ing message is displayed in the odom-

eter when the low tire pressure warning

light is illuminated and low tire pressure

is detected. The CHECK TIRE PRES warn-

ing message turns off when the low tire

pressure warning light turns off.

∙ The low tire pressure warning light re-

mains illuminated until the tires are in-

flated to the recommended COLD tire

pressure. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning

message is displayed each time the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion as long as the low tire pres-

sure warning light remains illuminated.

∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES warning mes-

sage is not displayed if the low tire pres-

sure warning light illuminates to indi-

cate a TPMS malfunction.

∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending

on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-

eration and the outside temperature.

Do not reduce the tire pressure after

driving because the tire pressure rises

after driving. Low outside temperature

can lower the temperature of the air

inside the tire which can cause a lower

tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. If the warning light illumi-

nates, check the tire pressure for all four

tires.

∙ The Tire and Loading Information label

is located in the driver’s door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire

pressure warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for possible influences

before use.

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

5-4 Starting and driving

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon

as possible. (For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.)

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning

light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CAUTION

∙ The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

tire chains or the wheels are buried in

snow.

∙ Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-

dows. This may cause poor reception

of the signals from the tire pressure

sensors, and the TPMS will not func-

tion properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of the

TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate.

Some examples are:

∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi-

lar radio frequencies are near the ve-

hicle.

∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-

cies is being used in or near the vehicle.

∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or

a DC/AC converter is being used in or

near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may

illuminate in the following cases:

∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel

and tire without TPMS.

∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the

ID has not been registered.

∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Starting and driving 5-5

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive

speed, high speed cornering, or sudden

steering maneuvers, because these driving

practices could cause you to lose control of

your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,

particularly if the loss of control causes

the vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving

when tired. Never drive when under the in-

fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which

may cause drowsiness). Always wear your

seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual, and also in-

struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person

is significantly more likely to be injured

or killed than a person properly wearing

a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side

wheels may unintentionally leave the road

surface. If this occurs, maintain control of

the vehicle by following the procedure be-

low. Please note that this procedure is only

a general guide. The vehicle must be driven

as appropriate based on the conditions of

the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to

drive the vehicle back onto the road

surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires re-

turn to the road surface. When all tires

are on the road surface, steer the ve-

hicle to stay in the appropriate driving

lane.

∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-

turn the vehicle to the road surface

based on vehicle, road or traffic con-

ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a

stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged

due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air

pressure loss can also be caused by driving

on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-

dling and stability of the vehicle, especially

at highway speeds.

5-6 Starting and driving

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspecting the tires for wear and

damage. For additional information, refer

to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses

air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,

maintain control of the vehicle by following

the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The ve-

hicle must be driven as appropriate based

on the conditions of the vehicle, road and

traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-

sure. Losing control of the vehicle may

cause a collision and result in personal

injury.

∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe

location off the road and away from

traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-

ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers

and contact a roadside emergency

service to change the tire. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing a

flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-

hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream

reduces coordination, delays reaction

time and impairs judgement. Driving

after drinking alcohol increases the

likelihood of being involved in an acci-

dent injuring yourself and others. Addi-

tionally, if you are injured in an accident,

alcohol can increase the severity of the

injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-

ever, you must choose not to drive under the

influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of

people are injured or killed in alcohol-related

collisions. Although the local laws vary on

what is considered to be legally intoxicated,

the fact is that alcohol affects all people dif-

ferently and most people underestimate the

effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,

prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t

drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is

impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other

physical condition.

Starting and driving 5-7

WARNING

∙ Never remove the ignition key or place

the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion while driving. The steering wheel

will lock. This may cause the driver to

lose control of the vehicle and could

result in serious vehicle damage or

personal injury.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch cannot be turned to the

LOCK position until the shift lever is moved

to the P (Park) position.

∙ When placing the ignition switch in the

LOCK position, make sure that the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

∙ When removing the key from the igni-

tion switch (if it is inserted), make sure

that the shift lever is in the P (Park) po-

sition.

When the ignition switch cannot be placed

in the LOCK position:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Move the ignition switch slightly in the

ON direction.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK

position.

4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the

ignition switch.

If the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK

position, the shift lever cannot be moved

from the P (Park) position.

The shift lever can be moved if the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position and the

foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position 䊊

1between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF posi-

tion is indicated by a “1” on the key cylin-

der.

SSD0392

IGNITION SWITCH

5-8 Starting and driving

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

The ignition switch includes a device that

helps prevent accidental removal of the

key while driving.

The key can only be removed when the

ignition switch is in the LOCK position.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked,

it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clock-

wise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, place the ig-

nition switch in the LOCK position. Re-

move the key. To unlock the steering

wheel, insert the key and turn it gently

while rotating the steering wheel slightly

right and left.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (1)

The engine can be turned off without lock-

ing the steering wheel.

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accesso-

ries such as the radio when the engine is

not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system

and the electrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as

the engine has started, release the key. It

automatically returns to the ON position.

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,

coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so

equipped), and windshield-washer fluid

as frequently as possible, or at least

whenever you refuel.

∙ Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-

ance and condition. Also check tires for

proper inflation.

∙ Lock all doors.

∙ Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

∙ Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position. For additional information,

refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights

and audible reminders” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

WSD0052

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-9

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

models:

Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift lever cannot be moved out

of P (Park) and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition key is

turned to the OFF position or if the

key is removed from the ignition

switch.

The starter is designed not to oper-

ate if the shift lever is in any of the

driving positions.

Manual transmission (M/T) models:

For best practice when operating an

M/T, depressing the clutch before

moving the shift lever is ideal.

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). De-

press the clutch pedal to the floor

while cranking the engine.

The starter is designed not to oper-

ate unless the clutch pedal is fully

depressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal by turning the

ignition key to the START position. Re-

lease the key when the engine starts. If

the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat

the above procedure.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-

starting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the

floor) and hold it and then crank the

engine. Release the key and the ac-

celerator pedal when the engine

starts.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-

cause it is flooded, depress the accel-

erator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Crank the engine for

5-6 seconds. After cranking the en-

gine, release the accelerator pedal.

Crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal by turning the

ignition key to the START position. Re-

lease the key when the engine starts.

If the engine starts, but fails to run,

repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, turn the key off and wait

10 seconds before cranking again, oth-

erwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least

30 seconds after starting. Do not race

the engine while warming it up. Drive at

a moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly

and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need

to be charged to maintain battery

health.

STARTING THE ENGINE

5-10 Starting and driving

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so

equipped)

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

CAUTION

∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade,do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically

controlled to produce maximum power

and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures

for this transmission are shown on the fol-

lowing pages. Follow these procedures for

maximum vehicle performance and driv-

ing enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

Starting and driving 5-11

CAUTION

To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving the

shift lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed

and move the shift lever into a driving

gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually

start the vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before

moving the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

The Continuously Variable Transmission

is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST

be depressed before shifting from P

(Park) to any drive position while the ig-

nition switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of P

(Park) and into any of the other gear po-

sitions if the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the

keyisremoved.

To move the shift lever:

Press the button 䊊

Awhile depressing

the brake pedal

Press the button 䊊

Ato shift

Shift without pressing the button 䊊

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal and move the shift lever from P

(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

LSD2013

5-12 Starting and driving

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever

is in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal in-

jury or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or

ACC position for any reason while the ve-

hicle is in N (Neutral), or any drive position,

the key cannot be turned to the LOCK po-

sition and be removed from the ignition

switch. If this occurs, perform the following

steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the ve-

hicle is stopped.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) to park

the vehicle and place the ignition

switch in the LOCK position to remove

the key.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the P (Park) position only when the ve-

hicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when

the vehicle is parked or when starting the

engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed and the shift lever button

pressed in to move the shift lever from N

(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a

hill, apply the parking brake first, then place

the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the R (Reverse) position only when the

vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)

position. R (Reverse) speed is limited to

30 mph (48 km/h). Do not exceed 30 mph

(48 km/h) in the R (Reverse) position. The

brake pedal must be depressed and the

shift lever button pressed in to move the

shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or

any drive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The engine can be started in this

position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and

restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is

moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

L(Low)

Use this position for engine braking on

steep downhill gradients/climbing steep

slopes and whenever approaching sharp

bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in

any other circumstances.

Starting and driving 5-13

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift lever

may not be moved from the P (Park) posi-

tion even with the foot brake pedal de-

pressed.

To move the shift lever, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a

screwdriver, remove the shift lock re-

lease cover.

∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also

be used.

4. Push down the shift lock release using

a suitable tool.

5. Press the shift lever button 䊊

Aand

move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position while holding down the shift

lock release.

6. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition to unlock the steering wheel.

7. Release the parking brake.

The vehicle may be moved to the desired

location.

Replace the removed shift lock release

cover after the operation.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the

P (Park) position, have the Continuously

Variable Transmission system checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch

When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with

the shift lever in the D (Drive) position,

the light in the instrument panel illu-

minates. For additional information, refer

to “Overdrive OFF indicator light” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

Use the overdrive OFF mode when you

need improved engine braking.

To turn off the overdrive OFF mode, push

the O/D OFF switch again. The indi-

cator light will turn off.

LSD2011 LSD2012

5-14 Starting and driving

Each time the engine is started, or when

the shift lever is shifted to any position

other than D (Drive), the overdrive OFF

mode will be automatically turned off.

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts

the transmission down into a lower gear,

depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, the

Continuously Variable Transmission will

not be shifted into the selected driving po-

sition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel

spinning and subsequent hard braking,

the fail-safe system may be activated.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

may come on to indicate the fail-safe

mode is activated. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual. This will oc-

cur even if all electrical circuits are func-

tioning properly. In this case, place the

ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait for 10 seconds. Then place the igni-

tion switch back in the ON position. The

vehicle should return to its normal oper-

ating condition. If it does not return to its

normal operating condition, have the

transmission checked and repaired, if

necessary. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature pro-

tection mode or fail-safe operation oc-

curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re-

duced.The reduced speed may be lower

than other traffic, which could increase

the chance of a collision. Be especially

careful when driving. If necessary, pull

to the side of the road at a safe place

and allow the transmission to return to

normal operation, or have it repaired if

necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

WARNING

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

∙ Do not over-rev the engine when

shifting to a lower gear. This may

cause a loss of control or engine

damage.

∙ Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position

while driving. Doing so may result in

an accident due to loss of engine

braking.

CAUTION

∙ Do not rest your foot on the clutch

pedal while driving. This may cause

clutch damage.

∙ Fully depress the clutch pedal before

shifting to help prevent transmission

damage.

∙ Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

∙ When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running (for example, at a stop

light), shift to N (Neutral) and release

the clutch pedal with the foot brake

applied.

Starting and driving 5-15

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or

downshifting, depress the clutch pedal

fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then

release the clutch slowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully de-

press the clutch pedal before operating the

shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully

depressed before the transmission is

shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans-

mission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,

3rd, 4th and up to 5th gear in sequence

according to vehicle speed.

On the manual transmission, you cannot shift

directly from 5th gear into R (Reverse). First

shift into N (Neutral), then into R (Reverse).

The shift lever ring returns to its original

position when the shift lever is moved to

the N (Neutral) position.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R

(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then

release the clutch pedal. Depress the

clutch pedal again and shift into R (Re-

verse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested up-shift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle

speeds for shifting into a higher gear.

These suggestions relate to fuel economy

and vehicle performance. Actual upshift

speeds will vary according to road condi-

tions, the weather and individual driving

habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude ar-

eas (less than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

GEAR CHANGE mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 9 (14)

2nd to 3rd 12 (19)

3rd to 4th 21 (34)

4th to 5th 28 (45)

5th —

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas

and high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

Gear change mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th —

Suggested maximum speed in

each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not

running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested

speed (shown below) in any gear. For level

road driving, use the highest gear suggested

for that speed. Always observe posted

speed limits, and drive according to the road

conditions, which will ensure safe operation.

Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to

a lower gear as it may cause engine damage

or loss of vehicle control.

GEAR mph (km/h)

1st 28 (46)

2nd 52 (83)

3rd 76 (122)

4th 103 (166)

5th —

SSD0535

5-16 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

∙ Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully

engaged.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up

䊊

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)

position.

Continuously Variable Transmission

models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake

lever slightly, press the button 䊊

Band

lower the lever completely.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-

ing light goes out.

WSD0169

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-17

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. ON/OFF switch

∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-

tions, it cancels automatically.

∙ To properly set the cruise control sys-

tem, use the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

∙ When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.

∙ On winding or hilly roads.

∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

∙ In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models,do not

shift into N (Neutral) without depress-

ing the clutch pedal when the cruise

control is set. Should this occur, depress

the clutch pedal and turn the ON/OFF

switch off immediately. Failure to do so

may cause engine damage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-

out keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light

in the instrument panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. The

CRUISE indicator light in the instrument

panel comes on. Take your foot off the ac-

celerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the

set speed.

∙To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal.When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-

ously set speed.

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, drive without the

cruise control.

LSD2430

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

5-18 Starting and driving

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the CRUISE

indicator light in the instrument panel

goes out.

∙ Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE indica-

tor light goes out.

∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. The CRUISE

indicator light in the instrument panel

goes out.

The cruise control is automatically can-

celed and the CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument panel goes out if:

∙ You depress the brake or clutch pedal

while pushing the ACCEL/RES or

SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is

deleted from memory.

∙ The vehicle slows down more than

8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

∙ You depress the clutch pedal (manual

transmission), or move the shift lever

into N (Neutral) (Continuously Variable

Transmission).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST/SET

switch.

∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you

desire, release the switch.

∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed increases by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the COAST/SET switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle

slows to the desired speed.

∙ Push and release the COAST/SET

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed decreases by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle

returns to the last set cruising speed when

the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-19

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance

and ensure the future reliability and

economy of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may re-

sult in shortened engine life and re-

duced engine performance.

∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-

stant speed, either fast or slow, and do

not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

∙ Avoid quick starts.

∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-

sible.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient

Driving Tips to help you achieve the most

fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.

∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

∙ Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever pos-

sible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.

∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your num-

ber of stops.

∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-

mize red light stops and improve fuel

efficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the

vehicle due to reduced engine load.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle

due to increased aerodynamic drag.

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling

load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

∙ Observing the speed limit and not

exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where

legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-

ciency due to reduced aerodynamic

drag.

∙ Maintaining a safe following distance

behind other vehicles reduces un-

necessary braking.

∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced

braking and smooth acceleration

changes.

∙ Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

5-20 Starting and driving

5. Use Cruise Control

∙ Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady

speed.

∙ Cruise control is particularly effective

in providing fuel savings when driving

on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save

time.

7. Avoid Idling

∙ Shutting off your engine when safe

for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds

saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll

Roads

∙ Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruis-

ing speed through the toll and avoid

stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact

to fuel economy.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to

effectively circulate the engine oil be-

fore driving.

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-

ating temperature more quickly

while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever pos-

sible.

∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening

the windows will help to reduce the

inside temperature faster, resulting in

reduced demand on your A/C sys-

tem.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases

tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine

oil. For additional information, refer to

“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tions” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

Starting and driving 5-21

WARNING

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park) or in

an appropriate gear for manual trans-

mission (M/T) models. Failure to do so

could cause the vehicle to move unex-

pectedly or roll away and result in an

accident. Make sure the shift lever has

been pushed as far forward as it can

go and cannot be moved without de-

pressing the foot brake pedal.

∙ Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. M/T models:

Place the shift lever into the R (Reverse)

position. When parking on an uphill

grade, place the shift lever into 1st gear.

Continuously Variable Transmission

models:

Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into traffic when parked on an incline, it

is a good practice to turn the wheels as

illustrated.

SSD0488

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-22 Starting and driving

∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the curb

side wheel gently touches the curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away

from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position and remove the key.

WARNING

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

∙ When the power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine run-

ning, there will be no power assist for

the steering. You will still have control

of the vehicle, but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

The power steering system is designed to

provide power assist while driving to oper-

ate the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated re-

peatedly or continuously while parking or

driving at a very low speed, the power as-

sist for the steering wheel will be reduced.

This is to prevent overheating of the power

steering system and protect it from getting

damaged. While the power assist is re-

duced, steering wheel operation will be-

come heavy. When the temperature of the

power steering system goes down, the

power assist level will return to normal.

Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-

erations that could cause the power steer-

ing system to overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering

wheel is operated quickly. However, this is

not a malfunction.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the power steering system is not

functioning properly and may need servic-

ing. Have the power steering system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the power steering warning light illu-

minates with the engine running, there will

be no power assist for the steering, but you

will still have control of the vehicle. At this

time, greater steering effort is required to

operate the steering wheel, especially in

sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power

steering warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

POWER STEERING

Starting and driving 5-23

The brake system has two separate hy-

draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,

you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using

engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you

can stop the vehicle by depressing the

brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-

sure on the brake pedal will be required to

stop the vehicle and stopping distance will

be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will overheat the brakes,

wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce

gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent

the brakes from overheating, reduce speed

and downshift to a lower gear before going

down a slope or long grade. Overheated

brakes may reduce braking performance

and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-

celerating could cause the wheels to

skid and result in an accident.

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-

ing will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet. As

a result, your braking distance will be lon-

ger and the vehicle may pull to one side

during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until

the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving

the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever

the stopping effect of the parking brake is

weakened or whenever the brake shoes

and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order

to assure the best brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but

it cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain ve-

hicle control during braking on slip-

pery surfaces. Remember that stop-

ping distances on slippery surfaces

will be longer than on normal sur-

faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads, or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain

a safe distance from the vehicle in

front of you. Ultimately, the driver is

responsible for safety.

∙ Tire type and condition may also af-

fect braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

BRAKE SYSTEM

5-24 Starting and driving

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and

type as specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Tire

and Loading Information label” in

the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels

do not lock during hard braking or when

braking on slippery surfaces. The system

detects the rotation speed at each wheel

and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding.

By preventing each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving

and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

Anti-lock Braking System will operate to

prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-

cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,

hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start

the engine and move the vehicle at a low

speed in forward or reverse. When the self-

test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.

This is normal and does not indicate a mal-

function. If the computer senses a mal-

function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-

nates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then

operates normally but without anti-lock

assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-

ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-

10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-

sure. This action is similar to pumping the

brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-

tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise

from under the hood or feel a vibration

from the actuator when it is operating. This

is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-

erating properly. However, the pulsation

may indicate that road conditions are haz-

ardous and extra care is required while

driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is

activated generating greater braking force

than a conventional brake booster even

with light pedal force.

Starting and driving 5-25

WARNING

The brake assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to

monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.

Under certain driving conditions, the VDC

system helps to perform the following

functions:

∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel

so power is transferred to a non-

slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

∙ Controls brake pressure and engine

output to reduce drive wheel slip based

on vehicle speed (traction control func-

tion).

∙ Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle in

the following conditions:

– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-

low the steered path despite in-

creased steering input)

– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due

to certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to

maintain control of the vehicle, but it can-

not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-

ing situations.

When the VDC system operates, the

indicator in the instrument panel flashes

so note the following:

∙ The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required

to help keep the vehicle on the steered

path.

∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise or vibration from

under the hood. This is normal and indi-

cates that the VDC system is working

properly.

∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip in-

dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system,

the indicator light comes on in the

instrument panel. The VDC system auto-

matically turns off when this indicator light

is on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The indicator illumi-

nates to indicate the VDC system is off.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

5-26 Starting and driving

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to

prevent one drive wheel from slipping by

transferring power to a non-slipping drive

wheel. The indicator flashes if this oc-

curs. All other VDC functions are off and

the indicator will not flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to

on when the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-

ture that tests the system each time you

start the engine and move the vehicle for-

ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When

the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-

tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator light may flash or

illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and

the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the indi-

cator light may illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator light

may flash or illuminate. Do not drive

on these types of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator light may

flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-

function. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator light

may flash or illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns,

the system optimizes the distribution of

force to each of the front and rear wheels

depending on the radius of the turn.

Starting and driving 5-27

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator light may flash or

illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and

the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the indi-

cator light may illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator light

may flash or illuminate. Do not drive

on these types of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator light may

flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-

function. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator light

may flash or illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

de-icer through the key hole. If the lock

becomes frozen, heat the key before in-

serting it into the key hole or use the re-

mote keyless entry key fob.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),

check the antifreeze to assure proper win-

ter protection. For additional information,

refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the

battery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly.

For additional information, refer to “Battery”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-28 Starting and driving

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, in-

cluding the engine block. Refill before oper-

ating the vehicle. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance

of these tires will be substantially re-

duced in snowy and icy conditions. If

you operate your vehicle on snowy or

icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use

of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES

on all four wheels. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire

type, size, speed rating and availability

information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some U.S. states and Canadian prov-

inces prohibit their use. Check local,

state and provincial laws before install-

ing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional

information, refer to “Tire chains” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during winter:

∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows

and wiper blades.

∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-

drifts.

∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” un-

der these conditions.Try to avoid driv-

ing on wet ice until the road is salted

or sanded.

∙ Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

∙ Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

∙ Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

reaching it. Try not to brake while on

the ice, and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

Starting and driving 5-29

∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so

equipped) on slippery roads.

∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist

with cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)

or lower.

WARNING

∙ Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system

or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be

seriously injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded

connection.

∙ Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least 10 A.

Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to

use the proper extension cord or a

grounded outlet can result in a fire or

electrical shock and cause serious

personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into

a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-

sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be

plugged in for at least 2 to 4 hours,

depending on outside temperatures,

to properly warm the engine coolant.

Use an appropriate timer to turn the

engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away

from moving parts.

5-30 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ..................6-2

Flat tire ..........................................6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................6-2

Changing a flat tire ...........................6-3

Jump starting ...................................6-8

Push starting ...................................6-10

If your vehicle overheats........................6-10

Towing your vehicle .............................6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........6-12

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck

vehicle) ......................................6-14

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under emer-

gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

∙

Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

∙ Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition

switch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use

of the hazard warning flasher switch

while driving.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors

tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

When the low tire pressure warning light is

lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure)

warning message is displayed in the

odometer, one or more of your tires is sig-

nificantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is be-

ing driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS

will activate and warn you of it by the low

tire pressure warning light. This system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible reminders” in

the “Instruments and controls” section, and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light OFF. If you have a

flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Shift the manual trans-

mission into R (Reverse) or the Continu-

ously Variable Transmission into P

(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic

and to signal professional road assis-

tance personnel that you need assis-

tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-

hicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the manual trans-

mission is shifted into R (Reverse), or

the Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion into P (Park).

∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-

fessional road assistance.

In case of emergency 6-3

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the

flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving

when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

Open the trunk. Lift the floorboard 䊊

To remove the jack, collapse the jack from

the storage location. If necessary, remove

the spare tire first to easily access the jack.

To remove the spare tire, loosen the bolt by

turning counterclockwise. Once free, re-

move the bolt. Remove the spare tire.

LCE2142

LCE2020

SCE0913

6-4 In case of emergency

Removing wheel cover (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel

caps or wheel covers. Doing so could

result in personal injury.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jacking

rod 䊊

1as illustrated.

Apply cloth 䊊

2between the wheel and

jacking rod to prevent damaging the wheel

and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover

or wheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removing

the damaged tire

WARNING

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle on

other vehicles. The jack is designed

for lifting only your vehicle during a

tire change.

SCE0630 LCE2235

In case of emergency 6-5

∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for

jack support.

∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.

∙ Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)

off the ground. It may cause the ve-

hicle to move.

Always refer to the proper illustrations for

the correct placement and jack-up points

for your specific vehicle model and jack

type.

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following in-

structions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by

turning counterclockwise with the

wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the

wheel nuts until the tire is off the

ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the

jack-up point as illustrated so the top

of the jack contacts the vehicle at the

jack-up point. Align the jack head be-

tween the 2 notches in the front or the

rear. Also fit the groove of the jack head

between the notches.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack

lever and rod with both hands. Carefully

raise the vehicle until the tire clears the

ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and

then remove the tire.

LCE2059

6-6 In case of emergency

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and

tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the

sequence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D) until

they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence as illus-

trated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D). Lower the vehicle

completely.

WARNING

∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the

nuts to become loose.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a

torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened

to specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-

sure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mi (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information Label.

5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.

WCE0048

In case of emergency 6-7

6. Install the jack in its storage area and

tighten the jack screw clockwise.

7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk

floor carpeting over the damaged tire.

8. Close the trunk.

WARNING

∙ Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can be-

come dangerous projectiles in an ac-

cident or sudden stop.

∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. For additional information,

refer to specific instructions under

the heading “Wheels and tires” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery,

the instructions and precautions below

must be followed.

WARNING

∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting

in severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulfuric acid solution which

can cause severe burns. If the fluid

should come into contact with any-

thing, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

WCE0157

JUMP STARTING

6-8 In case of emergency

∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye protec-

tors (for example, goggles or indus-

trial safety spectacles) and remove

rings, metal bands, or any other jew-

elry. Do not lean over the battery

when jump starting.

∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause

serious injury.

∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause per-

sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-

hicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring

their batteries near each other.

Do not allow the 2 vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift

lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmis-

sion) or to P (Park) (continuously vari-

able transmission). Switch off all un-

necessary electrical systems (lights,

heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with an

old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the se-

quence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

CAUTION

∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi-

tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body

ground (for example, strut mounting

bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to

the battery.

WCE0054

In case of emergency 6-9

∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that the cable

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start

the engine of the vehicle being jump

started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, turn the key

off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying

again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully dis-

connect the negative cable and then

the positive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).

Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to

cover the vent holes as it may be con-

taminated with corrosive acid.

CAUTION

∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

∙ Continuously variable transmission

and manual transmission models

cannot be push-started or tow-

started. Attempting to do so may

cause transmission damage.

∙ For manual transmission models,

never try to start the vehicle by tow-

ing it. When the engine starts, the for-

ward surge could cause the vehicle to

collide with the tow vehicle.

∙ Continuously variable transmission

models cannot be push-started or

tow-started. Attempting to do so may

cause transmission damage.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by

an extremely high temperature gauge

reading (if so equipped), a High tempera-

ture warning light (red) (if so

equipped) ), or if you feel a lack of en-

gine power, detect abnormal noise, etc.

take the following steps.

WARNING

∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause en-

gine damage or a vehicle fire.

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while

the engine is still hot. When the radia-

tor cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-

ply the parking brake and move the

shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual trans-

mission) or to P (Park) (Continuously

Variable Transmission).

Do not stop the engine.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-10 In case of emergency

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maxi-

mum hot and fan control to high

speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen

for steam or coolant escaping from the

radiator before opening the hood. (If

steam or coolant is escaping, turn off

the engine). Do not open the hood fur-

ther until no steam or coolant can be

seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage

or looseness. Also check if the cooling

fan is running. The radiator hoses and

radiator should not leak water. If cool-

ant is leaking, the water pump belt is

missing or loose, or the cooling fan

does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or

the engine cooling fan. The engine cool-

ing fan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank with the engine running.

Add coolant to the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank if necessary. Have your ve-

hicle repaired. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial

in Canada) and local regulations for towing

must be followed. Incorrect towing equip-

ment could damage your vehicle. Towing in-

structions are available from a NISSAN

dealer. Local service operators are generally

familiar with the applicable laws and proce-

dures for towing. To assure proper towing

and to prevent accidental damage to your

vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a ser-

vice operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable

to have the service operator carefully read

the following precautions:

WARNING

∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

∙ Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

∙ When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working condi-

tion. If any of these conditions apply,

dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be

used.

∙ Always attach safety chains before

towing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-11

For additional information, refer to “Flat

towing” in the “Technical and Consumer In-

formation” section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle

based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-

tional information, refer to the diagrams in

this section to ensure that your vehicle is

properly towed.

2WD models with Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT)

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (front) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed

truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

∙ Never tow Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) models with the

front wheels on the ground or four

wheels on the ground (forward or

backward), as this may cause serious

and expensive damage to the trans-

mission. If it is necessary to tow the

vehicle with the rear wheels raised al-

ways use towing dollies under the

front wheels.

LCE2345

6-12 In case of emergency

∙ When towing Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) models with the

rear wheels on the ground or on tow-

ing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. Never

secure the steering wheel by plac-

ing the ignition switch in the LOCK

position. This may damage the

steering lock mechanism (for

models with a steering lock

mechanism).

2WD models with manual

transmission

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

be used when towing your vehicle or place

the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illus-

trated.

If you must use a pull behind tow truck put

the manual transmission in N (Neutral).

Your vehicle speed should never exceed

60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your ve-

hicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle

the engine with the transmission in N (Neu-

tral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en-

gine after every 500 miles of towing may

cause damage to the transmission’s inter-

nal parts.

CAUTION

Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ If you have to tow manual transmis-

sion models with the rear wheels on

the ground (if you do not use towing

dollies) or four wheels on the ground:

– Always release the parking brake.

LCE2346

In case of emergency 6-13

– Move the transmission shift lever

to the N (Neutral) position

– Observe the following restricted

towing speeds and distances for

manual transmission models only:

Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)

Distance: Less than 500 miles

(805 km)

When towing long distances or speeds in

excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the

propeller shaft before towing to prevent

damage to the transmission.For additional

information, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a

stuck vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-

sonal injury or death when recovering a

stuck vehicle:

∙ Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any

questions regarding the recovery

procedure.

∙ Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to main structural mem-

bers of the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

∙ Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

∙ Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the ve-

hicle. Never pull at an angle.

∙ Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except

the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device de-

signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) System.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind

the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to

clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive) (continuous vari-

able transmission models) or 1st

(Low) and R (Reverse) (manual trans-

mission models).

∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion.

6-14 In case of emergency

∙ Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive) (continuous variable trans-

mission models) or 1st (Low) and R

(Reverse) (manual transmission

models).

∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional towing

service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ................................7-2

Washing......................................7-2

Waxing .......................................7-2

Removing spots ..............................7-3

Underbody ...................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) .......7-3

Chromeparts................................7-4

Tire dressings ................................7-4

Cleaning interior.................................7-4

Air fresheners ................................7-5

Floor mats ...................................7-5

Seatbelts .................................... 7-7

Corrosion protection ............................ 7-7

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion ............................. 7-7

Environmental factors influence the

rate of corrosion.............................. 7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion ..........7-8

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to take proper

care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain.

∙ After driving on coastal roads.

∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface.

∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-

face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-

hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in

a shady area or protect the vehicle with a

body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-

face when putting on or removing the

body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-

ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed

with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, es-

pecially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to function

properly. Always check with your car

wash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical de-

tergents, gasoline or solvents.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot,

as the surface may become

water-spotted.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

clean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt.There-

fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.

Take care that the drain holes in the lower

edge of the door are open. Spray water

under the body and in the wheel wells to

loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the

vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove

built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-

ered appearance before re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing

the proper product.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-

sives, cutting compounds or cleaners

that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-

ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-

ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the surface of the paint to avoid last-

ing damage or staining. Special cleaning

products are available at a NISSAN dealer

or any automotive accessory store. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it

is necessary to clean the underbody regu-

larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from

building up and causing the acceleration of

corrosion on the underbody and suspen-

sion. Before the winter period and again in

the spring, the underseal must be checked

and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be

easier to clean if the high-mounted stop

light (if so equipped) is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high-

mounted stop light to reduce the risk of

damaging the high-mounted stop light

wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

䊊

1Push toward rear of vehicle.

䊊

2Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be

properly reinstalled before driving your ve-

hicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-

mal for glass to become coated with a film

after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.

Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily

remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-

age the electrical conductors, radio an-

tenna elements or rear window de-

froster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so

equipped)

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge

dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-

cially during winter months in areas where

road salt is used. If not removed, road salt

can discolor the wheels.

WAI0007

Appearance and care 7-3

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

ambient temperature.

∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after

the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a

non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain

the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-

ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-

plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-

ing and form a compound. This compound

may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easily

than with an oil-based tire dressing.

∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-

cult to remove).

∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is

completely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufac-

turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a

vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe

the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-

faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in

mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some

fabric protectors contain chemicals that

may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifi-

cation sensor. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and re-

sult in serious personal injury.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

CAUTION

∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to leather (if so

equipped) surfaces and should be re-

moved promptly. Do not use saddle

soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, clean-

ing fluids, solvents, detergents or

ammonia-based cleaners as they

may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

∙ Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that

could affect the vehicle interior. If you use

an air freshener, take the following precau-

tions:

∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they

contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place

the air freshener in a location that al-

lows it to hang free and not contact an

interior surface.

∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip

on the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration

when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions before using the air fresh-

eners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision, injury or

death:

∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front po-

sition or install them upside down or

backwards.

LAI2010

Appearance and care 7-5

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-

cifically designed for use in your ve-

hicle model and model year.

∙ Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat position-

ing hook. For additional information,

refer to "Floor mat installation" in this

section.

∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-

terfere with pedal operation.

∙ Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure

they are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular clean-

ing and replaced if they become exces-

sively worn.

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-

sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of

the floor mat positioning hooks for each

seating position varies depending on the

vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided

with the mat and the following:

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the

shift lever in P (Park) position (Continu-

ously Variable Transmission models) or

the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position

(manual transmission models) and

with the parking break fully applied, po-

sition the floor mat in the floorwell so

that the floor mat grommet holes are

aligned with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the

hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is

properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-

fere with pedal operation. With the igni-

tion still in the OFF position, the shift

lever in the P (Park) position (Continu-

ously Variable Transmission models) or

the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position

(manual transmission models) and

with the parking break applied, fully ap-

ply and release all pedals. The floor mat

must not interfere with pedal opera-

tion or prevent the pedal from return-

ing to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for details about installing the floor

mats in your vehicle.

7-6 Appearance and care

The illustration shows the location of the

floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-

pletely in the shade before using them. For

additional information, refer to “Seat belt

maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these materials may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

∙ The accumulation of moisture-

retaining dirt and debris in body panel

sections, cavities, and other areas.

∙ Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can accelerate

corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry

completely inside the vehicle and should

be removed for drying to avoid floor panel

corrosion.

Positioning hooks

LAI2034

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those ar-

eas where the temperatures stay above

freezing and where atmospheric pollution

exists and road salt is used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of

corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use accelerates the corrosion process.

Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-

tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to

keep the vehicle clean.

∙ Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula-

tion.

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with

water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or

broom.

∙ Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan

and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be

cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended that you consult

a NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................8-2

Engine compartment check locations...........8-3

Engine cooling system ..........................8-4

Checking engine coolant level ................8-5

Changing engine coolant.....................8-5

Engine oil........................................8-6

Checking engine oil level .....................8-6

Changing engine oil ..........................8-7

Changing engine oil filter .....................8-8

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid (if so equipped) .............................8-9

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ...........8-9

Brake fluid ...................................8-10

Clutch (if so equipped) fluid ..................8-10

Windshield-washer fluid ........................8-10

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir............8-10

Battery..........................................8-11

Jump starting ...............................8-13

Variable voltage control system (if so

equipped) ......................................8-13

Drive belt .......................................8-14

Spark plugs ....................................8-14

Replacing spark plugs .......................8-14

Air cleaner......................................8-15

Windshield wiper blades ........................8-16

Cleaning ....................................8-16

Replacing ...................................8-16

Brakes..........................................8-17

Fuses...........................................8-18

Engine compartment .......................8-18

Passenger compartment....................8-19

Battery replacement ...........................8-20

Key fob (if so equipped) ......................8-21

Lights ..........................................8-22

Headlights...................................8-22

Fog lights (if so equipped) ...................8-23

Exterior and interior lights ...................8-24

Wheels and tires................................8-28

Tire pressure ................................8-28

Tire labeling .................................8-31

Types of tires ................................8-34

Tire chains ..................................8-35

Changing wheels and tires ..................8-36

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always take

care to prevent serious accidental injury to

yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-

lowing are general precautions which

should be closely observed.

WARNING

∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. For manual trans-

mission models, move the shift lever

to N (Neutral). For CVT models, move

the shift lever to P (Park).

∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position when perform-

ing any parts replacement or repairs.

∙ If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans,

belts and any other moving parts.

∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jew-

elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-

fore working on your vehicle.

∙ Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

∙ If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-

gine models are under high pressure

even when the engine is off, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for service of the fuel filter or

fuel lines.

∙

Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come on

at any time without warning, even if the

ignition key is in the OFF position and the

engine is not running. To avoid injury, al-

ways disconnect the negative battery

cable before working near the fan.

CAUTION

∙ Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

∙

Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

∙ Never leave the engine or the trans-

mission related component harness

connector disconnected while the ig-

nition switch is in the ON position.

∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-

tery or any transistorized component

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-

tions regarding only those items which are

relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also

available. For additional information, refer

to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties or excessive emissions, and

could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, it is recommended

that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

HR16DE engine

1. Drive belt location

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Air cleaner

4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)

fluid reservoir

5. Fusible link

6. Battery

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI3055

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to

provide year-round antifreeze and coolant

protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-

tional engine cooling system additives are

not necessary.

WARNING

∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional informa-

tion on precautions, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a Genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

∙ Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Additives

may clog the cooling system and

cause damage to the engine, trans-

mission and/or cooling system.

∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-

diluted to provide antifreeze protec-

tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional

freeze protection is needed due to

weather where you operate your ve-

hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-

trate following the directions on the

container. If an equivalent coolant

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-

low the coolant manufacturer’s in-

structions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The

use of other types of coolant solu-

tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent may damage the engine

cooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),

including Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water will reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer

to the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir

when the engine is cold. If the coolant

level is below the MIN level 䊊

B, add coolant

to the MAX level 䊊

A. If the reservoir is empty,

check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-

cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX

level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing

any other type of coolant or the use of

non-distilled water will reduce the life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-

ditional information, refer to the "Mainte-

nance and schedules" section of this

manual.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, it is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information on the location

of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-

gine compartment check locations” in this

section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine

coolant. The service procedure can be

found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine over-

heating.

WARNING

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the

engine is hot.

∙ Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burns could

be caused by high pressure fluid es-

caping from the radiator.

∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-

erly. Check your local regulations.

LDI2794

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back

into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check

the oil level. It should be between the H

(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the

normal operating oil level range. If the

oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊

remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-

ommended oil through the opening.

Do not overfill 䊊

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some engine oil be-

tween oil maintenance intervals de-

pending on the severity of operating

conditions or depending on the property

of the engine oil used. More engine oil is

consumed by frequent acceleration/

deceleration especially when the engine

rpm is high. Consumption is likely to be

higher when the engine is new. If the rate

of oil consumption, after driving for

3,000 miles (5,000 km), is more than

0.5 liter per 600 miles (1,000 km), consult

a NISSAN dealer

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the en-

gine, and such damage is not covered

by warranty.

LDI3091 LDI2795

ENGINE OIL

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature, then

turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug 䊊

5. Remove the drain plug 䊊

Bwith a

wrench by turning it counterclockwise

and completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove

and replace it at this time. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

engine oil filter” in this section.

WARNING

∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin

cancer.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

∙ Be careful not to burn yourself. The

engine oil may be hot.

∙ Waste oil must be disposed of

properly.

∙ Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug 䊊

and a new washer. Securely tighten the

drain plug 䊊

Bwith a wrench. Do not use

excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil

through the oil filler opening, then install

the oil filler cap 䊊

Asecurely.

For additional information on drain

and refill capacity, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity depends

on the oil temperature and drain time.

Use these specifications for reference

only. Always use the dipstick to deter-

mine when the proper amount of oil is

in the engine.

LDI2788

Do-it-yourself 8-7

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage

around the drain plug 䊊

Band oil filter.

Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil

filter 䊊

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench by turning it counterclockwise.

Then remove the oil filter by turning it

by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-

gine oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface

with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket mate-

rial remaining on the sealing surface of

the engine. Failure to do so could lead to

engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil .

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-

tance is felt, then tighten an additional

2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

13 ft-lb (18 N·m)

LDI2789

8-8 Do-it-yourself

8. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-

gine oil by removing the oil filler cap 䊊

if necessary.

CAUTION

∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)

ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with

other fluids.

∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission

Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission

fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam-

age the CVT. Damage caused by the

use of fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may

also damage the CVT. Damage caused

by the use of fluids other than as rec-

ommended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid

is required, it is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

For additional information on brake fluid

specification, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake and

clutch (if so equipped) systems. The

use of improper fluids can damage

the brake and clutch system and af-

fect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

∙ Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous

and should be stored carefully in

marked containers out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid

is spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so

equipped)

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)

FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-9

BRAKE FLUID

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If

the fluid level is below the MIN line 䊊

B, or the

brake warning light comes on, add Genu-

ine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3

fluid up to the MAX line 䊊

A. If fluid must be

added frequently, the system should be

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The

brake fluid reservoir is shared with the

clutch hydraulic system for manual trans-

missions. If the level is below the MIN line 䊊

or the brake warning light comes on, add

Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent

DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line 䊊

A. If fluid

must be added frequently, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

servicing.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Add a washer solvent to the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir for better cleaning. In

the winter season, add a windshield-

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN

Windshield-Washer Fluid Concentrate

Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

LDI2790 LDI2790 LDI2791

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

8-10 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer solu-

tion. This may result in damage to the

paint.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the washer fluid concentrate and

water.

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of bak-

ing soda and water.

∙ Make certain the terminal connections

are clean and securely tightened.

∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for

30 days or longer, disconnect the nega-

tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent

discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,

an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-

drogen gas generated by the battery

is explosive. Explosive gases can

cause blindness or injury. Do not allow

battery fluid to contact your skin,

eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-

furic acid can cause blindness or in-

jury. After touching a battery or bat-

tery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If

the acid contacts your eyes, skin or

clothing, immediately flush with wa-

ter for at least 15 minutes and seek

medical attention.

∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the battery is low. Low battery fluid

can cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce bat-

tery life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

∙ When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

BATTERY

Do-it-yourself 8-11

∙ Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screw-

driver as shown.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only dis-

tilled water to bring the level up to the

bottom of the filler opening. Do not

overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

WDI0528

WDI0529

8-12 Do-it-yourself

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or

under severe conditions require frequent

checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump

starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual. If the engine does not

start by jump starting, the battery may

have to be replaced. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

CAUTION

∙ Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable

voltage control system. This system mea-

sures the amount of electrical discharge

from the battery and controls voltage gen-

erated by the generator.

The current sensor 䊊

Ais located near the

battery along the negative battery cable. If

you add electrical accessories to your ve-

hicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable

body ground such as the frame or engine

block area.

LDI2250

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Do-it-yourself 8-13

1. Water pump pulley

2. Generator pulley

3. Manual tensioner pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor pulley

5. Crankshaft pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF or LOCK position before servic-

ing drive belt. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-

usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is

in poor condition, have it replaced or

adjusted. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for

condition.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-

tipped 䊊

Aspark plugs as frequently as con-

ventional type spark plugs because they

last much longer. Follow the maintenance

log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-

ules" section of this manual. Do not service

platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or

regapping.

∙Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

LDI2399 SDI1895

DRIVE BELT SPARK PLUGS

8-14 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch

are off and that the parking brake is

engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

∙ Operating the engine with the air

cleaner filter off can cause you or oth-

ers to be burned. The air cleaner filter

not only cleans the intake air, it also

stops the flame if the engine back-

fires. If the air cleaner is not installed

and the engine backfires,you could be

burned. Never drive with the air

cleaner filter off. Be cautious working

on the engine when the air cleaner is

off.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with

the air cleaner removed. Doing so

could result in serious injury.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner,

release the retaining clips 䊊

A, then release

the holders at the back of the unit. Pull the

unit upward 䊊

The viscous paper type filter element (if so

equipped) should not be cleaned and re-

used. The dry paper type filter element (if so

equipped) may be cleaned and reused. Re-

place the air filter according to the mainte-

nance log shown in a separate mainte-

nance booklet.

When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside

of the air cleaner housing and the cover

with a damp cloth.

LDI2708

AIR CLEANER

Do-it-yourself 8-15

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using

the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other mate-

rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer fluid or a mild detergent.Your wind-

shield is clean if beads do not form when

rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer fluid or a mild deter-

gent. Then rinse the blades with clear wa-

ter. If your windshield is still not clear after

cleaning the blades and using the wiper,

install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-

shield.

2. Push and hold the release tab 䊊

A, and

then move the wiper blade down 䊊

the wiper arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the

wiper arm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

∙ After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when

the hood is opened.

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arms may be

damaged from wind pressure.

LDI2725

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-16 Do-it-yourself

Be careful not to let anything get into the

washer nozzle 䊊

D. This may cause clogging

or improper windshield–washer operation.

If something gets into the nozzle, remove it

with a needle or small pin 䊊

If the brakes do not operate properly, have

the brakes checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front disc-type brakes self-adjust ev-

ery time the brake pedal is applied.The rear

drum-type brakes self-adjust every time

the parking brake is applied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brakes pedal height does not return to

normal. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have

audible wear indicators. When a brake pad

requires replacement, a high pitched

scraping or screeching sound will be heard

when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will

be heard whether or not the brake pedal is

depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

noise may be heard. Occasional brake

noise during light to moderate stops is nor-

mal and does not affect the function or

performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information re-

garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-

propriate maintenance schedule informa-

tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

LDI2710

BRAKES

Do-it-yourself 8-17

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

Fuses are used in the passenger compart-

ment. Spare fuses are provided and can be

found in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is

installed in the fuse box securely.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate and the fuses are in good condition,

check the fusible links 䊊

Ain the holder. If

any of the fusible links are melted, replace

only with Genuine NISSAN parts.

For checking and replacing the fusible links,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

LDI2385 LDI3023

FUSES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The fuse box is located on the driver’s

side of the instrument panel.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are OFF.

2. Remove the fuse box cover 䊊

Awith a

suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid dam-

aging the trim.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be re-

placed.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

䊊

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

C, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse 䊊

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.

If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

LDI2712 LDI2713

Do-it-yourself 8-19

Extended storage switch

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, remove the extended storage switch

and check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used for

long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-

tended storage switch is broken it is not

necessary to replace it. Replace only the

open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

How to replace the extended storage

switch:

1. To remove the extended storage

switch, be sure the ignition switch is in

the OFF or LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the

OFF position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊

Aand 䊊

Bfound

on each side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out

from the fuse box 䊊

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal-

low the battery or removed parts.

LDI2747

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-20 Do-it-yourself

KEY FOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the key fob as fol-

lows:

1. Remove the screw 䊊

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of

the corner 䊊

Band twist it to separate

the upper part from the lower part. Use

a cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

∙ Make sure that the + side faces the

bottom of the case 䊊

Recommended battery: CR1620 or equiva-

lent.

4. Close the lid and install the screw se-

curely.

5. Operate the buttons to check its op-

eration.

If you need assistance for replacement, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 5.

∙An improperly disposed battery can

hurt the environment. Always con-

firm local regulations for battery dis-

posal.

∙The key fob is water-resistant; how-

ever, if it does get wet, immediately

wipe completely dry.

∙The operational range of the key fob

extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)

from the vehicle. This range may vary

with conditions.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

SDI2134A

Do-it-yourself 8-21

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

HEADLIGHTS

For additional information on headlight

bulb replacement, refer to the instructions

outlined in this section.

Replacing the halogen headlight

bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type

which uses a replaceable headlight (halo-

gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside

JVM0002X

LIGHTS

8-22 Do-it-yourself

the engine compartment without remov-

ing the headlight assembly.

CAUTION

∙ High-pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the bulb. The bulb may break if

the glass envelope is scratched or the

bulb is dropped.

∙ Aiming should not be necessary after

replacing the H4 bulb. When aiming

adjustment is necessary, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a

long period of time. Dust, moisture,

smoke, etc. entering the headlight

body may affect bulb performance.

Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly just before a replacement

bulb is installed.

∙ Only touch the base when handling

the bulb. Never touch the glass enve-

lope. Touching the glass could signifi-

cantly affect bulb life and/or head-

light performance.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector 䊊

from the rear end of the bulb.

3. Pull off the rubber cap 䊊

4. Push and turn the retaining pin 䊊

Cto

loosen it.

5. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not

shake or rotate the bulb when remov-

ing it.

6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order

of removal.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens

of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car

wash. A temperature difference between

the inside and the outside of the lens

causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If

large drops of water collect inside the lens,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

For additional information on fog light bulb

replacement, refer to the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Replacing the fog light bulb

If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the

chart.

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog

light for a long period of time as dust,

moisture and smoke may enter the

fog light body and affect the perfor-

mance of the fog light.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly

High/Low (Halogen) 60/55 HB2

Turn/Position 28/8 3457A

Side marker 5 W5W

Fog light (if so equipped) 55 H11

Room light 8 —

Map light (if so equipped) 5 W5W

Trunk compartment light 3.4 158

High-mounted stop light*

Inside (if so equipped) 16 W16W

Spoiler (if so equipped) — —

Rear combination light*

Turn signal light 21 PY21W

Stop/Tail 21/5 P21/5W

Backup (reversing) 21 P21W

License plate light* 5 W5W

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts informa-

tion.

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

8-24 Do-it-yourself

1. Map light (if so equipped)

2. Room light

3. Headlight assembly

4. Fog light (if so equipped)

5. High-mounted stop light (spoiler)

(if so equipped)

6. License plate light

7. Trunk light

8. High-mounted stop light (inside)

(if so equipped)

9. Rear combination light

LDI3124

Do-it-yourself 8-25

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the

lens, lamp and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth to protect the housing.

SDI1805

Map light (if so equipped)

LDI2044

Trunk light

LDI2135

8-26 Do-it-yourself

To change the stop/tail, turn signal or

backup (reversing) light bulbs, perform the

following:

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Remove the two clips 䊊

Aand carefully

pull the carpet back.

3. Remove the two nuts 䊊

Band the rear

combination light from the vehicle.

License plate light

JVC0014X

Rear combination light

LDI2807

Do-it-yourself 8-27

4. Disconnect the electrical connector 䊊

from the rear combination light.

5. Remove four screws 䊊

Dand the hous-

ing from the rear combination light.

6. Replace the necessary bulbs.

Follow the instruction in reverse order to

install the rear combination light and car-

pet.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment.

Those who use a pacemaker

should contact the electric medi-

cal equipment manufacturer for

the possible influences before

use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

It monitors tire pressure of all tires

except the spare. When the low tire

pressure warning light is lit and the

“CHECK TIRE PRES” warning (if so

equipped) is displayed in the odom-

eter, one or more of your tires is sig-

nificantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system

may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in

the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including

the spare) often and always prior to

long distance trips. The recom-

mended tire pressure specifications

are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label or the Tire and

Loading Information label under the

“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire

and Loading Information label is af-

fixed to the driver side center pillar.

LDI2808

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-28 Do-it-yourself

Tire pressures should be checked

regularly because:

∙ Most tires naturally lose air over

time.

∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob-

jects or if the vehicle strikes a

curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be

checked when the tires are cold. The

tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including

under inflation, may adversely af-

fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an

accident.

∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight

capacity is indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

Do not load your vehicle beyond

this capacity. Overloading your

vehicle may result in reduced

tire life, unsafe operating condi-

tions due to premature tire fail-

ure, or unfavorable handling

characteristics and could also

lead to a serious accident. Load-

ing beyond the specified capac-

ity may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

∙ Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Tire and Loading Information

label

䊊

1Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can

be seated in the vehicle.

䊊

2Vehicle load limit: For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle

loading information” in the

“Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

䊊

3Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the

tires to this pressure when the

tires are cold. Tires are consid-

ered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours,

or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

at moderate speeds. The rec-

ommended cold tire inflation is

set by the manufacturer to pro-

vide the best balance of tire

wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-

ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-

cle’s GVWR.

䊊

5Original tire size: The size of the

tires originally installed on the

vehicle at the factory.

䊊

6Spare tire size.

LDI2007

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press

too hard or force the valve stem

sideways, or air will escape. If the

hissing sound of air escaping from

the tire is heard while checking the

pressure, reposition the gauge to

eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare to the

specification shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If

too much air is added, press the

core of the valve stem briefly

with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the

pressure and add or release air

as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-

tion Pressure

Front Original

Tire:

P185/65R15

230 kPa, 33 PSI

Rear Original

Tire:

P185/65R15

230 kPa, 33 PSI

Spare Tire:

T125/70D15 420 kPa, 60 PSI

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufac-

turers to place standardized infor-

mation on the sidewall of all tires.

This information identifies and de-

scribes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides the

tire identification number (TIN) for

safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

LDI0393

Example

WDI0394

Do-it-yourself 8-31

䊊

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15

95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles

(not all tires have this informa-

tion).

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in milli-

meters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This

number, known as the aspect

ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter

in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):

This number is the tire’s load in-

dex. It is a measurement of how

much weight each tire can sup-

port. You may not find this infor-

mation on all tires because it is

not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should

not drive the vehicle faster than

the tire speed rating.

Example

WDI0395

8-32 Do-it-yourself

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number)

for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX

XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-

partment Of Transportation”.

The symbol can be placed

above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.

For example, the numbers 3103

means the 31st week of 2003. If

these numbers are missing then

look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester and others.

䊊

4Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire.Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maxi-

mum load in kilograms and pounds

that can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle, al-

ways use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires

an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

Example

LDI2786

Do-it-yourself 8-33

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire

has radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that

are defined throughout this section,

Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the

sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model

name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on

the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)

the outward facing sidewall of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-

ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

∙ When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information

about tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

∙ Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the low tire

pressure warning system.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels. Failure to

do so may result in a circumference

difference between tires on the front

and rear axles which can cause the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

to malfunction resulting in personal

injury or death, excessive tire wear

and may damage the transmission

and differential gears.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some

models to provide good performance all

year, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.

Snow tires have better snow traction than

All Season tires and may be more appropri-

ate in some areas.

8-34 Do-it-yourself

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire traction

rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy

or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the

use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all

four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load rat-

ing to the original equipment tires. If you do

not, it can adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-

ings than factory equipped tires and may

not match the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum speed

rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-

ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit

their use. Check local, state and provincial

laws before installing studded tires. Skid

and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer

than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-

cording to location. Check the local laws

before installing tire chains. When installing

tire chains, make sure they are the proper

size for the tires on your vehicle and are

installed according to the chain manufac-

turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”

chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-

hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-

ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains

are designed to meet the minimum clear-

ances between the tire and the closest ve-

hicle suspension or body component re-

quired to accommodate the use of a

winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are de-

termined using the factory equipped tires.

Other types may damage your vehicle. Use

chain tensioners when recommended by

the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a

tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. If possible,

avoid fully loading your vehicle when using

tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced

speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be

damaged and/or vehicle handling and

performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving

with chains in such conditions can cause

damage to the various mechanisms of the

vehicle due to some overstress.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the

tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire re-

placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”

in the “In case of emergency” section

of this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times.

It is recommended that wheel nuts

be tightened to specification at

each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

∙ After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

∙ Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

∙ Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

WDI0258 WDI0259

8-36 Do-it-yourself

∙ The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

∙ Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious per-

sonal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

tread design, speed rating and load carry-

ing capacity as originally equipped. Rec-

ommended types and sizes are shown in

“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tires

of different brands, construction

(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread

patterns can adversely affect the ride,

braking, handling, VDC system,

ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-

ance, tire chain clearance, speedom-

eter calibration, headlight aim and

bumper height. Some of these effects

may lead to accidents and could re-

sult in serious personal injury.

∙ If your vehicle was originally

equipped with four tires that were the

same size and you are only replacing

two of the four tires, install the new

tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires

on the front axle may cause loss of

vehicle control in some driving condi-

tions and cause an accident and per-

sonal injury.

∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear, de-

grade vehicle handling characteris-

tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-

terference with the brake discs. Such

interference can lead to decreased

braking efficiency and/or early brake

pad/shoe wear. For additional infor-

mation on wheel-off set dimensions,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately one minute. The light will

remain on after one minute. Have

your tires replaced and/or TPMS sys-

tem reset as soon as possible. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if

it is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. Con-

tact a NISSAN dealer for ID

registration.

∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by NISSAN. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve

may be clogged up with dirt and

cause a malfunction or loss of

pressure.

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could

have structural damage and could fail

without warning.

∙ The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with

tires of the same size, brand, construction

and tread pattern. The tire pressure and

wheel alignment should also be checked

and corrected as necessary. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle

handling and tire life. Even with regular use,

wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,

they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

∙For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside

of the vehicle is washed.

∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents

or corrosion. Such damage may cause

loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire

bead.

∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in

areas where it is used during winter.

8-38 Do-it-yourself

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire)

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS

such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not

function.

Observe the following precautions if the

TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be

used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be

damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING

∙ The spare tire should be used for

emergency use only. It should be re-

placed with the standard tire at the

first opportunity to avoid possible tire

or differential damage.

∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving.

∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of

the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).

∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle

at speeds faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the

rear wheels and the original tire used

on the front wheels (drive wheels).

∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster

rate than the standard tire. Replace

the spare tire as soon as the tread

wear indicators appear.

∙ Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause

damage to the vehicle.

∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original

tire, ground clearance is reduced. To

avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive

the vehicle through an automatic car

wash since it may get caught.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

MEMO

8-40 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements......................9-2

General maintenance ........................9-2

Scheduled maintenance .....................9-2

Where to go for service .......................9-2

General maintenance ...........................9-2

Explanation of general maintenance

items.........................................9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5

Emission control system maintenance:.......9-5

Chassis and body maintenance:..............9-6

Maintenance schedules .........................9-7

Additional maintenance items for

severe operating conditions ..................9-7

Standard maintenance..........................9-8

Emission control system maintenance .......9-8

Chassis & body maintenance................9-10

Maintenance under severe operating

conditions......................................9-12

Severe driving conditions ....................9-12

Maintenance log ...............................9-13

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your vehicle

good mechanical condition, as well as its

emissions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure

that the scheduled maintenance, as well as

general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

proper maintenance. You are a vital link in

the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal

day-to-day operation. They are essential

for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-

sponsibility to perform these procedures

regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and only

a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you

prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this sec-

tion are required to be serviced at regular

intervals. However under severe driving

conditions, additional or more frequent

maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and serviced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up-to-date with the

latest service information through techni-

cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-

grams. They are completely qualified to

work on NISSAN vehicles before work be-

gins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-

er’s service department can perform the

service needed to meet the maintenance

requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of

the vehicle, general maintenance should

be performed regularly as prescribed in

this section. If you detect any unusual

sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to

check for the cause or have it checked

promptly. In addition, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think

that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-

nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the

doors and engine hood operate properly.

Also ensure that all latches lock securely.

Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers

and links if necessary. Make sure that the

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

secondary latch keeps the hood from

opening when the primary latch is re-

leased.

When driving in areas using road salt or

other corrosive materials, check lubrica-

tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other

lights are all operating properly and in-

stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-

ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are

missing, and check for any loose wheel

nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-

ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all

tires, including the spare, to the pressure

specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts

or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the

TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core

and cap when the tires are replaced due to

wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-

hicle should pull to either side while driving

on a straight and level road, or if you detect

uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may

be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-

ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-

way speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at least

every six months for cracks or other dam-

age. Have a damaged windshield repaired

by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for

cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing scheduled maintenance,

cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the

pedal does not catch or require uneven

effort. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer

to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-

diately. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the

floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism (if so

equipped): On a fairly steep hill check that

the vehicle is held securely with the shift

lever in the P (Park) position without apply-

ing any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only

the parking brake applied. If the parking

brake needs adjustment, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seats: Check seat position controls such

as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to

ensure they operate smoothly and all

latches lock securely in every position.

Check that the head restraints/headrests

move up and down smoothly and the locks

(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,

adjusters and retractors) operate properly

and smoothly, and are installed securely.

Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,

wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering system, such as excessive free

play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly

and in sufficient quantity when operating

the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check

that the wipers and washer operate prop-

erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically (for example, each

time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.

The fluid should be at the bottom of the

filler opening. Vehicles operated in high

temperatures or under severe conditions

require frequent checks of the battery fluid

level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid

level*: Make sure that the brake and clutch

fluid levels are between the MIN and MAX

lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive

belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level surface with

the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes

for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no

loose supports, cracks or holes. If the

sound of the exhaust seems unusual or

there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-

ately have the exhaust system inspected. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-

oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

vehicle has been parked for a while. Water

dripping from the air conditioner after use

is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if

fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause

and have it corrected immediately.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-

mation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control dust. It

is very important to remove these sub-

stances from the underbody, otherwise

rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and exhaust system. At the end of

winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, in those

areas where mud and dirt may have accu-

mulated. For additional information, refer

to the “Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that

there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to

give you a better understanding of the

scheduled maintenance items that should

be regularly checked or replaced. The

maintenance schedule indicates at which

mileage/time intervals each item requires

service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance,

your vehicle requires that some items be

checked during normal day-to-day opera-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“General maintenance” in this section.

Items marked with “*” are recommended

by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.

You are not required to perform mainte-

nance on these items in order to maintain

the warranties which come with your

NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-

tervals are required.

When applicable, additional information

can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of

non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-

ing systems and strongly advises

against performing these services on a

NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-

ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-

proved chemicals or solvents, the use of

which has not been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer in-

formation” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE:

Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for

wear, fraying or cracking and for proper

tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-

vals. When driving for prolonged periods in

dusty conditions, check/replace the filter

more frequently.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the

specified interval. When adding or replac-

ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For

additional information on the proper mix-

ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling

system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant

or the use of non-distilled water may re-

duce the recommended service interval

of the coolant.

Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil

and oil filter at the specified intervals. For

recommended oil grade and viscosity refer

to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping

and connections for leaks, looseness, or

deterioration. Tighten connections or re-

place parts as necessary.

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.

Install new plugs of the type as originally

equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY

MAINTENANCE:

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for

proper installation. Check for chafing,

cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.

Replace any deteriorated or damaged

parts immediately.

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:

Check for wear, deterioration and fluid

leaks. Replace any deteriorated or dam-

aged parts immediately.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-

haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,

cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-

pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check

for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil

or grease. Under severe driving conditions,

inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in-

structions under “General maintenance” in

this section. When rotating tires, check for

damage and uneven wear. Replace if nec-

essary.

Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for

signs of leakage at specified intervals.

If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top

carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads,

replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles

(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect

the fluid deterioration data using a CON-

SULT. If the deterioration data is more than

210000, replace the CVT fluid.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-

cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-

nance schedules that may be used, de-

pending upon the conditions in which you

usually drive. These schedules contain

both distance and time intervals, up to

120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For

most people, the odometer reading will in-

dicate when service is needed. However, if

you drive very little, your vehicle should be

serviced at the regular time intervals

shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING

CONDITIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions should be per-

formed on vehicles that are driven under

especially demanding conditions. Addi-

tional maintenance items should be per-

formed if you primarily operate your vehicle

under the following conditions:

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distances, such as police,

taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Using a car-top carrier.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both

standard and severe maintenance items

should be performed at every interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

The following tables show the standard

maintenance schedule. Depending upon

weather and atmospheric conditions,

varying road surfaces, individual driving

habits and vehicle usage, additional or

more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired. After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

interval.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Spark plugs Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (6)

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Spark plugs Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (6)

NOTE:

(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if

found damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) Maintenance-free item.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles

(120,000 km) or 60 months.

(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%

demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy

of the factory fill coolant.

(6) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

*: Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not

perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items

and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brake lines & cables I I I I I I

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings夝II I II I

Brake fluid夝RRR

Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (1) I I I I I I

CVT fluid See NOTE (2) I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Drive shaft boots夝II I II I

Exhaust system夝III

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brakelinesandcables IIIIII

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings夝IIIIII

Brake fluid夝RRR

Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (1) I IIIII

CVTfluid SeeNOTE(2)IIIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Drive shaft boots夝IIIIII

Exhaust system夝III

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.

(1) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or

24 months.

(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at

NISSAN dealers every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change

(not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km).

(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under

severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distance, such as police, taxi

or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Drive shaft boots Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE

OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or

6 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or

12 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or

18 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or

24 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or

30 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or

36 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or

42 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or

48 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or

54 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or

60 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or

66 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or

72 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or

78 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or

84 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or

90 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or

96 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or

102 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or

108 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or

114 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or

120 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or

126 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or

132 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or

138 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or

144 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities ......................................10-2

Fuel recommendation.......................10-4

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendations ..........................10-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations ....................... 10-7

Specifications ..................................10-8

Engine ......................................10-8

Wheels and tires.............................10-9

Dimensions and weights ....................10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country........................................10-10

Vehicle identification ..........................10-10

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

plate .......................................10-10

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ...........................10-10

Engine serial number........................10-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...................10-11

Emission control information label ..........10-11

Tire and Loading Information label .........10-12

Air conditioner specification label........... 10-12

Installing front license plate.................... 10-12

Vehicle loading information ................... 10-13

Terms ...................................... 10-13

Vehicle load capacity .......................10-14

Loading tips ................................10-16

Measurement of weights ...................10-16

Towing a trailer ................................ 10-17

Flat towing ................................. 10-17

Uniform tire quality grading.................... 10-17

Emission control system warranty.............10-18

Reporting safety defects ......................10-19

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

test............................................10-20

Event Data Recorders (EDR)....................10-20

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information ...................................10-21

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel 41 L 10-7/8 gal 9 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in

this section.

Engine oil*1

Drain and refill

1*: For additional

information, refer to “Engine

oil” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

With oil filter

change 3.5 L 3-3/4 qt 3-1/8 qt

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.

• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor

oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional

information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”

in this section.

• As an alternative to this recommended oil, SAE 10W-30 conven-

tional petroleum based oil may be used and meet all specifica-

tions and requirements necessary to maintain the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty

Without oil filter

change 3.2 L 3-3/8 qt 2-7/8 qt

Engine coolant

with reservoir

With manual trans-

mission 6.7 L 1-3/4 gal 1-1/2 gal

• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent

With continuously

variable transmis-

sion

7.2 L 1-7/8 gal 1-5/8 gal

Manual transmission gear oil (if so equipped) — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi

75W-85, or equivalent.

• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid HQ-Multi is not

available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a tem-

porary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual

Transmission Fluid HQ-Multi as soon as it is available.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid (if

so equipped)

For additional information, refer to the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or

equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.

Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid

NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids

other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid

Refill to the proper level according to the

instructions in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid, available in

mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer, or equivalent DOT 3.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-

frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R (KLHOO-PAGRO) or

equivalent

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-

frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 3.5 L 7/8 gal 3/4 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An-

tifreeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85.Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙

Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely af-

fect vehicle performance and vehicle

emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are

labeled to indicate MMT content, so you

may have to consult your gasoline re-

tailer for more details. Note that Fed-

eral and California laws prohibit the use

of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)

specifications where it is available. Many of

the automobile manufacturers developed

this specification to improve emission con-

trol system and vehicle performance. Ask

your service station manager if the gaso-

line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-

formulated gasolines. These gasolines are

specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-

sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards

cleaner air and suggests that you use re-

formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-

ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl

Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with

or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

fuels of which the oxygenate content and

the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-

not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask

your service station manager.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,

please take the following precautions as

the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle

performance problems and/or fuel system

damage.

∙The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

∙If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 15% oxygenate.

∙If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable

amount of appropriate cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-

erly formulated with appropriate co-

solvents and corrosion inhibitors,

such methanol blends may cause fuel

system damage and/or vehicle per-

formance problems. At this time, suf-

ficient data is not available to ensure

that all methanol blends are suitable

for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine

stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-

rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,

immediately change to a non-oxygenate

fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-

fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%

fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.

E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed

to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-

tions require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percent-

age for that region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel

Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-

hicle. U.S. government regulations require

fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and black

label with the common abbreviation or the

appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-

ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the

use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may

adversely affect vehicle performance, in-

cluding the emissions control system. Note

that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to

consult your gasoline retailer for more de-

tails.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-

ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane

booster, intake valve deposit removers,

etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of

these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active sol-

vents or similar ingredients that can be

harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can

cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”

(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping

noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine

damage. If you detect a persistent heavy

Technical and consumer information 10-5

spark knock even when using gasoline

of the stated octane rating, or if you hear

steady spark knock while holding a

steady speed on level roads, it is recom-

mended that you have a NISSAN dealer

correct the condition. Failure to correct

the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for

which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in

spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,

which may cause excessive fuel consump-

tion or engine damage. If any of the above

symptoms are encountered, have your ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills.This is not

a cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in this section. NISSAN recommends the

use of an energy conserving oil in order to

improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the

American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standard-

ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)

certification and SAE viscosity standard.

These oils have the API certification mark

on the front of the container. Oils which do

not have the specified quality label should

not be used as they could cause engine

damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used

and maintenance intervals are followed.

LTI2051

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Oil which may contain foreign matter or

has been previously used should not be

used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness

changes with temperature. Because of

this, it is important to select the engine oil

viscosity based on the temperatures at

which the vehicle will be operated before

the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-

ity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or

its equivalent for the reason described in

“Change intervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for

your engine are based on the use of the

specified quality oils and filters. Using en-

gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-

fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil

and filter change intervals could reduce

engine life. Damage to the engine caused

by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is

not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality

engine oil when it was built. You do not have

to change the oil before the first recom-

mended change interval. Oil and filter

change intervals depend upon how you

use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions

may require more frequent oil and filter

changes:

∙ repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures

∙ driving in dusty conditions

∙ extensive idling

∙ stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the

“Maintenance and schedules” section of

this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the

refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and

NISSAN A/C system oil Type R (KLH00-

PAGRO) or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil

will cause severe damage to the air con-

ditioning system and will require the re-

placement of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does

not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain

government regulations require the recov-

ery and recycling of any refrigerant during

automotive air conditioner system service. A

NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians

and equipment needed to recover and re-

cycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer when servicing your air conditioner

system.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

ENGINE

Model HR16DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.071 x 3.291 (78.0 x 83.6)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 97.51 (1,598)

Firing order 1–3–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

M/T in N (Neutral) position

CVT in N (Neutral) position

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug PLZKAR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

10-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum and steel 15 x 5.5J 1.57 (40)

Tire size P185/65R15

Spare tire T125/70D15

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Body Type Sedan

Unit: in (mm)

Overall length 175.4 (4,455)

Overall width 66.7 (1,695)

Overall height 59.6 (1,514)

Track width

Front 58.3 (1,480)

Rear 58.5 (1,485)

Wheelbase 102.4 (2,600)

Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) For additional information,

refer to the “F.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label” on the center pillar

between the driver’s side

front and rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lbs. (kg)

Rear lbs. (kg)

Technical and consumer information 10-9

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first

find out if the fuel available is suitable for

your vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too

low may cause engine damage. All gaso-

line vehicles must be operated with un-

leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking

your vehicle to areas where appropriate

fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of

your vehicle to another country, state,

province or district, it may be necessary

to modify the vehicle to meet local laws

and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards

vary according to the country, state, prov-

ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-

tions may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, trans-

portation and registration are the re-

sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-

sponsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

plate is attached as shown. This number is

the identification for your vehicle and is

used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is lo-

cated as shown.

TI1050M LTI2274

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

10-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

(F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as

shown. This label contains valuable vehicle

information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight

Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Re-

view it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached to the underside of the hood as

shown.

HR16DE engine

LTI2020 STI0349 WTI0198

Technical and consumer information 10-11

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label. The label is

located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is af-

fixed as shown.

Use the following steps to mount the front

license plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm

that the following parts are enclosed in the

plastic bag:

∙ License plate bracket

LTI0197 WTI0167

LTI2316

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

10-12 Technical and consumer information

∙ License plate bracket screws x 2

∙ Screw grommets x 2

1. Hold the license plate bracket 䊊

1and

make a shallow hole in the bumper fas-

cia using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid

damaging the area behind the fascia,

apply only light pressure to the drill.

2. Insert the grommets 䊊

2into the holes

in the bumper fascia.

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver

into the grommet hole to turn the

threaded part of the grommet 90°.

4. Mount the license plate bracket using

the two longer screws 䊊

WARNING

∙ It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself

with the following terms before

loading your vehicle:

∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of

your vehicle) - vehicle weight in-

cluding: standard and optional

equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly.

This weight does not include

passengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight

of passengers and cargo.

∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other op-

tional equipment. This informa-

tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit

specified for the front or rear axle.

This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total

weight rating of the vehicle, pas-

sengers, cargo, and trailer.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-13

∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load

limit, Total load capacity - maxi-

mum total weight limit specified

of the load (passengers and

cargo) for the vehicle. This is the

maximum combined weight of

occupants and cargo that can be

loaded into the vehicle. If the ve-

hicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load.

This information is located on the

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

∙ Cargo capacity - permissible

weight of cargo, the subtracted

weight of occupants from the

load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo” on

the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel. Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Ca-

pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

To get “the combined weight of oc-

cupants and cargo”, add the weight

of all occupants, then add the total

luggage weight. Examples are

shown in the following illustration.

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct

load limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the XXX amount equals

1,400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lbs. passengers in your ve-

hicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =

650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

Example

WTI0169

Technical and consumer information 10-15

Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in step 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

or the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Measure-

ment of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label” in this section.

LOADING TIPS

∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the F.M-

.V.S.S. certification label.

∙ Do not load the front and rear

axle to the GAWR. Doing so will

exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This

could result in loss of control

and cause personal injury.

∙

Overloading and improper load-

ing not only can shorten the life

of your vehicle and the tire, but

can also cause unsafe vehicle

handling and longer braking dis-

tances. This may cause a prema-

ture tire failure which could re-

sult in a serious accident and

personal injury. Failures caused

by overloading are not covered

by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent

weight shifts that could affect the

balance of your vehicle.When the ve-

hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and

weigh the front and the rear wheels

separately to determine axle loads.

Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight

Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle

loads should not exceed the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These

ratings are given on the vehicle cer-

tification label. If weight ratings are

exceeded, move or remove items to

bring all weights below the ratings.

10-16 Technical and consumer information

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is sometimes called flat towing.

This method is sometimes used when

towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve-

hicle with the front tires on the

ground. Doing so may cause serious

and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

∙ DO NOT tow any continuously variable

transmission vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground (flat towing).

Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal trans-

mission parts due to lack of transmis-

sion lubrication.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

Manual Transmission (if so

equipped)

∙ Always tow with the manual transmis-

sion in N (Neutral).

∙ After towing 500 miles (805 km), start

and idle the engine with the transmis-

sion in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Fail-

ure to idle the engine after every

500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause

damage to internal transmission parts.

Continuously Variable

Transmission (if so equipped)

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu-

ously variable transmission, an appropriate

vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the

towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow

the dolly manufacturer’s recommenda-

tions when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must

conform to federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-

ing based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 10-17

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to low-

est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-

sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include ac-

celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the high-

est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat, and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-

perature can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-

cessive temperature can lead to sudden

tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the mini-

mum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly in-

flated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-

lowing emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-

formation Booklet which comes with your

NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-

ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you

may obtain a replacement by writing to:

∙ Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-

formation Booklet which comes with your

NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-

ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you

may obtain a replacement by writing to:

∙ Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

10-18 Technical and consumer information

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-

fying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a re-

call and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or

write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contact-

ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

request that NISSAN conduct a recall

campaign. However, Transport

Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s

Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-

sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You

may also report safety defects online

at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)

or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)

Additional information concerning

motor vehicle safety may be obtained

from Transport Canada’s Road Safety

Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371

or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety

(English speakers) or

www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety con-

cerns please contact our Consumer

Information Centre toll free at 1-800-

387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Technical and consumer information 10-19

Due to legal requirements in some states

and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may

be required to be in what is called the

“ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the

emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving

patterns. Usually, the ready condition can

be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-

hicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-

paired or the battery is disconnected, the

vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-

tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the

vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test

readiness condition. Place the ignition

switch in the ON position without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-

tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-

dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data

that will assist in understanding how a ve-

hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-

signed to record data related to vehicle dy-

namics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-

cord such data as:

∙ How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

∙ Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better un-

derstanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-

trivial crash situation occurs; no data are

recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g.

name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR

data with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash in-

vestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN

dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, that have the special equipment, can

read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be

accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

10-20 Technical and consumer information

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for

your vehicle. This manual is the same one

used by the factory-trained technicians

working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-

chased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this

model year and prior, please contact your

nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-

ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your

area, call the NISSAN Information Center at

1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-

resentative will assist you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-21

MEMO

10-22 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system) .....................1-42

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air

bagsystem)................1-51

Air bag warning labels ............1-59

Airbagwarninglight..........1-60, 2-18

Air bag warning light, supplemental . . .1-60,

2-18

Air cleaner housing filter ..........8-15

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ........4-12

Air conditioner service ..........4-16

Air conditioner specification label . .10-12

Air conditioner system refrigerant

and oil recommendations .......10-7

Air conditioner system refrigerant

recommendations ............10-7

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-8

Servicing air conditioner ........4-16

Air flow charts .................4-13

Anchor point locations ...........1-25

Antenna ....................4-48

Antifreeze ...................5-28

Anti-lock brake warning light........2-13

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......5-24

Audible reminders ..............2-20

Audio system .................4-16

AMradioreception............4-17

Bluetooth® audio .............4-45

Compact disc (CD)

player.............4-28,4-34,4-39

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-30

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-26

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-35

FMradioreception............4-16

iPod®Player................4-43

iPod® player operation .........4-43

Radio ....................4-16

Steering wheel audio control

switch....................4-47

USBinterface...............4-41

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port.....................4-41

Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . .2-32

Automatic door locks .............3-5

AUXjack.................4-29,4-31

Battery..................5-28,8-11

Charge warning light...........2-14

Battery replacement ............8-20

Keyfob................8-20,8-21

Before starting the engine ..........5-9

Belt(Seedrivebelt)..............8-14

Block heater

Engine ...................5-30

Bluetooth® audio ...............4-45

Bluetooth® hands-free phone

system..................4-49,4-64

Booster seats .................1-38

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....5-24

Brakefluid..................8-9

Brakelight(Seestoplight).......8-24

Brakesystem...............5-24

Brakewarninglight............2-13

Brakewearindicators.......2-20,8-17

Parking brake operation.........5-17

Self-adjustingbrakes ..........8-17

Brakeassist..................5-25

Brakefluid....................8-9

Brakes......................8-17

Brakesystem.................5-24

Break-in schedule ..............5-20

Brightness control

Instrument panel.............2-24

Bulb check/instrument panel .......2-13

Bulb replacement ..............8-24

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants....................10-2

Cargo

(See vehicle loading information).....10-13

Car phone or CB radio ...........4-48

CDcareandcleaning............4-46

CD player

(See audio system) .......4-28,4-34,4-39

Childrestraints........1-18, 1-18, 1-20, 1-23

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System..............1-23

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38

Top tether strap anchor point

locations...................1-25

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-6

Chimes, audible reminders .........2-20

Cleaningexteriorandinterior......7-2,7-4

Clock set/adjustment . . .4-27, 4-31, 4-33, 4-36

Clock setting (models without Navigation

System)..................4-27,4-38

Clutch

Clutchfluid.................8-10

Coldweatherdriving.............5-28

Compact disc (CD) player . . .4-28, 4-34, 4-39

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) .....................5-8,5-11

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid...................8-9

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ..........5-8,5-11

Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel).....4-47

Heater and air conditioner controls. . .4-8

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-5

Checking engine coolant level ......8-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Corrosionprotection..............7-7

Cruisecontrol..................5-18

Cupholders...................2-29

Curtain side-impact and rollover air

bag........................1-57

Defroster switch

Rearwindowdefrosterswitch.....2-22

Dimensions and weights...........10-9

Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-24

Door locks ..................3-3,3-4

Door open warning light ...........2-14

Drivebelt ....................8-14

Driving

Cold weather driving ...........5-28

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ..........5-8,5-11

Driving with manual

transmission..............5-9,5-15

Precautions when starting and

driving.....................5-2

Drivingthevehicle...............5-11

Economy - fuel .................5-21

Emission control information label . . . .10-11

Emission control system warranty . . . .10-18

Engine

Before starting the engine ........5-9

Blockheater................5-30

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-5

Changing engine oil ............8-7

Changing engine oil filter .........8-8

Checking engine coolant level ......8-5

Checking engine oil level .........8-6

Engine compartment check

locations...................8-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Engine cooling system ..........8-4

Engine oil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-6

Engine oil pressure warning light....2-14

Engine oil viscosity.............10-7

Engine serial number...........10-11

Engine specifications ...........10-8

Starting the engine ............5-10

Engine coolant temperature gauge ....2-9

EventDatarecorders............10-20

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......5-2

Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance

items .......................9-5

Extended storage switch ..........8-20

Flashers

(Seehazardwarningflasherswitch)....6-2

Flattire....................6-2,6-3

Floormatpositioningaid...........7-6

Fluid

Brakefluid..................8-9

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Clutchfluid.................8-10

11-2

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid...................8-9

Engine coolant ...............8-4

Engine oil ...................8-6

F.M.V.S.S. certification label..........10-11

Foglightswitch................2-25

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system). . . .1-51

Front-door pocket...............2-27

Frontseats....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Fuel economy ...............5-21

Fuel-filler cap ................3-13

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-13

Fuel-filler lid .................3-13

Fuel gauge ..................2-9

Fueloctanerating.............10-5

Fuel recommendation ..........10-4

Loose fuel cap warning ..........2-7

Fuelefficientdrivingtips...........5-20

Fuel-filler door .................3-13

Fuel gauge ....................2-9

Fuses .......................8-18

Fusiblelinks...................8-18

Gascap .....................3-13

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Fuel gauge ..................2-9

Odometer ..................2-6

Speedometer ................2-5

Tachometer .................2-8

Trip computer ...............2-10

Trip odometer .............2-5,2-6

General maintenance .............9-2

Glovebox....................2-29

Hands-free phone system,

Bluetooth®................4-49,4-64

Hazard warning flasher switch........6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch......2-22

Headlightcontrolswitch...........2-22

Headlights...................8-22

Headrestraints .................1-5

Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls. . .4-8

Heater operation..............4-10

Hood .......................3-10

Horn.......................2-25

Ignition switch ..................5-8

Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11

Increasing fuel economy ...........5-21

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders)....................2-18

Instrument brightness control .......2-24

Instrument panel .............0-6,2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-24

Interiorlight...............2-32,2-33

Interiortrunklidrelease ...........3-12

iPod®Player...................4-43

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-23

Jumpstarting...............6-8,8-13

Key.........................3-2

Key fob battery replacement .....8-20,8-21

Keyless entry

Without Intelligent Key system

(See remote keyless entry system)

. .3-6, 3-7

Labels

Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12

Emission control information label . .10-11

Engine serial number...........10-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label........10-11

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.....................10-10

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-59

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System................1-23

License plate

Installing the license plate .......10-12

Light

Airbagwarninglight........1-60, 2-18

11-3

Brakelight(Seestoplight)........8-24

Bulb check/instrument panel ......2-13

Bulb replacement .............8-24

Charge warning light ...........2-14

ExteriorandInteriorlights........8-24

Foglights..................8-23

Foglightswitch..............2-25

Headlight and turn signal switch....2-22

Headlightcontrolswitch.........2-22

Headlights.................8-22

Interiorlight.............2-32,2-33

Lightbulbs.................8-22

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-15

Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ..................2-18

Lights......................8-22

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ........3-6

Door locks ................3-3,3-4

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-13

Power door locks ..............3-5

Trunk lid lock opener lever ........3-12

Loose fuel cap warning ............2-7

Lowfuelwarninglight ............2-15

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-15

Luggage

(See vehicle loading information) .....10-13

Maintenance

General maintenance ...........9-2

Insidethevehicle..............9-3

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

Outsidethevehicle.............9-2

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-17

Under the hood and vehicle .......9-4

Maintenance log ................9-13

Maintenance requirements..........9-2

Maintenance schedules ............9-7

Maintenance under severe operation

conditions....................9-12

Malfunctionindicatorlight..........2-19

Manual front seat adjustment ........1-3

Manual windows................2-32

Meters and gauges ...............2-3

Instrument brightness control .....2-24

Mirror

Outsidemirrorcontrol..........3-18

Outsidemirrors............3-17,3-18

Rearview...................3-17

Vanitymirror................3-17

Mirrors......................3-17

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-5

Odometer ....................2-6

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine oil ............8-7

Changing engine oil filter .........8-8

Checking engine oil level .........8-6

Engine oil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-6

Engine oil viscosity.............10-7

One shot call...............4-53,4-67

Outsidemirrorcontrol............3-18

Outsidemirrors..............3-17, 3-18

Overheat

Ifyourvehicleoverheats.........6-10

Owner's manual order form ........10-21

Owner's manual/service manual order

information ..................10-21

Parking

Parking brake operation .........5-17

Parking/parkingonhills.........5-22

Parkingbrake..................5-17

Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free

system..................4-49,4-64

Power

Power door locks ..............3-5

Poweroutlet................2-26

Powerrearwindows............2-31

Power steering system..........5-23

Powerwindows..............2-30

Rearpowerwindows...........2-31

Poweroutlet..................2-26

Powersteering.................5-23

Precautions

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

Precautions on booster

seats............1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38

Precautionsonseatbeltusage.....1-10

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-42

11-4

Precautions when starting and

driving.....................5-2

Push starting ..................6-10

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ..........4-48

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-26

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-30

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-35

Steering wheel audio control

switch....................4-47

Readiness for inspection maintenance

(I/M)test....................10-20

Rearpowerwindows.............2-31

Rearseat.....................1-4

Rearviewmirror ................3-17

RearViewMonitor.............4-2,4-4

Rearwindowdefrosterswitch.......2-22

Recommended Fluids ............10-2

Recorders

EventData.................10-20

Refrigerant recommendation ........10-7

Registering a vehicle in another

country .....................10-10

Remote keyless entry system ......3-6,3-7

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-19

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ........3-6

Childseatbelts......1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38

Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-19

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment......1-3

Rear seat adjustment ...........1-4

Seatback pockets ...............2-28

Seat belt

Childsafety.................1-18

Infants and small children ........1-18

InjuredPerson................1-13

Largerchildren...............1-19

Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-10

Pregnant women..............1-13

Seat belt extenders ............1-17

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-17

Seatbelts................1-10, 7-7

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-16

Three-pointtypewithretractor.....1-13

Seat belt extenders ..............1-17

Seatbeltwarninglight .........1-13, 2-17

Seats

Adjustment ..................1-2

Frontseats..................1-2

Manual front seat adjustment ......1-3

Rearseat...................1-4

Self-adjustingbrakes.............8-17

Service manual order form .........10-21

Servicing air conditioner ...........4-16

Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) .....................5-12

Manual transmission ...........5-16

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-16

Side air bag system (See supplemental

side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag

systems).....................1-57

Spark plug replacement ...........8-14

Spark plugs ...................8-14

Specifications .................10-8

Speedometer ..................2-5

SRS warning label ...............1-59

Stability control ................5-26

Standard maintenance ............9-8

Starting

Before starting the engine ........5-9

Jumpstarting.............6-8,8-13

Precautions when starting and

driving .....................5-2

Push starting ................6-10

Starting the engine ............5-10

Starting the engine ..............5-10

Steering

Power steering system..........5-23

Tilting steering wheel ...........3-16

Steering wheel .................3-16

Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-47

Stoplight....................8-24

Storage.....................2-27

Storagetray ..................2-28

Sunvisors....................3-16

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-59

Supplemental air bag warning

light.....................1-60, 2-18

Supplemental front impact air bag

system......................1-51

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . .1-59

11-5

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-42

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .......1-42

Switch

Automatic power window switch . . .2-32

Foglightswitch..............2-25

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch....2-22

Headlightcontrolswitch.........2-22

Ignition switch ................5-8

Instrument brightness control .....2-24

Power door lock switch ..........3-5

Rearwindowdefrosterswitch.....2-22

Turn signal switch .............2-24

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch....................2-26

Tachometer ...................2-8

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Three-waycatalyst...............5-2

Tilting steering wheel .............3-16

Tire

Flattire..................6-2,6-3

Spare tire ...............6-4,8-39

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12

Tire chains .................8-35

Tire pressure ................8-28

Tirerotation................8-36

Types of tires ................8-34

Uniform tire quality grading.......10-17

Wheels and tires ..........8-28,10-9

Wheel/tire size ...............10-9

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-15

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). .5-3

Towing

2-wheel drive models ...........6-13

4-wheel drive models ...........6-12

Flattowing.................10-17

Towtrucktowing..............6-11

Trailertowing ...............10-17

Towingatrailer................10-17

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid......................8-9

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ..........5-8,5-11

Driving with manual

transmission..............5-9,5-15

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another

country).....................10-10

Trip computer .................2-10

Trip odometer ...............2-5,2-6

Trunk lid lock opener lever ..........3-12

Turn signal switch ...............2-24

Uniform tire quality grading.........10-17

USBinterface..................4-41

Audio file operation ............4-41

Vanitymirror..................3-17

Variable voltage control system ......8-13

Vehicle dimensions and weights ......10-9

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch......................2-26

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-26

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-26

Vehicle identification .............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) ...............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.......................10-10

Vehicle loading information ........10-13

Vehiclerecovery................6-14

Ventilators ....................4-8

Visors.......................3-16

Voice Prompt Interrupt ........4-52,4-67

Warning

Airbagwarninglight........1-60, 2-18

Anti-lock brake warning light ......2-13

Battery charge warning light ......2-14

Brakewarninglight............2-13

Door open warning light .........2-14

Engine oil pressure warning light....2-14

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Loosefuelcapwarning..........2-7

Lowfuelwarninglight ..........2-15

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-15

Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51

Seatbeltwarninglight .......1-13, 2-17

Supplemental air bag warning

light...................1-60, 2-18

11-6

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ..................2-18

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-59

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................2-18

Audible reminders .............2-18

Indicatorlights...............2-18

Warninglights...............2-18

Warninglights.................2-18

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................2-12

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9

Wheels and tires ............8-28,10-9

Wheel/tire size .................10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country .....................10-10

Windows.....................2-30

Locking passengers' windows .....2-31

Manual windows..............2-32

Powerrearwindows............2-31

Powerwindows..............2-30

Rearpowerwindows...........2-31

Windshield-washer fluid ...........8-10

Windshield wiper blades ...........8-16

Wiper

Wiper blades ................8-16

Wiper and washer switch ..........2-21

11-7

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85.Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is

recommended.

• If the above motor is not available, use an

equivalent motor oil that matches the

above grade and viscosity. For additional

information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter

recommendations” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this

manual.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

Refer to the Tire and Loading Information

label.

The label is typically located on the driver

side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For

additional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE

BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of

vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure

recommendations for the future reliability

and economy of your new vehicle. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Break-in

schedule” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual. Failure to follow these

recommendations may result in vehicle

damage or shortened engine life.

N17-D

Printing : September 2017

Publication No.:

Printed in U.S.A.

OM18EM 0N17U1

2018.5 VERSA SEDAN

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger

vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to

chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as

necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area

and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when

servicing your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you un-

derstand the operation and maintenance

of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many

miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.

Please read through this manual before

operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-

let explains details about the warranties

covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance

and schedules” section of this manual

explains details about maintaining and

servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a

separate Customer Care/Lemon Law

Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-

solve any concerns you may have with

your vehicle, and clarify your rights un-

der your state’s lemon law.

A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle

best. When you require any service or have

any questions, they will be glad to assist

you with the extensive resources available

to them.

In addition to factory-installed options,

your vehicle may also be equipped with

additional accessories installed prior to de-

livery. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions con-

cerning proper use of such accessories

prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-

cessory. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure

familiarity with controls and maintenance

requirements assisting you in the safe op-

eration of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

∙

ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-

tures or taking other actions that

could distract you.

∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-

propriate child restraint systems. Pre-

teen children should be seated in the

rear seat.

∙ ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety fea-

tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety, emissions or du-

rability and may even violate govern-

mental regulations. In addition, dam-

age or performance problems

resulting from modifications may not

be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-

agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses

the port during normal driving, for ex-

ample remote insurance company

monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,

telematics or engine reprogramming,

may cause interference or damage to

vehicle systems. We do not recommend

or endorse the use of any aftermarket

OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically

approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-

ranty may not cover damage caused by

any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all

features and equipment available on this

model. Features and equipment in your ve-

hicle may vary depending on model, trim

level, options selected, order, date of pro-

duction, region or availability. Therefore,

you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or in-

stalled on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at the

time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to

change specifications, performance, design

or component suppliers without notice and

without obligation. From time to time,

NISSAN may update or revise this manual to

provide Owners with the most accurate in-

formation currently available. Please care-

fully read and retain with this manual all re-

vision updates sent to you by NISSAN to

ensure you have access to accurate and up-

to-date information regarding your vehicle.

Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals

and any updates can also be found in the

Owner section of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide. If you have

questions concerning any information in

your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs. For contact information, refer

to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

page in this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or seri-

ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce

the risk, the procedures must be fol-

lowed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage to

your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed

carefully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do

this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to

the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these call attention to an item in the illus-

tration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material – special handling may

apply. For additional information, refer

to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any

form, or by any means, electronic, me-

chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-

erwise, without the prior written permis-

sion of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.

APD1005

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide NISSAN directly

with comments or questions, please con-

tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask

for the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone

number

– Vehicle identification number (attached

to the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-

tion at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..........0-2

Exterior front ....................................0-3

Exterior rear .....................................0-4

Passenger compartment........................0-5

Instrument panel ................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations...........0-8

Warning and indicator lights.....................0-9

1. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

3. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s)

and shoulder height adjuster

(P. 1-10, 1-42)

4. Seats (P. 1-2)

5. Supplemental air bag modules

(P. 1-42)

6. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) (P. 1-42)

7. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)

8. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system (P. 1-20)

9. Rear seat belts (P. 1-10)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LIC3852

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-11)

2. Windshield (P. 8-16)

3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)

4. Power windows (if so equipped)

(P. 2-30)

5. Door locks (P. 3-4)

Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-6)

Keys (P. 3-2)

6. Mirrors (P. 3-18)

7. Tire pressure (P. 8-28)

Flat tire (P. 6-2)

Tire chains (P. 8-28)

8. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-22)

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-22)

9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-22)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2461

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Antenna (P. 4-43)

2. Rear window defroster switch

(P. 2-22)

3. Trunk lid release (P. 3-12)

4. Rearview camera (P. 4-8)

5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-22)

6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-14)

Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-14)

Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)

7. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-4)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2462

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Interior light (P. 2-32)

2. Sun visors (P. 3-17)

3. Map light (if so equipped) (P. 2-32)

4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-18)

5. Glove box (P. 2-27)

6. Parking brake (P. 5-18)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2463

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Headlight/turn signal switch/fog

light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-22)

2. Driver’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

Horn (P. 2-25)

3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-12)

4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)

5. Vents (P. 4-14)

6. Rear window defroster switch

(P. 2-22)

7. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-42)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

9. Climate controls (P. 4-15)

10. Audio system (P. 4-23)

11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

12. Glove box (P. 2-27)

13. Power outlet (P. 2-26)

14. USB connection port and AUX IN

jack (P. 4-23)

15. Shift lever (P. 5-11)

16. Cup holders (P. 2-27)

17. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)

LIC4000

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

18. Cruise control switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-19)

19. Tilt steering (P. 3-16)

20. Audio control switches (P. 4-43)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System switches (P. 4-47)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-26)

22. Fuel-filler door release lever (P. 3-14)

Hood release lever (P. 3-11)

23. Electronic outside rearview mirror

control switch (P. 3-18)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

HR16DE Engine

1. Drive belt location (P. 8-14)

2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)

3. Air cleaner (P. 8-15)

4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)

fluid reservoir (P. 8-9)

5. Fusible link (P. 8-18)

6. Battery (P. 8-11)

7. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)

8. Radiator cap (P. 8-4)

9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-10)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LDI3231

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

2-13

Brake warning

light

2-13

Charge warning

light

2-14

Door open warn-

ing light

2-14

Engine oil pres-

sure warning light

2-14

High temperature

warning light (red)

(if so equipped)

2-14

Warning

light

Name Page

Low fuel warning

light

2-15

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-15

Power steering

warning light

2-17

Seat belt warning

light and chime (if

so equipped)

2-17

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-17

Indicator

light

Name Page

Continuously

Variable Trans-

mission (CVT) po-

sition indicator

light

2-18

Cruise indicator

light (if so

equipped)

2-18

Front fog light in-

dicator light (if so

equipped)

2-18

Front passenger

air bag status

light

2-18

High beam indi-

cator light (blue)

2-18

Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL)

2-18

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Indicator

light

Name Page

Overdrive OFF

indicator light (if

so equipped)

2-19

Side light and

headlight indica-

tor light (green) (if

so equipped)

2-20

Slip indicator light 2-20

Turn signal/

hazard indicator

lights

2-20

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-20

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats............................................ 1-2

Front manual seat adjustment ................1-3

Folding rear seat (if so equipped) ............. 1-4

Armrest (if so equipped for driver’s side

only).......................................... 1-5

Head restraints/headrests ...................... 1-5

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ................................. 1-6

Non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest components.........................1-7

Remove.......................................1-7

Install.........................................1-8

Adjust ........................................1-8

Seatbelts.......................................1-10

Precautions on seat belt usage...............1-10

Seat belt warning light (if so equipped) .......1-13

Pregnant women.............................1-13

Injured persons...............................1-13

Three-point type seat belt with

retractor .....................................1-13

Seat belt extenders...........................1-17

Seat belt maintenance .......................1-17

Child safety......................................1-18

Infants .......................................1-19

Small children ................................1-19

Larger children ...............................1-19

Child restraints .................................1-20

Precautions on child restraints ..............1-20

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system ............................1-23

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH.................................1-25

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts ......................... 1-27

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using LATCH .....................1-30

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using the seat belts..............1-33

Booster seats ...............................1-38

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...........1-42

Precautions on SRS..........................1-42

Supplemental air bag warning labels ........1-59

Supplemental air bag warning light..........1-60

WARNING

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

properly. For additional information,

refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section.

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls or

make the vehicle move. Unattended

children could become involved in se-

rious accidents.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. The seat may

move suddenly and could cause loss

of control of the vehicle.

∙ The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when the

passenger sits well back and straight

up in the seat. If the seatback is re-

clined, the risk of sliding under the lap

belt and being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-

ally. For additional information about ad-

justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined

in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide

the seat forward or backward to the de-

sired position. Release the lever to lock the

seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up

and lean back. To bring the seatback for-

ward, pull the lever up and lean your body

forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-

back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

LRS2571 LRS2572

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position

with the parking brake fully applied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for

driver’s seat)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to

adjust the seat height until the desired po-

sition is achieved.

FOLDING REAR SEAT (if so

equipped)

䊊

1Pull the knob 䊊

Ato fold each seatback

down.

WARNING

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat when it

is in the fold-down position. Use of

these areas by passengers without

proper restraints could result in seri-

ous injury or death in an accident or

sudden stop.

LRS2573 LRS2833

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

∙ Closely supervise children when they

are around the cars to prevent them

from playing and becoming locked in

the trunk where they could be seri-

ously injured. Keep the car locked,

with the rear seatback and trunk lid

securely latched when not in use, and

prevent children’s access to car keys.

ARMREST (if so equipped for

driver’s side only)

To use the armrest, pull it down to the rest-

ing position.

䊊

AStowed position

䊊

BResting position

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They

may provide additional protection

against injury in certain rear end colli-

sions. Adjustable head

restraints/headrests must be adjusted

properly, as specified in this section.

Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach any-

thing to the head restraint/headrest

stalks or remove the head

restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat

if the head restraint/headrest has been

removed. If the head restraint/headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly ad-

just the head restraint/headrest before

an occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions can

reduce the effectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may in-

crease the risk of serious injury or death

in a collision.

LRS2454

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

The illustration shows the seating posi-

tions equipped with head

restraints/headrests.

䉱Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not

equipped with a head restraint or headrest

(if applicable).

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalk(s)

to lock them in a desired adjustment

position.

∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch

to secure them to the seat frame.

∙ Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the

head restraint/headrest so the cen-

ter of your ear is approximately level

with the center of the head

restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than

the recommended alignment, place

the head restraint/headrest at the

highest position.

∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been

removed, ensure that it is reinstalled

and locked in place before riding in that

designated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2000 LRS2300

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the

head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest

from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest

properly in a secure place so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Make

sure that the head restraint/headrest is

facing the correct direction. The stalk

with the notch (notches) 䊊

1must be

installed in the hole with the lock knob

䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses the

seating position.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears. If

your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/ head-

rest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it

up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and

push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

LRS2305 LRS2306

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat with both feet on the

floor, your chances of being injured or killed

in a collision and/or the severity of injury

may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly

encourages you and all of your passengers

to buckle up every time you drive, even if

your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

WARNING

∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

WARNING

∙ Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal inju-

ries in an accident.

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

∙ Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and all

seat belts fastened, it may indicate a

malfunction in the system. Have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do not

modify the seat belt, add material, or

install devices that may change the

seat belt routing or tension. Doing so

may affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have

activated, they cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN recommends that all seat belt

assemblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was mi-

nor and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during

a collision should also be inspected

and replaced if either damage or im-

proper operation is noted.

∙ All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s inspection in-

structions and replacement recom-

mendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are

damaged.

SSS0014

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT (if so

equipped)

The front driver seat is equipped with a

seat belt warning light.

The front passenger seat may be equipped

with a seat belt warning light.

The warning light, located on the instru-

ment panel, will show the status of the

driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning

light will not light up if the seat is not

occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant

women use seat belts. The seat belt should

be worn snug and always position the lap

belt as low as possible around the hips, not

the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never run

the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal

area. Contact your doctor for specific rec-

ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons

use seat belts. Check with your doctor for

specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

belt properly.

LRS0786

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

∙ Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the

seat belt becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-

vated, the child can be seriously in-

jured or killed if the seat belt retracts

and becomes tight. This can occur

even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle

the seat belt to release the child. If the

seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child

by cutting the seat belt with a suitable

tool (such as a knife or scissors) to

release the seat belt. Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-

tractor and insert the tongue into the

buckle 䊊

Auntil you hear and feel the

latch engage.

∙The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

seat belt to move, and allows you

some freedom of movement in the

seat.

∙If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

LRS2571 LRS2674

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips 䊊

Bas shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over

your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear

seating positions’ three-point seat belts

have two modes of operation:

∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-

tend and retract to allow the driver and

passengers some freedom of movement

in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt

when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks

the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat

belt cannot be extended again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the

buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-

turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt

fully retracts. For additional information, re-

fer to “Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During nor-

mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is ac-

tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension. It can also change the op-

eration of the front passenger air bag.

For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental air bag warning light” in

this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-

tain that the seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

LRS2675

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button

on the buckle 䊊

1. The seat belt automati-

cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock

seat belt movement by two separate

methods:

∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor

∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check the operation as follows:

∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-

ward quickly. The retractor should lock

and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service or to learn more about seat belt

operation.

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. For

additional information, refer to “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To

adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊

and move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position 䊊

2, so the belt passes over

the center of the shoulder. The belt should

be away from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Release the ad-

justment button to lock the shoulder belt

anchor into position.

WRS0139 LRS0242

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down to

make sure it is securely fixed in

position.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

best for you. Failure to do so may re-

duce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it

is not possible to properly fit the

lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender

that is compatible with the installed seat

belts is available for purchase. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and may be used for either the

driver or front passenger seating position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for assistance with purchasing an

extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

∙ Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal injury

in the event of an accident.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-

stall child restraints. If the child re-

straint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

∙To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution rec-

ommended for cleaning upholstery or

carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow

the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not

allow the seat belts to retract until they

are completely dry.

∙If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the

seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the

shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry

cloth.

∙Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such

as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible

wires and anchors, work properly. If

loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other

damage on the webbing is found, the

entire seat belt assembly should be re-

placed.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-

lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be

unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-

lease the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect

them. They need to be properly re-

strained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, includ-

ing doctors, teachers, government traffic

safety offices, and community organiza-

tions. Every child is different, so be sure to

learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re-

straint systems:

∙ Rear-facing child restraints

∙ Forward-facing child restraints

∙ Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year

and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed

in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-

facing child restraints are available for chil-

dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-

straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster

seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-

tal injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. For

additional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the ve-

hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-

chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or

with the vehicle seat belt. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because

your vehicle has a supplemental re-

straint system (air bag system) for the

front passenger. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS)” in this section.

CHILD SAFETY

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

NISSAN recommends that infants be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

You should choose a child restraint that fits

your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh

at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a

rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-

sible up to the height or weight limit of the

child restraint. Children who outgrow the

height or weight limit of the rear-facing

child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-

facturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommen-

dations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that

comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness until they

reach the maximum height or weight limit

allowed by the child restraint manufac-

turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight

limit of the harness-equipped forward-

facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends

that the child be placed in a commercially

available booster seat to obtain proper

seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the

booster seat should raise the child so that

the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt

should not cross the neck or face and

should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt

should lie snugly across the lower hips or

upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster

seat can only be used in seating positions

that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the

child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-

ing?

∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over

the front edge of the seat with feet flat

on the floor?

∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt

(lap belt low and snug across the hips

and shoulder belt across mid-chest

and shoulder)?

∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-

justed head restraint/headrest?

∙ Will the child be able to stay in position

for the entire ride?

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

If you answered no to any of these ques-

tions, the child should remain in a booster

seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and

state regulations to confirm your child is

using the correct restraint system before

traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo area. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in a sudden stop or

collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

∙

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in se-

rious injury or death of a child or other

passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

– The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always fol-

low all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

LRS2690 ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– Infants and children should never

be held on anyone’s lap. Even the

strongest adult cannot resist the

forces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both

a child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children

are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seat than in the front

seat. If you must install a forward-

facing child restraint in the front

seat, refer to “Forward-facing child

restraint installation using the seat

belts” in this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating air bag could se-

riously injure or kill a child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be

used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child re-

straint that will fit the child and ve-

hicle. Some child restraints may

not fit properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items

or equipment to the vehicle. Doing

so could damage the child re-

straint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged

anchorage, and a child could be se-

riously injured or killed in a

collision.

– Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child

restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while in the vehicle.

WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, loose objects can injure occu-

pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal

child restraint anchor system, referred to

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system. Some child restraints

include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to these an-

chors. For additional information, refer to

“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible

child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be

used.

Several manufacturers offer child re-

straints for infants and children of various

sizes. When selecting any child restraint,

keep the following points in mind:

∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-

tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-

dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the child

restraint and check the various adjust-

ments to be sure the child restraint is

compatible with your child. Choose a

child restraint that is designed for your

child’s height and weight. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is less than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH

anchors or the seat belt to install the

child restraint (not both at the same

time).

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not

the lower anchors) to install the child

restraint.

∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-

quires the top tether strap on forward-

facing child restraints be secured to the

designated anchor point on the vehicle.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special an-

chor points that are used with LATCH sys-

tem compatible child restraints. This sys-

tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX

or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint unless the

combined weight of the child and child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint

is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehi-

cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the rear outboard

seating positions only. Do not attempt to

install a child restraint in the center position

using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the loca-

tions shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in

the center rear seating position us-

ing the LATCH lower anchors. The

child restraint will not be secured

properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by in-

serting your fingers into the lower

anchor area. Feel to make sure

there are no obstructions over the

anchors such as seat belt webbing

or seat cushion material. The child

restraint will not be secured prop-

erly if the lower anchors are

obstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

LATCH system lower anchor locations

WRS0756

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located as

shown. A label is attached to the seatback

to help you locate the LATCH lower an-

chors.

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to two an-

chors located at certain seating positions

in your vehicle. With this system, you do not

have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the

child restraint. Check your child restraint for

a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the

instructions provided by the child restraint

manufacturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

LATCH lower anchor location

WRS0700

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear par-

cel shelf 䊊

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

WRS0760

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your hand to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint or try installing by using

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not

all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in

the rear seats:

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat. Position the child restraint

on the seat. Always follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to the ELR

mode when the seat belt is fully re-

tracted.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS2395

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up

on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS2397

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the LATCH sys-

tem:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. For additional

information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted –

step 2

WRS0799

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0800

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint. Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (rear bench out-

board seating positions only).

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

Rear bench seat

LRS3061

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information for head

restraint/headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over

the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the rear seats or in the front passen-

ger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position.

Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and,

therefore, must not be used in the

front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section for

head restraint/headrest adjustment,

removal and installation information.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point (rear seat in-

stallation only). For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”

in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0667

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 2 through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not illu-

minated, refer to "Front passenger air

bag and status light" in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

Forward-facing – step 10

WRS0475

Rear bench seat

LRS2627

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information for head

restraint/headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over

the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a

booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-

structions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-

lision greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s

face and neck and the lap portion

of the belt does not cross the

stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the

child’s arm.

– A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that

has a lap/shoulder belt.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following points

in mind:

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-

erly supported by the booster seat or

vehicle seat. The seatback must be at

or above the center of the child’s ears.

For example, if a low back booster seat

is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be

at or above the center of the child’s ears.

If the seatback is lower than the center

of the child’s ears, a high back booster

seat should be used.

LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place the child in the

booster seat and check the various ad-

justments to be sure the booster seat is

compatible with the child. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-

ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,

“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-

tions of this manual before installing a child

restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat

in the rear seat or in the front passenger

seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in

the front seat, move the seat to the

rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front-facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions.

WRS0699

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the booster seat is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

booster seat fit, try another seating

position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be

sure to follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-

ing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in “Three-point type seat

belt with retractor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front pas-

senger air bag status light may or

may not illuminate, depending on the

size of the child and the type of booster

seat being used. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

Front passenger position

LRS0454 WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important infor-

mation concerning the following systems:

∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-

tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System)

∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-

tem

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head

and chest of the driver and front passenger

in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the chest area of the driver and

front passenger in certain side-impact col-

lisions. The side air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in the out-

board seating positions in certain side-

impact or rollover collisions. In a side im-

pact, the curtain air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags are

designed to inflate and remain inflated for

a short time.

These supplemental restraint systems are

designed to supplement the crash protec-

tion provided by the driver and front pas-

senger seat belts and are not a substitute

for them. Seat belts should always be cor-

rectly worn and the occupant seated a

suitable distance away from the steering

wheel, instrument panel and door finishers.

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS)

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower severity

frontal collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents

∙ The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger seat

is unoccupied. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are sit-

ting well back and upright in the seat.

The front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, if you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting side-

ways or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or death in

a crash. You may also receive serious

or fatal injuries from the front air bag

if you are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always properly use the seat belts.

∙ The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage, then in-

flates the air bags as needed. Failure

to properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

∙ The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sen-

sor (weight sensor) that turns the

front passenger air bag OFF under

some conditions. This sensor is only

used in this seat. Failure to be properly

seated and wearing the seat belt can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

∙ Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured when the

front air bag inflates.

WRS0031

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

WARNING

∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them

in your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

WARNING

∙ Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating front air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill your child. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags:

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event

of a frontal impact, rear impact, or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce

the risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

ARS1045 ARS1046 SSS0101

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on

the floor. The side air bag and curtain

air bag inflate with great force. Do not

allow anyone to place their hand, leg

or face near the side air bag on the

side of the seatback of the front seat

or near the side roof rails. Do not allow

anyone sitting in the front seats or

rear outboard seats to extend their

hand out of the window or lean

against the door. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the previous illustrations.

SSS0162 SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

WARNING

∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who

should always be properly restrained.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the

illustrations.

∙ Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

2. Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

seats) (if so equipped)

3. Front door satellite sensor (driver’s side

shown; front passenger side similar)

4. Crash zone sensor

5. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

6. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

7. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor – located in front passenger

cushion frame)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

9. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

10. Side satellite sensor

WRS0032 LRS3007

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items.

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that there is nothing press-

ing against the rear of the seatback,

such as a child restraint installed in

the rear seat or an object stored on

the floor.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger

seat.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed between the seat cushion and

the center console or between the

seat cushion and the door.

∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is

installed in the front passenger seat,

do not position the front passenger

seat so the child restraint contacts the

instrument panel. If the child restraint

does contact the instrument panel,

the system may determine the seat is

occupied and the passenger air bag

may deploy in a collision. Also the

front passenger air bag status light

may not illuminate. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Child restraints” in

this section.

∙ Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status

light.

∙ If you notice that the front passenger

air bag status light is not operating as

described in this section, get the oc-

cupant classification system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Until you have confirmed with a

dealer that your front passenger seat

occupant classification system is

working properly, position the occu-

pants in the rear seating positions.

∙ Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the

front seat does contact the rear seat,

the air bag system may determine a

sensor malfunction has occurred and

the front passenger air bag status

light may illuminate and the supple-

mental air bag warning light may

flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements

under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in

Canada. However, all of the information,

cautions and warnings in this manual

still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The front

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not in-

flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-

cation of proper front air bag system op-

eration.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat

belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi-

cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op-

eration is based on the severity of a colli-

sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For

the front passenger, the occupant classifi-

cation sensors are also monitored. Based

on information from the sensors, only one

front air bag may inflate in a crash, depend-

ing on the crash severity and whether the

front occupants are belted or unbelted. Ad-

ditionally, the front passenger air bag may

be automatically turned OFF under some

conditions, depending on the weight de-

tected on the front passenger seat and

how the seat belt is used. If the front pas-

senger air bag is OFF, the front passenger

air bag status light will be illuminated (if the

seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illu-

minated, but the air bag will be off). For

additional information, refer to “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” in this sec-

tion. One front air bag inflating does not

indicate improper performance of the sys-

tem.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a dis-

ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-

tact information is contained in the front of

this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by the re-

lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-

tion and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the face and chest of the front occupants.

They can help save lives and reduce seri-

ous injuries. However, an inflating front air

bag may cause facial abrasions or other

injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-

straint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN air bags, seat belts

should be correctly worn and the driver

and front passenger seated upright as far

as practical away from the steering wheel

or instrument panel. The front air bags in-

flate quickly in order to help protect the

front occupants. Because of this, the force

of the front air bag inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close

to, or is against, the front air bag module

during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protec-

tion. Failure to follow all instructions in

this manual concerning the use of

seats, seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with

an occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) that turns the front passenger air

bag on or off depending on the weight ap-

plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-

tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or

OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air

bag status light which is located on

the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

"ON" position, the front passenger air bag

status light on the instrument panel illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off or remains illuminated depending on

the front passenger seat occupied status.

The light operates as follows:

∙ Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:

The light is OFF and the front pas-

senger air bag is OFF and will not inflate

in a crash.

∙ Front passenger seat occupied by a

small adult, child or child restraint as

outlined in this section: The light

illuminates to indicate that the front

passenger air bag is OFF and will not

inflate in a crash.

∙ Occupied front passenger seat and the

passenger meets the conditions as

outlined in this section: The light is

OFF to indicate that the front passen-

ger air bag is operational.

In addition to the above, certain objects

placed on the front passenger seat may

also cause the light to operate as de-

scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information related to the

normal operation and troubleshooting of

this occupant classification sensor system,

please refer to “Normal operation” and

“Troubleshooting” in this section.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag

and other air bags in your vehicle are not

part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

ing the air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the

requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this

vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the

seat by weight. For example, if a child is in

the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn

the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-

dance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regula-

tions is on the seat, its weight and the

child’s weight can be detected and cause

the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat belt

as outlined in this manual should not

cause the front passenger air bag to be

automatically turned OFF. For small adults

it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-

pant takes his/her weight off the seat

cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,

by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could

cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing

the seat belt properly for the most effective

protection by the seat belt and supple-

mental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-

propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If

this is not possible, the occupant classifica-

tion sensor is designed to operate as de-

scribed above to turn the front passenger

air bag OFF for specified child restraints as

required by the regulations. Failing to prop-

erly secure child restraints may allow the

restraint to tip or move in a collision or

sudden stop. This can also result in the

passenger air bag inflating in a crash in-

stead of being OFF. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the front passenger air bag is designed not

to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object’s weight de-

tected by the occupant classification sen-

sor. Other conditions could also result in air

bag inflation, such as if a child is standing

on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all

vehicle occupants are seated and re-

strained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front pas-

senger air bag is automatically turned OFF

with the seat occupied. The light will not

illuminate when the front passenger seat is

unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

front passenger air bag status light is illu-

minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),

it could be that the person is a small adult,

or is not sitting on the seat properly or not

using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the front passenger air bag status

light may or may not be illuminated, de-

pending on the size of the child and the

type of child restraint being used. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated (indicat-

ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash),

it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure

that the child restraint is installed properly,

the seat belt is used properly and the occu-

pant is positioned properly. If the air bag

status light is still not illuminated, reposi-

tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the front passenger air bag status light

will not illuminate even though you believe

that the child restraint, the seat belts and

the occupant are properly positioned, the

system may be sensing an unoccupied

seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). A

NISSAN dealer can check that the system is

OFF by using a special tool. However, until

you have confirmed with a dealer that your

air bag is working properly, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and

front passenger air bag status light will

take a few seconds to register a change in

the front passenger seat status. For ex-

ample, if a large adult who is sitting in the

front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the

front passenger air bag status light will go

from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then

to OFF. This is normal system operation

and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light , located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will blink. Have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification

sensor system to classify the front passen-

ger based on weight, please follow the pre-

cautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

∙ Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on

the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear

of the seatback.

∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the

front passenger seat.

∙ Make sure that the front passenger

seat or seatback is not forced back

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-

ing against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with your feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your

lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the

“Seat belts” section of this manual.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the

front passenger before the vehicle is

put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by check-

ing the front passenger air bag status

light.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification

sensor system locks the classification

during driving so it is important that you

confirm that the front passenger is prop-

erly classified prior to driving. Also, the

occupant classification sensor system

may recalculate the weight of the occu-

pant when the vehicle comes to a stop

(i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so front

passenger seat occupants should con-

tinue to remain seated as outlined

above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag

status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with no front passenger

and no objects on the front passenger

seat:

This may be due to the following condi-

tions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the vehicle

should be checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupy-

ing the front passenger seat:

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag

light is functioning as intended. The

front passenger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small

adult, then this may be due to the following

conditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on

the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person

should be advised not to ride in the front

passenger seat and the vehicle should be

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

3. If the light is OFF with a small adult,

child or child restraint occupying the

front passenger seat.

This may be due to the following con-

ditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and cen-

tered on the seat cushion with his/her

feet comfortably extended to the floor.

∙ The child restraint is not properly in-

stalled, as outlined in the “Child re-

straints” section of this manual.

∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small

adult, child or child restraint should be re-

positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle

should be checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Other supplemental front-impact air

bag precautions

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Such

objects may become dangerous pro-

jectiles and cause injury if the front air

bags inflate.

∙ Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This

is to prevent accidental inflation of

the supplemental air bag or damage

to the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end struc-

ture. This could affect proper opera-

tion of the front air bag system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. Tampering includes changes to

the steering wheel and the instru-

ment panel assembly by placing ma-

terial over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by in-

stalling additional trim material

around the air bag system.

∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in seri-

ous personal injury.

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing ma-

terial on the seat cushion or by install-

ing additional trim material, such as

seat covers, on the seat that are not

specifically designed to assure proper

air bag operation. Additionally, do not

stow any objects under the front pas-

senger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may interfere

with the proper operation of the occu-

pant classification sensor (weight

sensor).

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equip-

ment. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the air bag

system.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and

roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental

air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside

of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-

tain air bags are located in the side roof

rails. All of the information, cautions, and

warnings in this manual apply and must

be followed. The side air bags and curtain

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of colli-

sion are similar to those of a higher severity

side impact. They are designed to inflate on

the side where the vehicle is impacted.

They may not inflate in certain side colli-

sions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate

in certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-

ments (for example, during severe off-

roading) may cause the curtain air bags to

inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always

an indication of proper side air bag and

curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke.This smoke is

not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those

with a history of a breathing condition

should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest of the front occupants. Curtain

air bags help to cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in the front and rear

outboard seating positions. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-

ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain air

bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.

Side air bags and curtain air bags do not

provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver and passenger seated up-

right as far as practical away from the side

air bag. Rear seat passengers should be

seated as far away as practical from the

door finishers and side roof rails. The side

air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly

in order to help protect the occupants. Be-

cause of this, the force of the side air bags

and curtain air bags inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close

to, or is against, these air bag modules dur-

ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate

quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bags will remain inflated for

a short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is

in the ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

LRS0259

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door fin-

isher and the front seat. Such objects

may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if a side air bag

inflates.

∙ Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain air bag system com-

ponents will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental inflation of the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

curtain air bag systems.

∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. For example, do not change the

front seats by placing material near

the seatbacks or by installing addi-

tional trim material, such as seat cov-

ers, around the side air bag.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the side air bag and curtain air bag

system. It is also recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for installa-

tion of electrical equipment. The SRS

wiring harnesses* should not be

modified or disconnected. Unauthor-

ized electrical test equipment and

probing devices should not be used

on the side air bag or curtain air bag

systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors

are yellow or orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)

(front seats)

WARNING

∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not

activated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to

prevent damage to or accidental acti-

vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-

ing with the pretensioner system may

result in serious personal injury.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work around and on

the pretensioner system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the preten-

sioner system.

∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-

posal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate

with the supplemental air bag system in

certain types of collisions. Working with the

seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help

tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-

comes involved in certain types of colli-

sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased with the

seat belt retractor. These seat belts are

used the same way as conventional seat

belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indi-

cate a fire. Care should be taken not to

inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load

limiters allow the seat belt to release web-

bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against

the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning

light is used to indicate malfunctions

in the pretensioner(s) system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Supplemental

air bag warning light” in this section. If the

operation of the supplemental air bag

warning light indicates there is a malfunc-

tion, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the preten-

sioner system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (lo-

cated on the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front-impact air bag system are placed in

the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may

cause serious injury or death.

WRS0897

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-

tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates for about 7 seconds and

then turns off. This means the system is

operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner

systems may not operate properly. They

must be checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement

procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to

inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-

minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-

mental air bag warning light remains illu-

minated after inflation has occurred. These

systems should be repaired and/or re-

placed as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,

curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-

lated parts should be pointed out to the

person performing the maintenance. The

ignition switch should always be placed in

the LOCK position when working under the

hood or inside the vehicle.

LRS0100

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioner(s) must

also be replaced. The air bag module

and pretensioner(s) should be re-

placed. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

However, the air bag module and pre-

tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected if there is

any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner sys-

tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) should be

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to verify it is still

functioning correctly. The OCS should

be checked even if no air bags deploy

as a result of the impact. Failure to

verify proper OCS function may result

in an improper air bag deployment re-

sulting in injury or death.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

MEMO

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ................................2-2

Meters and gauges..............................2-3

Speedometer and odometer .................2-5

Tachometer ..................................2-8

Engine coolant temperature gauge

(if so equipped) ...............................2-9

Fuel gauge ...................................2-9

Trip computer ...............................2-10

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ......................................2-12

Checking lights ..............................2-12

Warning lights ...............................2-13

Indicator lights ..............................2-18

Audible reminders ...........................2-20

Wiper and washer switch .......................2-21

Switch operation ............................2-21

Rear window defroster switch ..................2-22

Headlight and turn signal switch ...............2-22

Headlight control switch.....................2-22

Instrument brightness control...............2-24

Turn signal switch ...........................2-24

Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............2-25

Horn ...........................................2-25

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch......2-26

Power outlets ..................................2-26

Storage ........................................2-27

Front-door pockets..........................2-27

Seatback pocket (if so equipped) ............2-28

Storagetray.................................2-28

Glovebox....................................2-29

Cup holders .................................2-29

Windows .......................................2-30

Power windows (if so equipped) .............2-30

Manual windows (if so equipped) ............2-32

Interior lights ...................................2-32

Map light (if so equipped) ....................2-33

Trunk light ......................................2-34

1. Headlight/turn signal switch/fog

light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-22)

2. Driver’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

Horn (P. 2-25)

3. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-12)

4. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-21)

5. Vents (P. 4-14)

6. Rear window defroster switch

(P. 2-22)

7. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-42)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

9. Climate controls (P. 4-15)

10. Audio system (P. 4-23)

11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)

12. Glove box (P. 2-27)

13. Power outlet (P. 2-26)

14. USB connection port and AUX IN

jack (P. 4-23)

15. Shift lever (P. 5-11)

16. Cup holders (P. 2-27)

17. Ignition switch (P. 5-8)

LIC4000

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

18. Cruise control switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-19)

19. Tilt steering (P. 3-16)

20. Audio control switches (P. 4-43)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System switches (P. 4-47)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-26)

22. Fuel-filler door release lever (P. 3-14)

Hood release lever (P. 3-11)

23. Electronic outside rearview mirror

control switch (P. 3-18)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

1. Tachometer

2. Speedometer

3. Fuel gauge

4. Odometer

Twin trip odometer

Trip computer

5. Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) position indicator

6. Instrument brightness control

knob

7. Change/reset button

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3131

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

CAUTION

∙ To clean the meter lens, use a soft

cloth, dampened with water. Never

use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,

thinner or any kind of solvent or paper

towel with a chemical cleaning agent.

They will scratch or cause discolor-

ation to the lens.

∙ Do not spray any liquid such as water

on the meter lens. Spraying liquid

may cause the systems to

malfunction.

1. Tachometer

2. Temperature gauge

3. Odometer

Twin trip odometer

Trip computer

Outside air temperature (if so

equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2146

2-4 Instruments and controls

4. Fuel gauge

5. Speedometer

6. Change/reset button

7. Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion (CVT) position indicator

8. Instrument brightness control

CAUTION

∙ To clean the meter lens, use a soft

cloth, dampened with water. Never

use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine,

thinner or any kind of solvent or paper

towel with a chemical cleaning agent.

They will scratch or cause discolor-

ation to the lens.

∙ Do not spray any liquid such as water

on the meter lens. Spraying liquid

may cause the systems to

malfunction.

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-

eter and odometer. The speedometer is

located on the right side or in the center of

the meter cluster. The odometer is located

within the trip computer.

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2118

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2136

Instruments and controls 2-5

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is dis-

played when the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position.

The odometer 䊊

1records the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer 䊊

2records the dis-

tance of individual trips.

Changing the display

Press the change/reset button 䊊

3to

change the display as follows:

Odometer (ODO) →Trip →Trip

→Instant fuel consumption →Average fuel

consumption →Distance to empty (cruis-

ing range) →Odometer (ODO)

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

3for more

than 1 second resets the currently dis-

played trip odometer to zero.

Average fuel economy and distance to

empty information is also available. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Trip com-

puter” in this section.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3305

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2139

2-6 Instruments and controls

Loose fuel cap warning message

Push the reset button 䊊

Afor more than

1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning message after the fuel cap has

been tightened. For additional information,

refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section of this

manual.

Check tire pressure warning

message (if so equipped)

The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is

displayed when the low tire pressure warn-

ing light is illuminated and low tire pressure

is detected. Check and adjust the tire pres-

sure to the recommended COLD tire pres-

sure shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label. The CHECK TIRE PRES

warning message can be turned off using

the reset button 䊊

Aon the meter, the low

tire pressure warning light will not be

turned off.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3306

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2025

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3307

Instruments and controls 2-7

The low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated until the tires are inflated to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. The

CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is dis-

played each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated. For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in this sec-

tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section,

and “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (rpm).

Do not rev the engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce

engine speed. Operating the engine in

the red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2128

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3598

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2151

2-8 Instruments and controls

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE (if so equipped)

Type A (if so equipped)

Engine coolant temperature monitoring is

performed by the high temperature warn-

ing light. For additional information, refer to

“High temperature warning light” in this

section.

Type B (if so equipped)

NOTE:

The ignition switch must be placed in the

ON position for the gauge to give a read-

ing.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature. The engine coolant tempera-

ture will vary with the outside air tempera-

ture and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates a coolant tem-

perature near the hot (H) end of the nor-

mal range, reduce vehicle speed to de-

crease the temperature. If the gauge is

over the normal range, stop the vehicle

as soon as safely possible. If the engine

is overheated, continued operation of

the vehicle may seriously damage the

engine. For additional information, re-

fer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the

“In case of emergency” section of this

manual for immediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-

ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or

down hills.

Type A (if so equipped): The fuel level seg-

ments 䊊

Awill blink when the amount of fuel

in the tank is getting low.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2501

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2286

Instruments and controls 2-9

Type B (if so equipped): The low fuel warn-

ing light 䊊

Awill turn on when the amount of

fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-

isters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler

door is located on the driver’s side of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

check engine light may come on. Re-

fuel as soon as possible. After a few

driving trips, the light should

turn off. If the light remains on after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

TRIP COMPUTER

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can

be selected by pushing the change/reset

button 䊊

Aon the instrument panel located

near the speedometer. The following

modes can be selected in the display 䊊

∙ Odometer

∙ Trip A

∙ Trip B

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2287

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2470

2-10 Instruments and controls

∙ Instant fuel consumption

∙ Average fuel consumption

∙ Distance to empty

∙ Outside air temperature (if so equipped)

Odometer

The odometer records the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

Trip A

Measures the distance of one specific trip.

Trip B

Measures the distance of a second specific

trip.

Instant fuel consumption

The instant fuel consumption mode shows

the instant fuel economy. The display up-

dates instantly when driving.

Average fuel consumption (mpg

or l (liter)/100 km)

The average fuel consumption mode

shows the average fuel consumption since

the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing

the trip or change button for more than

approximately 1 second. The display is up-

dated every 30 seconds. At about the first

1/3 mi (500 m) after a reset, the display

shows (----).

Distance to empty

The distance to empty mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can

be driven before refueling. The range is

constantly being calculated, based on the

amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the

actual fuel consumption.

The distance to empty includes a low

range warning feature: when the fuel level

is low, the distance to empty is automati-

cally selected and the digits blink in order

to draw the driver’s attention. Press the trip

computer change/reset button 䊊

Aif you

wish to return to the mode that was se-

lected before the warning occurred.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the

distance to empty will display (----).

Outside air temperature (°F or °C)

(if so equipped)

The outside air temperature is displayed in

°F or °C.

The ambient temperature sensor is lo-

cated in front of the radiator. The sensor

may be affected by road or engine heat,

wind directions and other driving condi-

tions. The display may differ from the ac-

tual ambient temperature or the tempera-

ture displayed on various signs or

billboards.

Trip computer reset

Pressing the change/reset button for

more than 3 seconds will reset all modes

except Trip A and distance to empty.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2138

Instruments and controls 2-11

or Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

Power steering warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

or Brake warning light Seat belt warning light and chime

(if so equipped)

Overdrive OFF indicator light

(if so equipped)

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Side light and headlight indicator light

(green) (if so equipped)

Door open warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

position indicator light

Slip indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise indicator light (if so equipped) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

High temperature warning light (red)

(if so equipped)

Front fog light indicator light

(if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

or Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. The following lights (if

so equipped) will come on:

or , , , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) will

come on briefly and then go off:

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-12 Instruments and controls

or , (red) , , ,

, , , ,

If any light does not come on or operate in

a way other than described, it may indicate

a burned out bulb and/or a system mal-

function. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING LIGHTS

This vehicle has various warning lights that

may illuminate to indicate a potential prob-

lem. For additional information, refer to the

specific light in this section.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the ABS warning light illuminates

and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is

operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while

the engine is running or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system

then operates normally but without anti-

lock assistance. For additional information,

refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

or Brake warning

light

This light functions for both the parking

brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on when the

parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid

level. If the light comes on while the engine

is running with the parking brake not ap-

plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-

lowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have

the warning system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

∙ Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you

judge it to be safe, drive carefully to

the nearest service station for repairs.

Otherwise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be

dangerous.

∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

∙ If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-13

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the

brake warning light and the ABS warning

light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is

not functioning properly. Have the brake

system checked and, if necessary, repaired.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed

driving and abrupt braking. For additional

information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the charging sys-

tem is not functioning properly. Turn the

engine off and check the generator belt. If

the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the

light remains on, have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doing

so will bypass the variable voltage

control system and the vehicle bat-

tery may not charge completely. For

additional information, refer to “Vari-

able voltage control system” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

∙ Do not continue driving if the genera-

tor belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors

are not closed securely while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure

warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If

the light flickers or comes on during nor-

mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,

stop the engine immediately and call a

NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair

shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is

not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For

additional information, refer to “Engine oil”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Such damage is not cov-

ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as

it is safe to do so.

High temperature warning

light (red) (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the high temperature warning

light illuminates and then turns off. This in-

dicates that the high temperature sensor

in the engine coolant system is opera-

tional.

When driving, the high temperature warn-

ing light may turn off. This indicates that the

engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range.

2-14 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

If the high temperature warning light

illuminates while the engine is running,

it may indicate the engine temperature

is extremely high. Stop the vehicle

safely as soon as possible. If the vehicle

is overheated, continuing vehicle op-

eration may seriously damage the en-

gine. For additional information, refer

to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

or Low fuel warning

light

This light comes on when the fuel level in

the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon

as it is convenient, preferably before the

fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be

a small reserve of fuel in the tank when

the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty), show-

ing no more fuel bars.

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-

tors the tire pressure of all tires except the

spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about

1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illumi-

nate.

A CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning

message is also displayed in the odom-

eter.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust

the tire pressure of all four tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel located in the driver’s door opening.

The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-

flated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds

above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge

to check the tire pressure.

The low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated until the tires are inflated to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. The

CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is dis-

played each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated.

For additional information, refer to "Check

tire pressure warning message" in this sec-

tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section

and in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning does not

appear if the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

Instruments and controls 2-15

For additional information, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “Tire

pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, have the vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could re-

sult in serious personal injury or

death. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

show on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label located in the driver’s

door opening to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjust-

ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire

is flat and all tires are properly in-

flated, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

∙ Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Power steering warning

light

WARNING

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

∙ When the power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine run-

ning, there will be no power assist for

the steering. You will still have control

of the vehicle, but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the power steering warning light

illuminates. After starting the engine, the

power steering warning light turns off. This

indicates the power steering is operational.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the power steering is not function-

ing properly and may need servicing. Have

the power steering checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When the power steering warning light illu-

minates with the engine running, there will

be no power assist for the steering, but you

will still have control of the vehicle. At this

time, greater steering effort is required to

operate the steering wheel, especially in

sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power

steering” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Seat belt warning light and

chime (if so equipped)

The light and chime remind you to fasten

your seat belts. The light illuminates when-

ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position and remains illuminated

until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the

same time, the chime sounds for about

6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illumi-

nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not

fastened when the front passenger’s seat

is occupied . For 7 seconds after the igni-

tion switch is placed in the ON position, the

system does not activate the warning light

for the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

Supplemental air bag

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position, the supplemental air

bag warning light illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off. This means

the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,

and pretensioner seat belt systems need

servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

Instruments and controls 2-17

Unless checked and repaired, the supple-

mental restraint system (air bag system)

and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-

tion properly. For additional information, re-

fer to “Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

This vehicle has various indicator lights

that may illuminate to indicate a system

status. For additional information, refer to

the specific light in this section.

Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT)

position indicator light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this indicator light shows the shift

lever position. For additional information,

refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise indicator light (if so

equipped)

The light comes on when the cruise control

switch is pushed. The light goes out when

the switch is pushed again. When the

cruise indicator light comes on, the cruise

control system is operational. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Cruise control”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Front fog light indicator

light (if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi-

nates when the front fog lights are on. For

additional information, refer to “Fog light

switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status light will

be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

off depending on how the front passenger

seat is being used.

For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light” in the

“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the head-

light high beams are on and goes out when

the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes

on when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or

blinks while the engine is running, it may

indicate a potential emission control mal-

function.

2-18 Instruments and controls

The MIL may also come on steady if the

fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the

vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure

the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least

3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light

should turn off if no other potential emis-

sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for

20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds

when the engine is not running, it indicates

that the vehicle is not ready for an emission

control system inspection/maintenance

test. For additional information, refer to

“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance

(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

∙ MIL on steady — An emission control

system malfunction has been de-

tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in

the trip computer. If the fuel-filler cap is

loose or missing, tighten or install the

cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light does

not turn off after a few driving trips, have

the vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has

been detected which may damage the

emission control system. To reduce or

avoid emission control system dam-

age:

– do not drive at speeds above

45 mph (72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on

steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, reduced

fuel economy, and possible damage to

the emission control system.

Overdrive OFF indicator

light (if so equipped)

The overdrive OFF indicator light illumi-

nates when the overdrive OFF mode is se-

lected.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green) (if so

equipped)

The side light and headlight indicator light

illuminates when the side light or head-

lights are on (not including daytime run-

ning or signature lights). If the headlight

switch is in the AUTO position, the side light

and headlight indicator light will illuminate

when the headlights turn on. For additional

information, refer to “Headlight and turn

signal switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC sys-

tem is operating, thus alerting the driver to

the fact that the road surface is slippery

and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working;

this is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after

the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after ap-

proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-

erational. If the light does not come on

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn

signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is

turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the

VDC OFF switch is pushed to the OFF posi-

tion. This indicates the VDC system has

been turned off.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine and the system will operate

normally. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

The VDC indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after

about 2 seconds if the system is opera-

tional. If the light stays on or comes on

along with the indicator light while

you are driving, have the VDC system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

While the VDC system is operating, you

might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-

tem working when starting the vehicle or

accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a disc brake pad requires

replacement, it makes a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-

tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-

pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon

as possible if the warning sound is heard. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is

opened while the key is left in the ignition

switch. Remove the key and take it with you

when leaving the vehicle.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF

position, a chime sounds when the driver’s

door is opened if the headlights or parking

lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off or to

AUTO before leaving the vehicle.

Parking brake reminder chime

A chime sounds if the parking brake is set

and the vehicle is driven. The chime will

stop if the parking brake is released or the

vehicle speed returns to zero.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper

at the following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-

eration can be adjusted (if so

equipped) by turning the knob toward

䊊

A(Slower) or 䊊

B(Faster).

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-

eration

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed op-

eration

Push the lever up 䊊

4to have one sweep

operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 䊊

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several

times.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2789

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2131

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-21

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm the windshield

with the defroster before you wash the

windshield.

CAUTION

∙ Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

∙ Do not operate the washer if the res-

ervoir is empty.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

To defrost the rear window glass, start the

engine and push the rear window defroster

switch on. The rear window defroster indi-

cator light on the switch comes on. Push

the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1Rotate the switch to the position,

and the front parking, tail, license plate,

and instrument panel lights will come

on.

䊊

2Rotate the switch to the position,

and the headlights will come on and all

the other lights remain on.

LIC2116

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2127

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

2-22 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, en-

sure the low beams are engaged and

push the lever forward. The high beam

lights come on and the light illu-

minates. For additional information, re-

fer to “Headlight control switch” in this

section.

䊊

2Pull the lever back to return to the low

beams.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes

the headlight high beams on and off.

The low beams need not be engaged

for this function.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position while the headlight switch is in

the or position, the headlights

will turn off after a period of time.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature

automatically turns off the headlights

after a period of time, you should turn

the headlight switch to the OFF position

when the engine is not running to avoid

discharging the vehicle battery.

Type B (if so equipped)

WIC1509 LIC2128

Instruments and controls 2-23

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

The instrument brightness control oper-

ates when the headlight control switch is in

the or position.

Type A: Press the control 䊊

Ato adjust the

brightness of instrument panel lights.

Type B: Press the control 䊊

Ato adjust the

brightness of instrument panel lights.

Also, Type B is equipped with daytime

brightness control. Brightness can be ad-

justed with the headlight control switch in

the OFF position by pressing the control 䊊

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is

completed, the turn signal cancels au-

tomatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

2Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, to signal a lane change.

Hold the lever until the lane change is

completed.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2289

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2137 WIC1512

2-24 Instruments and controls

Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, and release the lever.

The turn signal will automatically flash

three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal

a lane change based on road and traffic

conditions.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so

equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the position, then turn the

fog light switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light

switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low

beams selected for the fog lights to oper-

ate. The fog lights automatically turn off

when the high beam headlights are se-

lected.

To sound the horn, push the center pad

area of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury.

WIC1513 LIC4017

HORN

Instruments and controls 2-25

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC

system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will

be reduced even if the accelerator is de-

pressed to the floor. If maximum engine

power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The indicator will come

on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

The power outlets are for powering electri-

cal accessories such as cellular tele-

phones. The outlets are rated at 12 volt,

120W (10A) maximum.

LIC3344

Instrument panel

LIC3609

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

POWER OUTLETS

2-26 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

∙ Only certain power outlets are de-

signed for use with a cigarette lighter

unit. Do not use any other power out-

let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for additional information

∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

∙ Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear win-

dow defroster is on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned off.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

Console (if so equipped)

LIC3610 LIC2157

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-27

SEATBACK POCKET (if so

equipped)

The seatback pocket is located on the

back of the passenger’s seat. The pocket

can be used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items:

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket or head restraint/headrest.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

STORAGE TRAY

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays

to help prevent injury in an accident or

sudden stop.

LIC1328 LIC3614

2-28 Instruments and controls

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

Use pocket on glove box lid 䊊

Ato store and

hide small objects.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is

hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTION

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

LIC3613

Front

LIC3611

Rear

LIC3612

Instruments and controls 2-29

CAUTION

∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liq-

uid containers.

POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before closing

the windows. Use the window lock

switch to prevent unexpected use of

the power windows.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON position, or

for a period of time after the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s

or passenger’s door is opened during this

period of time, the power to the windows is

canceled.

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger’s side window

switch

4. Right rear passenger’s window

switch

5. Left rear passenger’s window

switch

6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Bottle holder

LIC2158 WIC1100

WINDOWS

2-30 Instruments and controls

Driver’s side power window

switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped

with switches to open or close the front

and rear passenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and

hold it down. To close a window, pull the

switch and hold it up. To stop the opening

or closing function at any time, simply re-

lease the switch.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed,

only the driver’s side window can be

opened or closed. Push it again to cancel

the window lock function.

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates

only the corresponding passenger’s win-

dow. To open the window, push the switch

and hold it down 䊊

1. To close the window,

pull the switch up 䊊

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or

close only the corresponding windows. To

open the window, push the switch and hold

it down 䊊

1. To close the window, pull the

switch up 䊊

LIC0718 LIC0718

Instruments and controls 2-31

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with au-

tomatic operation, press the window

switch down to the second detent and re-

lease it; it need not be held. The window

automatically opens all the way. To stop

the window, lift the switch up while the win-

dow is opening.

MANUAL WINDOWS (if so

equipped)

The side windows can be opened or closed

by turning the hand crank on each door.

The interior light has a three-position

switch and operates regardless of ignition

switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position 䊊

the interior lights illuminate, regardless of

door position. The lights will go off after a

period of time unless the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position.

LIC0410 LIC3352 SIC2063A

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-32 Instruments and controls

When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊

the interior lights will stay on for a period of

time when:

∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob (if

so equipped), a key or the power door

lock switch (if so equipped) while all

doors are closed and the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position.

∙ The driver’s door is opened and then

closed while the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

∙ The key is removed from the ignition

switch while all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer is

activated when:

∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key fob

(if so equipped), a key, or the power door

lock switch (if so equipped).

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊

the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-

less of door position.

The lights will turn off automatically after a

period of time while doors are open to pre-

vent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

MAP LIGHT (if so equipped)

The map light has a three-position switch

and operates regardless of ignition switch

position.

When the switch is in the ON position 䊊

the map light illuminates, regardless of

door position. The light will go off after a

period of time unless the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position.

When the switch is in the DOOR position 䊊

the map light will stay on for a period of

time when:

LIC2126

Instruments and controls 2-33

∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob (if

so equipped), a key or the power door

lock switch while all doors are closed

and the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position.

∙ The driver’s door is opened and then

closed while the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

∙ The key is removed from the ignition

switch while all doors are closed.

The light will turn off while the timer is acti-

vated when:

∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key fob

(if so equipped), a key, or the power door

lock switch.

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊

the map light does not illuminate, regard-

less of door position.

The light will turn off automatically after a

period of time while doors are open to pre-

vent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is

opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the

light goes off. For additional information,

refer to “Exterior and interior lights” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TRUNK LIGHT

2-34 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

Doors ...........................................3-4

Locking with key..............................3-4

Locking with inside lock knob.................3-5

Locking with power door lock switch

(if so equipped) ...............................3-5

Automatic door locks (if so equipped) ........3-6

Child safety rear door lock ....................3-6

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-6

How to use remote keyless entry

system .......................................3-7

Hood ............................................3-11

Trunk lid ........................................3-12

Key operation ...............................3-12

Opener operation ...........................3-12

Interior trunk lid release ..................... 3-13

Fuel-filler door ..................................3-14

Opener operation ...........................3-14

Fuel-filler cap ................................3-14

Steering wheel .................................3-16

Tilt operation ................................3-16

Sun visors ...................................... 3-17

Vanity mirror ................................ 3-17

Mirrors .........................................3-18

Rearview mirror .............................3-18

Outside mirrors .............................3-18

1. Master key

2. Valet key

3. Key number plate

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,

it can be duplicated without knowing the

key number.

1. Integrated door lock key fob (two

sets)

2. Key number plate

CAUTION

Do not leave the ignition key inside the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

Type A (if so equipped)

SPA2342

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2027

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all keys and do not have one to

duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can

be duplicated without knowing the key

number.

1. Integrated door lock key fob (two

sets)

2. Key number plate

CAUTION

Do not leave the ignition key inside the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,

it can be duplicated without knowing the

key number.

Type C (if so equipped)

LPD2326

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be

opened using the inside or outside door

handles. The doors must be unlocked to

open the doors.

WARNING

∙ Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from unintention-

ally opening the doors, and will help

keep out intruders.

∙ Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows and/or inad-

vertent door lock activation, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others and/or pets un-

attended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and/or pets.

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as

shown.

Manual

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front

of the vehicle 䊊

1. To unlock, turn the key

toward the rear of the vehicle 䊊

Driver’s side

LPD0349

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Selective open

The power door lock system allows you to

lock or unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front 䊊

1of the

vehicle locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear

䊊

2of the vehicle unlocks that door. From

that position, returning the key to neutral

䊊

3(where the key can only be removed and

inserted) and turning it toward the rear

again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors

䊊

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊

then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move

the inside lock knob to the unlock position

䊊

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)

To lock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-

ger’s side) to the lock position 䊊

1. When

locking the door this way, be certain not to

leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push

the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas-

senger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊

LPD0483

Inside lock

SPA2760 WPD0381

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s

or front passenger’s side) is moved to the

lock position with the key in the ignition

switch while any door is open, all doors will

lock and then unlock automatically. This

helps to prevent the keys from being acci-

dently locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so

equipped)

∙ All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 15 mph

(24 km/h).

∙ Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) (if so equipped)

– All doors unlock automatically when

the transmission is placed in the P

(Park) position.

∙ Manual transmission (if so equipped)

– All doors unlock automatically when

the ignition is placed in the off posi-

tion.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear

doors from being opened accidentally, es-

pecially when small children are in the ve-

hicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on

the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊

the door can be opened from the outside

or the inside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊

the door can be opened only from the

outside.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ The remote keyless entry key fob

transmits radio waves when the but-

tons are pressed. The FAA advises ra-

dio waves may affect aircraft naviga-

tion and communication systems. Do

not operate the remote keyless entry

key fob while on an airplane. Make

sure the buttons are not operated un-

intentionally when the unit is stored

for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn

the interior lights on (if so equipped), and

activate the panic alarm (if so equipped) by

using the key fob from outside the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the ve-

hicle before locking the doors.

The key fob can operate at a distance of

approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.

The effective distance depends on the

conditions around the vehicle.

SPA2037

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

As many as four key fobs can be used with

one vehicle. For information concerning

the purchase and use of additional key

fobs, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

The key fob may not function when:

∙ The battery is low or discharged.

∙ The distance between the vehicle and

the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm (if so equipped) will not

activate when the key is in the ignition

switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the key fob:

∙ Do not allow the key fob, which con-

tains electrical components, to come

into contact with water or salt water.

This could affect the system function.

∙ Do not drop the key fob.

∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply

against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the key fob.

∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If

the key fob gets wet, immediately

wipe until it is completely dry.

∙ Do not place the key fob for an ex-

tended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key

holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the key fob near equip-

ment that produces a magnetic field,

such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-

ommends erasing the ID code of that

key fob. This will prevent the key fob

from unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding the

erasing procedure, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Close all doors.

4. Press the button on the key fob.

All the doors lock. The hazard warning

lights flash twice and the horn beeps

once to indicate all doors are locked.

LPD2028

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

∙ When the button is pressed

with all doors locked, the hazard

warning lights flash twice and the

horn beeps once as a reminder that

the doors are already locked.

∙ If a door is open and you press

the button, the doors will lock

but the horn will not beep and the

hazard lights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Silencing the

horn beep feature” in this section.

Unlocking doors

Press the button on the key fob once.

∙ Only the driver’s door unlocks.

∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if

all doors are completely closed with the

ignition switch in any position except

the ON position.

∙ The interior light turns on and the light

timer activates for 30 seconds when

the interior light switch is in the DOOR

position with the ignition switch in any

position except the ON position.

Press the button on the key fob again

within five seconds.

∙ All doors unlock.

∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if

all doors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without

waiting a period of time by inserting the key

into the ignition switch and placing the ig-

nition switch in the ON or START position,

locking the doors with the key fob, power

door lock switch or pushing the interior

light switch to the off position.

Auto relock

When the button on the key fob is

pressed, all doors will lock automatically

within 1 minute unless one of the following

operations is performed:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ A key is inserted into the ignition switch

and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

∙ Press the button.

LPD2029

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Releasing the trunk lid

Press the button on the key fob for

longer than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk

lid. The trunk release button on the key fob

will not operate when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

Using the panic alarm (if so

equipped)

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you may activate the panic alarm to

call attention by pressing and holding

the button on the key fob for longer

than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on

for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

∙ It has run for a period of time.

∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.

Using the interior light (if so

equipped)

Press the button on the key fob once

to turn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior

lights” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

LPD2030 LPD2031

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be

deactivated using the key fob.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three

times to confirm that the horn beep fea-

ture has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once

and the horn will sound once to confirm

that the horn beep feature has been reac-

tivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does

not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-

gered.

LPD2032

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊

located below the instrument panel

until the hood springs up slightly.

2. Locate the lever 䊊

2in between the

hood and grille and push the lever side-

ways with your fingertips.

3. Raise the hood 䊊

4. Remove the support rod and insert it

into the slot 䊊

Hold the coated parts when removing or

resetting the support rod. Avoid direct

contact with the metal parts, as they

may be hot immediately after the engine

has been stopped.

When closing the hood, return the support

rod to its original position, lower the hood

to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the

latch and release it. This allows proper en-

gagement of the hood latch.

WARNING

∙ Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the hood

to fly open and result in an accident.

∙ If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD2802

HOOD

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

WARNING

∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Ex-

haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

∙ Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

rear seatback and trunk lid securely

latched when not in use, and prevent

children’s access to car keys. KEY OPERATION

To open the trunk lid, turn the key clock-

wise. To close the trunk lid, lower and push

the trunk lid down securely.

OPENER OPERATION

WARNING

∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Ex-

haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

LPD2036 LPD2215

TRUNK LID

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

rear seatback and trunk lid securely

latched when not in use, and prevent

children’s access to car keys.

The trunk lid release is located on the floor

to the left of the driver’s seat.

To open the trunk lid, pull the opener lever

up.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the

trunk lid down securely. INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism

provides a means of escape for children

and adults in the event they become

locked inside the trunk.

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the

illuminated release handle until the lock re-

leases and push up on the trunk lid. The

release handle is made of a material that

glows in the dark after a brief exposure to

ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk com-

partment on the trunk lock at the center of

the trunk lid.

LPD2042

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel-filler door release is located below

the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler

door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel-

filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seri-

ously injured if it is misused or mis-

handled. Always stop the engine and

do not smoke or allow open flames or

sparks near the vehicle when

refueling.

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling

may cause fuel overflow, resulting in

fuel spray and possibly a fire.

∙ Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious mal-

function and possible injury. It could

also cause the Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL) to come on.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

to attempt to start your vehicle.

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable

fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

LPD2805 LPD2616

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Fuel

Recommendation” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

∙ The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-

pear if the fuel-filler cap is not prop-

erly tightened. It may take a few driv-

ing trips for the message to be

displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-

filler cap properly after the LOOSE

FUEL CAP warning appears may cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to illuminate.

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light does

not turn off after a few driving trips,

have your vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and Controls” sec-

tion in this manual.

∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

NOTE:

Changing ignition switch status during

the refueling process may cause a delay

in fuel gauge response.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-

wise to remove.

2. Loop the tether strap around the hook

䊊

1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

LPD2617

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

message

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message

displays in the trip computer when the

fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly af-

ter the vehicle has been refueled. It may

take a few driving trips for the message to

be displayed. To turn off the warning mes-

sage, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

previously described as soon as pos-

sible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset

button 䊊

Ain the meter for about 1 sec-

ond to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning message after tightening the

fuel-filler cap.

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever 䊊

1down and adjust the

steering wheel up or down 䊊

2to the de-

sired position.

Pull the lock lever 䊊

1up to lock the steering

wheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2025

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2343 LPD2674

STEERING WHEEL

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. To block glare from the front, swing

down the sun visor 䊊

2. To block glare from the side, remove

the sun visor from the center mount

and swing the visor to the side 䊊

3. Slide the sun visor extension 䊊

3in or

out as needed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-

turning the extension to its original

position.

∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcibly downward.

VANITY MIRROR

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun

visor down and flip open the mirror cover.

WPD0315

SPA1733

SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

REARVIEW MIRROR

The night position 䊊

1reduces glare from

the headlights of vehicles behind you at

night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in

daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror

on the passenger side are closer than

they appear. Be careful when moving

to the right. Using only this mirror

could cause an accident. Use the in-

side mirror or glance over your shoul-

der to properly judge distances to

other objects.

∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-

ing. You could lose control of your ve-

hicle and cause an accident.

Electric control type

The outside mirror remote control will op-

erate only when the ignition switch is in the

ACC or ON position.

Move the small switch 䊊

1to select the right

or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de-

sired position using the large switch 䊊

Move the small switch 䊊

1to the center

(neutral) position to prevent accidentally

moving the mirror.

WPD0126

Instrument panel

LPD0237

MIRRORS

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Manual folding outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to

fold it.

LPD2216

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,

audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons ...........................4-2

How to use the touch-screen.................4-3

How to use the MENU button ...........4-5

(brightness control) button .............4-7

How to use the VOL (volume) knob /

PUSH (power)button...................4-7

Selecting menu from launch bar .............4-7

RearView Monitor ...............................4-8

RearView Monitor system operation ..........4-9

How to read the displayed lines..............4-10

Difference between predicted and

actual distances.............................4-10

Adjusting the screen ........................4-12

RearView Monitor system limitations ........4-13

System maintenance........................4-14

Vents...........................................4-14

Heater and air conditioner (manual) ............4-15

Controls .....................................4-16

Heater operation ............................4-17

Air conditioner operation ....................4-18

Air flow charts ...............................4-19

Servicing air conditioner ........................4-23

Audio system...................................4-23

Radio........................................4-23

FM radio reception ..........................4-23

AM radio reception ..........................4-24

Audio operation precautions ................4-24

FM/AM radio.................................4-28

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port.........................................4-33

iPod®* player operation ......................4-36

Bluetooth® streaming audio .................4-39

Steering wheel switch for audio control......4-43

Antenna.....................................4-43

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) ..................4-44

Requirements ...............................4-44

Operating Siri® Eyes Free ....................4-45

Troubleshooting guide ......................4-46

Car phone or CB radio ..........................4-47

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System .........4-47

Regulatory information ......................4-49

Using the system............................4-50

Indicators ...................................4-51

Control buttons .............................4-51

Connecting procedure ......................4-52

Voice commands ...........................4-54

Phone display screen........................4-56

Making a call ................................4-57

Receiving a call ..............................4-58

During a call .................................4-58

Ending a call.................................4-58

Text messaging (if so equipped) .............4-59

Bluetooth® connections screen .............4-63

Phone and text message settings ...........4-64

WARNING

∙ Positioning of the heating or air con-

ditioning controls and display con-

trols should not be done while driving

in order that full attention may be

given to the driving operation.

∙ Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in acci-

dents, fire, or electrical shock.

∙ Do not use this system if you notice

any abnormality, such as a frozen

screen or lack of sound. Continued

use of the system may result in acci-

dent, fire or electric shock.

∙ In case you notice any foreign object

in the system hardware, spill liquid on

it, or notice smoke or smell coming

from it, stop using the system imme-

diately. Ignoring such conditions may

lead to accidents, fire or electrical

shock. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

1. MENU button

2. button*

3. Display screen

4. (brightness control) button

5. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH

(power) button

* For additional information regarding the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

control button, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System” in this section.

LHA4680

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When you use this system, make sure the

engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running for a long time, it will discharge

the battery, and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer

to a key shown only on the display. These

keys can be selected by touching the

screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN

CAUTION

∙ The glass display screen may break if

it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If

the glass screen breaks, do not touch

it. Doing so could result in an injury.

∙ To clean the display, never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Con-

tact with liquid will cause the system

to malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions

cannot be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not avail-

able while driving will be “grayed out” or

muted.

WARNING

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

∙ Avoid using vehicle features that

could distract you. If distracted, you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident. LHA4700

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

Touch-screen operation

Menu Item Result

Selecting the item Touch an item to select. To select the “Phone” key, touch the “Phone” key on the screen. Touch the “ ”keyto

return to the previous screen.

Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one

item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.

Inputting characters Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

123 Touch to manually enter numbers.

OK Completes the character input.

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Touch-screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry,

soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-

sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-

gent with a soft cloth. Never spray the

screen with water or detergent. Dampen

the cloth first and then wipe the screen.

HOW TO USE THE MENU

BUTTON

To select and/or adjust several functions,

features and modes that are available for

your vehicle:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the desired item.

LHA4706 LHA4700

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

Menu item Result

Settings Touch to change the following settings.

Connections Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional information, re-

fer to “USB connections screen” and “Bluetooth® connections screen” in this section.

Phone For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” in this section.

Sound For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

Volume & Beeps For additional information, refer to “Volume & beeps” in this section.

Clock Touch this key to adjust clock settings.

On-screen

Clock

Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

Clock Format Touch to set the clock to 12 hours or 24 hours formats.

Daylight Sav-

ings Time

Touch to adjusts the daylight saving time to on or off.

Set Clock

Manually

Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes.

System Voice For additional information, refer to “Settings” in this section.

Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings.

Others Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear.

Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, refer to “Adjusting the screen” in this

section.

Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.

OSS Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.

Return All Set-

tings To De-

fault

Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

(brightness control) BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press

the button. Pressing the button again

will change the display to the day or the

night display.

Press and hold the button for more

than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press

and hold the button again to turn the dis-

play on.

HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume)

KNOB / PUSH (power)

BUTTON

Press the PUSH (power) button to

turn audio function on and off. Turn the VOL

(volume) knob to adjust audio volume.

SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH

BAR

Various system functions can be accessed

by touching the items on the Launch Bar

䊊

1which is displayed on most of the main

menu screens (the Launch Bar does not

appear on some screens such as Settings

screens, camera screens, etc.)

Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to dis-

play the corresponding menu screens.

The following menu items are available on

the Launch Bar:

∙AM

∙FM

∙ USB/iPod

∙ Bluetooth

∙AUX

∙ Settings

LHA4707

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

LHA4752

REARVIEW MONITOR

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in

serious injury or death.

∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience

feature and is not a substitute for

proper backing. Always turn and look

out the windows and check mirrors to

be sure that it is safe to move before

operating the vehicle. Always back up

slowly.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in showing large stationary

objects directly behind the vehicle, to

help avoid damaging the vehicle.

∙ The distance guide line and the ve-

hicle width line should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

level paved surface. The distance

viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle

and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-

cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when

the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)

position. The radio can still be heard while

the RearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-

tor system uses a camera located next to

the trunk handle 䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

LHA4753

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line 䊊

Aare dis-

played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

∙ Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing

up.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle

width guide line should be used as a refer-

ence only when the vehicle is on a level,

paved surface. The distance viewed on the

monitor is for reference only and may be

different than the actual distance between

the vehicle and displayed objects.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

further than it appears on the monitor.

LHA4754

LHA4755

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill,

the distance guide lines and the vehicle

width guide lines are shown farther than

the actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on the

monitor.

Backing up near a projecting

object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the

object in the display. However, the vehicle

may hit the object if it projects over the

actual backing up course.

LHA4756 LHA4757

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the

position 䊊

Bin the display. However, the po-

sition 䊊

Cis actually at the same distance as

the position 䊊

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position 䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. While on the main menu screen, touch

the “Settings” key.

2. Touch the “Camera” key.

3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,

“Color”, or “Black Level” key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–”

key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings

of the RearView Monitor while the ve-

hicle is moving.

LHA4758

LHA3522

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show

every object.

∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-

ner areas of the bumper cannot be

viewed on the RearView Monitor be-

cause of its monitoring range limita-

tion. The system will not show small

objects below the bumper, and may

not show objects close to the bumper

or on the ground.

∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance be-

cause a wide-angle lens is used.

∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and out-

side mirrors.

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, ve-

hicle position, road conditions and

road grade.

∙ Make sure that the trunk is securely

closed when backing up.

∙ Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

∙ When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing

water condensation on the lens, a

malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may

malfunction or cause damage result-

ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not clearly

display objects.

∙ When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on

the screen. This is due to strong re-

flected light from the bumper.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

∙ The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from the

actual color of objects.

∙ Objects on the monitor may not be

clear in a dark environment.

∙ There may be a delay when switching

between views.

∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the

camera, RearView Monitor may not dis-

play objects clearly. Clean the camera.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera 䊊

1, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera

by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-

ing it with a dry cloth.

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by

opening, closing or rotating.

LHA4753

Side vents

SAA3126

VENTS

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by

moving the slide as indicated 䊊

WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

NOTE:

∙Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air condi-

tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-

senger compartment through the

vents.

∙When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air re-

circulation to allow fresh air into the

passenger compartment. This should

help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

Center vents

LHA2085

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual)

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

1. Rear window defroster switch

2. Fan control dial

3. Air conditioner button

4. Temperature control dial

5. Air intake lever ( air recircula-

tion and fresh air)

6. Air flow control dial

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on

and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select

the air flow outlets.

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets

and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to

adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To

lower the temperature, turn the dial to the

left. To increase the temperature, turn the

dial to the right.

Fresh air

Move the air intake lever to the posi-

tion. The air flow is drawn from outside the

vehicle.

Air recirculation

Move the air intake lever to the posi-

tion to recirculate air inside the vehicle.

Use the selection:

∙ when driving on a dusty road.

∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering

passenger compartment.

∙ for maximum cooling when using the

air conditioner.

LHA5759

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to

the desired position and press the

button to turn on the air conditioner. The

indicator light comes on when the air con-

ditioner is operating. To turn off the air con-

ditioner, press the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window defroster switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to

the foot outlets. Some air also flows from

the defrost outlets.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position for normal heating.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side

and center vents.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost

outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the

windows, turn the fan control dial

to the maximum position and the tem-

perature control dial to the full hot posi-

tion.

When the or position is se-

lected, press the button to turn on

the air conditioner for better performance.

This will dehumidify the air and help defog

the windows.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

NOTE:

Side vents should direct air flow towards

the front side windows to improve de-

fogging performance.

Bi-level heating

This mode directs cooler air from the side

and center vents and warmer air from the

floor outlets. When the temperature con-

trol dial is moved to the full hot or full cool

position, the air between the vents and the

floor outlets is the same temperature.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs

the windshield.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

When the or position is se-

lected, press the button to turn on

the air conditioner for better performance.

This will dehumidify the air and help defog

the windows.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield.

This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control

dial to the desired position, and press

the button to activate the air condi-

tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cool-

ing and dehumidifying functions are

added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify

the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Press the button. The indicator

light comes on.

LHA3765

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

∙ For quick cooling when the outside

temperature is high, move the air intake

lever to the position. Be sure to re-

turn to the position for normal

cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify

the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Press the button. The indicator

light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows

and dehumidify the air.

1. Move the air intake lever to the

position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to

the position.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Operating tips

∙ Keep the windows closed while the air

conditioner is in operation.

∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or

3 minutes with the windows open to

vent hot air from the passenger com-

partment. Then, close the windows.

This allows the air conditioner to cool

the interior more quickly.

∙The air conditioning system should

be operated for approximately

10 minutes at least once a month.

This helps prevent damage to the

system due to lack of lubrication.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from

the ventilators in hot, humid conditions

as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

∙If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and

dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK

heating, cooling or defrosting. The air in-

take lever should always be in the

position for heating and defrosting.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

LHA5760 LHA5761

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

LHA5762 LHA5763

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

LHA5764

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-

signed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the

earth’s ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant

is required when servicing your NISSAN air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or

lubricants will cause severe damage to

your air conditioner system. For additional

information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-

tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer to service your “environmentally

friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper

equipment.

RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the PUSH button

to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio

with the engine not running, the ignition

switch should be placed in the ACC posi-

tion.

Radio reception is affected by station sig-

nal strength, distance from radio transmit-

ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other

external influences. Intermittent changes

in reception quality normally are caused by

these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception qual-

ity.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-

hance radio reception. These circuits are

designed to extend reception range, and to

enhance the quality of that reception.

However, there are some general charac-

teristics of both FM and AM radio signals

that can affect radio reception quality in a

moving vehicle, even when the finest

equipment is used. These characteristics

are completely normal in a given reception

area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly

change because of vehicle movement.

Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter-

ference from other vehicles can work

against ideal reception. Described below

are some of the factors that can affect your

radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –

30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range

than stereo FM. External influences may

sometimes interfere with FM station re-

ception even if the FM station is within 25

mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between

the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol-

low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of

the same characteristics as light. For ex-

ample, they will reflect off objects.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

from a station transmitter, the signals will

tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-

ence from buildings, large hills or due to

antenna position (usually in conjunction

with increased distance from the station

transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.

This can be reduced by adjusting the treble

control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-

tive characteristics of FM signals,direct and

reflected signals reach the receiver at the

same time. The signals may cancel each

other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss

of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency,

can bend around objects and skip along

the ground. In addition, the signals can be

bounced off the ionosphere and bent back

to earth. Because of these characteristics,

AM signals are also subject to interference

as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas

with many tall buildings. It can also occur

for several seconds during ionospheric tur-

bulence even in areas where no obstacles

exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic

lights.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

MP3 or WMA terms

∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital

audio file format. This format allows for

near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction

of the size of normal audio files. MP3

conversion of an audio track from CD-

ROM can reduce the file size by approxi-

mately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no per-

ceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant

and irrelevant parts of a sound signal

that the human ear doesn’t hear.

∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is

a compressed audio format created by

Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The

WMA codec offers greater file compres-

sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor-

age of more digital audio tracks in the

same amount of space when com-

pared to MP3s at the same level of qual-

ity.

∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number

of bits per second used by a digital mu-

sic file. The size and quality of a com-

pressed digital audio file is determined

by the bit rate used when encoding the

file.

∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-

quency is the rate at which the samples

of a signal are converted from analog to

digital (A/D conversion) per second.

∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of

the methods for writing data to media.

Writing data once to the media is called

a single session, and writing more than

once is called a multisession.

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file

that contains information about the

digital music file such as song title, art-

ist, encoding bit rate, track time dura-

tion, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed

on the Artist/song title line on the dis-

play.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-

istered trademarks and trademarks in the

United States of America and other coun-

tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-

vice. USB devices should be purchased

separately as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB

devices. To format a USB device, use a per-

sonal computer.

In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the

front seats plays only sound without im-

ages for regulatory reasons, even when the

vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB

memory devices, USB hard drives and

iPod® players. Some USB devices may not

be supported by this system.

∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play

correctly.

∙ Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may

not appear properly in the display. Using

English language characters with a USB

device is recommended.

General notes for USB use:

∙ For additional information, refer to your

device manufacturer’s owner informa-

tion regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

Notes for iPod® use:

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may

cause a checkmark to be displayed on

and off (flickering). Always make sure

that the iPod® is connected properly.

∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-

main in fast forward or rewind mode if it

is connected during a seek operation. In

this case, please manually reset the

iPod®.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will

continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

∙ An incorrect song title may appear

when the Play Mode is changed while

using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).

∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same

order as they appear on an iPod®.

∙ Large video files cause slow responses

in an iPod®. The vehicle center display

may momentarily black out, but will

soon recover.

∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large

video files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle center display may momen-

tarily black out, but will soon recover.

iPod®* player

∙ Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not

displayed properly on the vehicle center

screen. We recommend using English

or Spanish language characters with an

iPod®.

∙ Large video podcast files cause slow

responses in the iPod®. The vehicle cen-

ter display may momentarily black out,

but it will soon recover.

∙ If the iPod® automatically selects large

video podcast files while in the shuffle

mode, the vehicle center display may

momentarily black out, but it will soon

recover.

∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may

cause a checkmark to be displayed on

and off (flickering). Always make sure

that the iPod® is connected properly.

∙ The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will

continue to fast forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

∙ An incorrect song title may appear

when the Play Mode is changed while

using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation).

∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same

order as they appear on the iPod®.

∙ The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may

remain in fast forward or rewind mode if

it is connected during a seek operation.

In this case, please manually reset the

iPod®.

∙ If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation

with Dock connector), do not use very

long names for the song title, album

name or artist name to prevent the

iPod® from resetting itself.

∙ Be careful not to do the following, or the

cable could be damaged and a loss of

function may occur:

∙ Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in

(40 mm) radius maximum).

∙ Twist the cable excessively (more

than 180 degrees).

∙ Pull or drop the cable.

∙ Do not force the iPod® cable connec-

tor into the device port.

∙ Close the center console lid on the

cable or connectors.

∙ Store objects with sharp edges in the

storage where the cable is stored.

∙ Spill liquids on the cable and connec-

tors.

∙ Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if

the cable and/or connectors are wet. It

may damage the iPod®.

∙ If the cable and connectors are ex-

posed to water, allow the cable and/or

connectors to dry completely before

connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait

24 hours for it to dry).

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ If the connector is exposed to fluids

other than water, evaporative residue

may cause a short between the con-

nector pins. In this case, replace the

cable, otherwise damage to the iPod®

and a loss of function may occur.

∙ If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,

connectors cracked, contamination

such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the con-

nectors), do not use the cable. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer to replace the cable with a new

one.

∙ When not in use for extended periods of

time, store the cable in a clean, dust free

environment at room temperature and

without direct sun exposure.

∙ Do not use the cable for any other pur-

poses other than its intended use in the

vehicle.

*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Bluetooth® streaming audio

∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may

not be recognized by the in-vehicle au-

dio system.

∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless

connection between a compatible

Bluetooth® audio device and the in-

vehicle Bluetooth® module before using

the Bluetooth® audio.

∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®

audio will vary depending on the de-

vices. Make sure how to operate your

audio device before using it with this

system.

∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped

under the following conditions:

∙ Receiving a call on the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

∙ Checking the connection to the

hands-free phone.

∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio de-

vice in an area surrounded by metal or

far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®

module to prevent tone quality degra-

dation and wireless connection disrup-

tion.

∙ While an audio device is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the device

may discharge quicker than usual.

∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®

Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

FM/AM RADIO

1. MENU button

2. AUDIO button

3. Display screen

4. /(SEEK/TRACK) buttons

5. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH

(power) button

For additional information, refer to “Audio

operation precautions” regarding all opera-

tion precautions in this section.

Audio main operation

VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power)

button

Place the ignition switch in the ON position

and press the PUSH (power) button

while the system is off to call up the mode

(radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®)

that was playing immediately before the

system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the

PUSH (power) button.

Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed

Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-

tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-

ing speed changes.

MENU button

Press the MENU button to show the

Menu screen. Touch the “Settings” key on

the display, then touch the “Sound” key.

LHA4672

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Sound Settings

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and

right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear

speakers.

Speed Sensitive Volume Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system

as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting,

the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching “-” or “+” keys.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

Audio button

Push to display the audio screen. When this

button is pushed while the audio screen is

not displayed, the last audio source played

will play.

AM/FM radio screen

1. “AM Menu” / “FM Menu” key

Touch to display the radio menu

screen.

2. Direct Tune

Touch to manually enter a station.

3. Audio source indicator

Indicates the currently selected audio

source.

4. Reception information display

Reception information currently avail-

able such as frequency, station name,

etc. is displayed.

5. Preset list

To listen to a preset station, touch the

corresponding station from the preset

list. If displayed, touch the “<”or“>”keys

to scroll the preset list.

AM radio operation

Press the MENU button and touch the

“AM” key or press the AUDIO button and

select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar

to bring up the AM display screen.

If another audio source is playing when the

“AM” key is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the

last radio station played will begin playing.

AM Menu

Touch the “AM Menu” key to display the AM

Menu screen options:

∙ SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the

“AM Menu” key on the radio screen and

then touch the “SCAN” key. The stations

will be tuned from low to high frequen-

cies and stop at each broadcasting sta-

tion for several seconds. Touching the

“SCAN” key again during this period of

several seconds will stop tuning and the

radio will remain tuned to that station.

LHA4708

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to scan

and update the station list displayed on

the right side of the AM Menu screen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons

Press the or buttons to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Up to six stations can be registered in the

preset list.

1. Select the AM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset num-

bers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will be

displayed on the preset list.

To select and listen to the preset stations,

push on the steering wheel briefly or

touch a preferred station on the preset list

on the radio screen.

FM radio operation

Press the MENU button and touch the

“FM Menu” key or press the AUDIO button

and select FM on the bottom of the Launch

Bar to bring up the FM display screen.

If another audio source is playing when the

“FM” key is pressed, the audio source play-

ing will automatically be turned off and the

last radio station played will begin playing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown

on the screen during FM stereo reception.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,

the radio automatically changes from ste-

reo to monaural reception.

FM Menu

Touch the “FM” Menu key to display the FM

Menu screen options:

∙ SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touch

the “FM Menu” key on the radio screen

and then touch the “SCAN” key. The sta-

tions will be tuned from low to high fre-

quencies and stop at each broadcast-

ing stations for several seconds.

Touching the “SCAN” key again during

this period of several seconds will stop

tuning and the radio will remain tuned

to that station.

∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to up-

date the station list displayed on the

right side of the FM Menu screen.

∙ RDS Info: Radio station and song infor-

mation can be displayed on the FM dis-

play screen.

(SEEK/TRACK) buttons

Press the or buttons to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting sta-

tion.

1 to 12 Station memory operations

Up to 12 stations can be registered in the

preset list.

1. Select the FM radio band.

2. Tune to the station you wish to store.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset num-

bers in the preset list.

The information such as frequency will be

displayed on the preset list.

To select and listen to the preset stations,

push on the steering wheel briefly or

touch a preferred station on the preset list

on the radio screen.

Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation

Connecting auxiliary devices

Connect an AUX device into the AUX input

jack located on the center console below

the heater and air conditioner controls.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31

The AUX input jack accepts any standard

analog audio input such as from a portable

cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or

phone.

Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in

the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono

plug is used, the audio output may not

function normally.

Activation and playing

Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX

cable to the AUX device and the AUX input

jack. Select AUX mode from the audio

source menu screen or by pressing the

Source button on the steering wheel.

AUX screen

∙ Audio source indicator

Indicates that the AUX source is cur-

rently playing.

∙ “Volume Setting” keys

Touch one of the keys to select the

sound output gain from Low, Medium

and High.

∙ AUX from Launch Bar

Touch to change from another source

to AUX.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod®

player operation” in this section regarding

the iPod® player available with this system.

For additional information, refer to “USB

(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port” in

this section regarding the USB connection

port available with this system.

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® streaming audio” in this sec-

tion about the Bluetooth® audio interface

available with this system.

Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of

Labeling

Additional Obligation of Labeling

This product is protected by certain intel-

lectual property rights of Microsoft

Corporation and third parties. Use or distri-

bution of such technology outside of this

product is prohibited without a license

from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft

subsidiary and third parties.

LHA4709

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT

Connecting a device to the USB

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ To avoid damage and loss of function

when using a USB device, note the fol-

lowing precautions.

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB port is located on the center con-

sole beneath the heater and air condi-

tioner controls. Insert the USB device into

the connection port.

When a compatible storage device is

plugged into the connection port, compat-

ible audio files on the storage device can be

played through the vehicle’s audio system.

The port is illuminated for better visibility

when the headlight switch is in the ON po-

sition.

LHA4458

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

USB connections screen

Press the MENU button and touch the

“Connections” key or press the “Settings”

key and touch the “Connections” key to

change USB settings.

∙ Auto Change Source

Touch “ON” or “OFF” to change the audio

source settings for USB memory de-

vices or an iPod® connected through a

USB cable.

USB screen

1. “USB Menu” key

Touch to switch to the USB Menu

screen.

2. Track information

Track information such as the song

name, artist name and album name

are displayed.

3. Audio source indicator

Indicates the currently selected audio

source.

4. USB operation keys

Touch to control USB playback functions

5. Play time and progress bar

The play time of the track is displayed.

The bar indicates the progress in play-

ing a track.

USB operation keys

Touch to control USB playback functions.

Keys Description

Each time “ ”keyis

touched, the repeat mode

changes.

Touch to return to the be-

ginning of the current track.

Touch again to select the

previous track. Touch and

hold to rewind the current

track.

Touch to play the track.

Touch to pause the track.

Touch to select the next

track. Touch and hold to

fast-forward the track.

Each time “ ”keyis

touched, the random mode

changes.

LHA4711 LHA4710

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

USB memory device player

operation

Activation and playing

Connecting the USB memory device into

the port will start playing the USB memory.

USB memory device can also be played by

touching the “USB” key on the Menu screen

or by touching USB on the Launch Bar.

To pause playing the USB memory device

touch the “ ” key. To resume playing,

touch the “ ”key.

Skipping tracks

To skip the tracks, push the or

buttons on the control panel or touch the

“”or“ ” keys on the screen repeat-

edly until the preferred track is selected.

NOTE:

Depending on the condition, skipping to

the previous track may require pushing

the button or touching the key twice.

Pushing the button or touching the key

once may only restart the current track

from the beginning.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding

To rewind or fast-forward the track, push

and hold the or buttons on the

control panel or touch and hold the “ ”

or “ ” keys on the screen.

Changing play mode

Repeat mode

Touch the “ ” key on the USB screen to

change the repeat mode.

The following modes are available:

No text displayed: Repeat off

All: Repeat all

1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder

1 Track: Repeat track

Random mode

Touch the “ ” key on the screen to

change the random mode as follows:

No text displayed: Random off

Random: Random play

All: Repeat all

1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder

USB menu

Touch the “USB Menu” key on the USB

screen to display the USB Menu screen.

“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB

screen.

“Folder List” key Touch to display the folder

list. Touch an item on the list

to select the folder. The sub-

folder or track list will be

displayed. Select a sub-folder

or track from the list.

“Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the al-

bum artwork display on the

USB screen.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that

the iPod® can be controlled with the audio

system controls and display screen, use

the USB connection port located on the

center console below the heater and air

conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®-

specific end of the cable to the iPod® and

the USB end of the cable to the USB con-

nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®

supports charging via a USB connection, its

battery will be charged while connected to

the vehicle with the ignition switch in the

ON position. The port is illuminated for bet-

ter visibility when the headlight switch is in

the ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®

can only be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,

remove the USB end of the cable from the

USB connection port on the vehicle, then

remove the cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware

version 1.3.0 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware

version 2.0.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware

version 2.0.4 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware

version 4.2.1 or later)*

LHA4458

4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware

version 1.3.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware

version 1.0.4 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware

version 1.0.2 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware

version 1.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or

later)

∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or

later)

∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod® may not be

fully functional.

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-

dated to the version indicated above.

iPod screen

1. “iPod Menu” key

Touch to switch to the iPod Menu screen.

2. Track information

Track information such as the song

name, artist name and album name

are displayed.

3. Audio source indicator

Indicates the currently selected audio

source.

4. Album artwork

An image of the album artwork is dis-

played when available if the setting is

turned on.

LHA4724

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37

5. iPod® operation keys

Touch to control iPod® playback functions

6. Play time and progress bar

The play time of the track is displayed.

The bar indicates the progress in play-

ing a track.

iPod® operation keys

Touch to control iPod® playback functions.

Keys Description

Each time “ ”keyis

touched, the repeat mode

changes.

Touch to return to the be-

ginning of the current track.

Touch again to select the

previous track. Touch and

hold to rewind the current

track.

Touch to play the track.

Touch to pause the track.

Touch to select the next

track. Touch and hold to

fast-forward the track.

Each time “ ”keyis

touched, the random mode

changes.

iPod® memory device player

operation

Activation and playing

Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB

cable will activate the iPod® mode.

The iPod® can also be played by touching

the “iPod” key on the Menu screen or by

touching iPod on the Launch Bar.

Skipping tracks

To skip the tracks, push the or

buttons on the control panel or touch the

“”or“ ” keys on the screen repeat-

edly until the preferred track is selected.

NOTE:

Depending on the condition, skipping to

the previous track may require pushing

the button or touching the key twice.

Pushing the button or touching the key

once may only restart the current track

from the beginning.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding

To rewind or fast-forward the track, push

and hold the or buttons on the

control panel or touch and hold the “ ”

or “ ” keys on the screen,

Changing play mode

Repeat mode

Touch the “ ” key on the iPod® screen

to change the repeat mode. The following

modes are available.

No text displayed: Repeat off

All: Repeat all

One: Repeat track

Random mode

Touch the “ ” key on the screen to

change the random mode as follows.

No text displayed: Random off

Songs: Random play

4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

iPod® Menu

Touch the “iPod Menu” key on the iPod®

screen to display the iPod® Menu screen.

“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB

screen.

“Folder List” key

(if so equipped)

Touch to display the folder

list. Touch an item on the list

to select the folder. The sub-

folder or track list will be

displayed. Select a sub-folder

or track from the list.

“Album Artwork”

key

Touch to run on/off the al-

bum artwork display on the

USB screen.

“Playlists” key Touch to display the list ac-

cording to the selected item.

“Artists” key

“Albums” key

“Songs” key

“Podcasts” key

“Genres” key

“Composers” key

“Audiobooks” key

“iTunes Radio”

key

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio

device that is capable of playing audio files,

the device can be connected to the vehi-

cle’s audio system so that the audio files on

the device play through the vehicle’s

speakers. For additional information, refer

to “FM/AM radio” in this section.

NOTE:

For additional information, refer to the

cellular phone Owner’s Manual.

Connecting procedure

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

LHA4726

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System:

Manual Connecting Procedure

1. Press the MENU button on the

control panel.

2. Touch the “Connections” key on the

screen.

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add

New” key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found a

message with a PIN appears on the

screen.

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the

connection.

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.

ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.

Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.

PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Automatic Connecting Procedure

If no phone is connected to the system,

press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.

After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the

system will announce “transferring to the

add phone settings menu”. The system will

start the pairing procedure. When a com-

patible phone is found, a message with a

PIN appears on the screen. Operate the

Bluetooth® phone to complete the con-

nection process. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Bluetooth® connections

screen” in this section.

Bluetooth® screen

1. “BT Menu” key

Depending on the Bluetooth® version

supported by the connected device, ei-

ther the “BT Menu” key or “Connections”

key is displayed.

2. Track information

Track information such as the song

name, artist name and album name

are displayed.

3. Audio source indicator

Indicates the currently selected audio

source.

4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys

Touch to control Bluetooth® audio

playback functions

5. Play time and progress bar

The play time of the track is displayed.

The bar indicates the progress in play-

ing a track.

Bluetooth® operation keys

Touch to control Bluetooth® playback

functions.

Keys Description

Each time “ ”keyis

touched, the repeat mode

changes.

Touch to return to the begin-

ning of the current track. Touch

again to select the previous

track. Touch and hold to rewind

the current track.

Touch to play the track.

Touch to pause the track.

Touch to select the next track.

Touch and hold to fast-forward

the track.

Each time “ ”keyis

touched, the random mode

changes.

LHA4727

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41

Bluetooth® audio operation

The ability to pause, change tracks, fast

forward, rewind, randomize and repeat

music may be different between devices.

Some or all of these functions may not be

supported on each device.

NOTE:

Depending on the Bluetooth® audio de-

vice that is connected, it may not be pos-

sible to perform audio operations or a

delay may occur before music is played

back.

Activation and playing

A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by

touching the “Bluetooth” key on the Menu

screen or by touching Bluetooth on the

Launch Bar.

To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio,

touch the “ ” key. Touch the “ ”key

to resume playing.

Changing folders

To change folders, touch the “BT Menu” key.

Fast-forwarding/rewinding

To fast-forward or rewind the track, push

and hold the or buttons on the

control panel or touch the “ ”or“ ”

keys on the screen.

Changing play mode

Repeat mode

Touch the “ ” key on the screen to

change the repeat mode.

Random mode

Touch the “ ” on the screen to change

the random mode.

NOTE:

Available repeat/random modes change

depending on the connected device.

BT Menu

Touch the “BT Menu” key on the Bluetooth®

audio screen to display the Bluetooth® au-

dio menu screen.

The following items are available.

“Now Playing” key Touch to display the

Bluetooth® audio screen.

“Current List” key (if so

equipped)*

A list of track in the cur-

rently selected folder is

displayed.

“Connections” key Touch to display the

connections screen.

“Folder List” key* Touch to display the

folder list. Touch an item

on the list to select the

folder.

*: displayed only when available.

NOTE:

Depending on the connected device, the

“BT Menu” key may not be displayed.

4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using

the controls on the steering wheel.

1. SOURCE switch

2. Tuning switch

3. Volume control switch

SOURCE switch

Push the SOURCE switch to change the

mode in the following sequence:

AM →FM →USB/iPod®*→Bluetooth® Au-

dio* →AUX* →AM.

* These modes are only available when

compatible media storage is inserted into

the device or connected to the system.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down

to increase or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

For most audio sources, pushing the tun-

ing switches for more than 1.5 seconds

provides a different function than pressing

for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM:

∙ Push the switch for less than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

preset station.

∙ Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the

next station.

iPod®:

∙ Push the switch for less than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

track number.

USB:

∙ Push the switch for less than

1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the

track number.

∙ Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward

the current song.

Bluetooth® Audio:

∙ Push the switch for less than

1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the

next song.

∙ Push the switch for more than

1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward

the current song.

ANTENNA

The antenna cannot be shortened, but can

be removed. When you need to remove the

antenna, turn the antenna rod counter-

clockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna

rod clockwise and hand tighten.

LHA2054

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43

CAUTION

∙ Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation or the antenna

rod may break during vehicle

operation.

∙ Be sure that the antenna is removed

before the vehicle enters an auto-

matic car wash.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant

can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes

Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free

mode to reduce user distraction. In this

mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac-

tion by voice control. After connecting a

compatible Apple device by using

Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated

from the button on the steering

wheel.

Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered

in the U.S. and other countries.

∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as

displaying pictures or opening apps,

may not be available while driving.

∙ For getting best results, always update

your device to the latest software ver-

sion.

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to elimi-

nate the surrounding noises (traffic

noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which

may prevent the system from recogniz-

ing the voice commands correctly.

∙ For functions that can be used in Siri

Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple

website.

REQUIREMENTS

Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or

later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S

are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free sys-

tem. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for de-

tails about device compatibility.

Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please

check phone settings.

If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be

accessible from the lock screen. Please

check phone settings.

For best results, always update your device

to the latest software version.

SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)

4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE

1. Push button for less than 1.5 sec-

onds.

2. Speak your command and then listen

to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.

After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the

button again within 5 seconds of the end of

the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend

the session.

Example 1 – Playing music

1. Push button for less than 1.5 sec-

onds.

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name,

etc.)”.

3. Your vehicle will automatically change

to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*

when the music starts playing. Mode

selection is determined by the phone.

* If the iPhone® is also connected with the

USB cable.

If the audio track does not start playing

automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try

changing the track or audio source to re-

sume playback.

NOTE:

For best results, use the native music

app. Performance of music control func-

tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook or

other 3rd party music apps may vary and

is controlled by the iPhone®.

Example2–Replying to text messages

1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected

and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®

settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis-

play a notification for new incoming

text messages.

2. After reading the message, push or

push and hold the button to reply

using Siri Eyes Free.

3. After a beep sounds, say “Text mes-

sage” or a similar command to reply

using Siri Eyes Free.

LHA4747

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri Eyes

Freefromswitchonthe

steering wheel

Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.

Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.

Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.

Audio Source does not

change automatically to

iPod® or Bluetooth® Au-

dio mode

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party

music apps may vary.

For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade

performance.

Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the

steering wheel.

Play, pause, next track,

previous track or play

timer does not work

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party

music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

Cannot hear any music/

audio being played back

from a connected

iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot receive text mes-

sage notifications on the

vehicle audio system

Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.

Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.

Cannot reply to text

message notifications by

Siri Eyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push the button for 1.5 seconds on the steering wheel

for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.

4-46 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When installing a CB, ham radio or car

phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe

the following precautions; otherwise, the

new equipment may adversely affect the

engine control system and other electronic

parts.

WARNING

∙ A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle op-

eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit

the use of cellular phones while

driving.

∙ If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode (if so

equipped) is highly recommended.

Exercise extreme caution at all times

so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route

the antenna wire next to any harness.

∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the

manufacturer.

∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

∙ For additional information, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full at-

tention may be given to vehicle

operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-

tery, use a phone after starting the

engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47

Your NISSAN is equipped with the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If

you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone

call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to

the in-vehicle phone module, no other

phone connecting procedure is required.

Your phone is automatically connected

with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or

ON position with the previously connected

cellular phone turned on and carried in the

vehicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

connections to other Bluetooth® de-

vices. If your phone does not connect au-

tomatic ally to the system, consult the

phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on

device operation.

You can connect up to six different

Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-

vehicle phone module. However, you can

talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes.

∙ Set up the wireless connection be-

tween a compatible cellular phone and

the in-vehicle phone module before us-

ing the hands-free phone system.

LHA4748

4-48 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized or work

properly. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting in-

structions.

∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal;

such as in a tunnel, in an under-

ground parking garage, near a tall

building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-

vent it from being dialed.

∙ When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other per-

son’s voice during a call.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle phone module to

prevent tone quality degradation and

wireless connection disruption.

∙ While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the cellu-

lar phone may discharge quicker than

usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System cannot charge cellular

phones.

∙ Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a differ-

ent location may reduce or eliminate

the noise.

∙ For additional information, refer to the

cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard-

ing the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-

tenna, modification, or attachments

could damage the transmitter and may

violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference

and

2. this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-

lations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49

USING THE SYSTEM

The system allows hands-free operation of

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands

may not be available so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSANVoice Recognition is initial-

ized, which takes a few seconds. If the

button is pressed before the initialization

completes, the system will announce

“There is no phone connected” and will not

react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the

NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe

the following:

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Keep all vents pointed away

from the microphone and close the

windows to eliminate surrounding

noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds,

etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands cor-

rectly.

∙ Wait until the tone sounds before

speaking a command. Otherwise, the

command will not be received properly.

∙ Start speaking a command within

5 seconds after the tone sounds.

∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

∙ For calling contacts by name, please

say both the first and last name of the

contact for better recognition.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,

press the button located on the

steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.

After the tone sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the

microphone, and voice feedback is given

when the command is accepted.

∙ If a command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Please say or se-

lect a command from the displayed list.”

Make sure the command is said exactly

as prompted by the system and repeat

the command in a clear voice.

∙ If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or

“Correction” any time the system is

waiting for a response.

∙ You can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by say-

ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-

nounces “Exit” and ends the Voice Rec-

ognition session. You can also press

and hold the button on the steer-

ing wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to

end the Voice Recognition session.

Whenever the Voice Recognition ses-

sion is canceled, a double beep is

played to indicate you have exited the

system.

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the

voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume

control switches on the steering wheel

while being provided with feedback. You

can also use the radio volume control

knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the button on the steering

wheel. After interrupting the system, wait

for a beep before speaking your command.

4-50 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

INDICATORS

When a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-

tion, indicators 䊊

1for the phone and text

messaging are displayed on the top of the

screen.

Indicator Description

Indicates there are un-

read received

messages.

Indicates the

Bluetooth® device that

is currently connected.

Indicates the strength

of the signal the

Bluetooth® device is

receiving.

Indicates the amount

of remaining

Bluetooth® device

battery.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System are located on

the steering wheel.

LHA4723 LHA4747

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51

VOICE COMMAND BUTTON

Press and hold the but-

ton for more than 1.5 seconds

to initiate the Voice Recogni-

tion session. To exit the Voice

Recognition session press

and hold the for more

than 1.5 seconds. For addi-

tional information, refer to

“Voice prompt interrupt” in

this section.

You can use the button

to interrupt the system feed-

back and give a command at

once.

If an iPhone® is connected,

Siri® can be accessed by

pressing the button for

less than two seconds. For

additional information, refer

to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this

section.

PHONE BUTTON

To answer an incoming call or

to end a call press

the button.

To reject a call press and hold

the button.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

LHA4726

4-52 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System:

Manual Connecting Procedure

1. Press the MENU button on the

control panel.

2. Touch the “Connections” key on the

screen.

3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add

New” key to connect a phone.

4. When a compatible phone is found a

message with a PIN appears on the

screen.

5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the

connection.

6. To access the Bluetooth® settings

menu touch the “ ” key on the Con-

nections screen. The following options

are available:

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.

ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.

Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.

PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53

NOTE:

Some cellular phones may require you to

accept certain permissions in order to

enable features on your Bluetooth® sys-

tem. During the Bluetooth® pairing pro-

cess, please check your cellular phone’s

display for a pop-up with the request to

grant phonebook access.

Granting phonebook access permission

will allow your contacts to be down-

loaded to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® sys-

tem. A pop-up may display on your cellu-

lar phone stating that the contacts and

call history. Please select “Allow” or Yes”

to grant this permission.

Automatic Connecting Procedure

If no phone is connected to the system,

press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.

After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the

system will announce “transferring to the

add phone settings menu”. The system will

start the pairing procedure. When a com-

patible phone is found, a message with a

PIN appears on the screen. Operate the

Bluetooth® phone to complete the con-

nection process. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Bluetooth® connections

screen” in this section.

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Press and hold the button for more

than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone

command menu. The commands avail-

able are:

∙ Call <name>

∙ Dial <number>

∙ Recent Calls

∙ Read/Send Text (if so equipped)

∙ Siri® (if so equipped)

∙ Voice Assistant (if so equipped)

∙ Phonebook

∙ Quick Dial

∙ Redial

∙ Select Phone

∙ Add Phone

∙ Call <name> Mobile

∙ Call <name> Home

∙ Call <name> Office

∙ Call <name> Main

∙ Call <name> Other

∙ Settings

“Call <name>”

Speak this command to make a call to a

contact that is stored in the phonebook.

Say “Call” followed by a phonebook name to

initiate a call. If the system does not recog-

nize the name it will display a list of similar

names. After the prompt, speak or touch

an item number from the displayed list to

place the call.

“Dial <number>”

Speak this command to make a call with a

spoken phone number. After the prompt,

say “Dial” followed by a 7 to 10 digit phone

number. The system will repeat the num-

ber back. Say “Dial” to initiate the call or

“Correction” to re-enter the phone number.

4-54 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

“Recent Calls”

The following commands are available un-

der “Recent Calls”:

∙ Incoming Calls

Speak this command to list the last

20 incoming calls to the vehicle. If the

call is from an entry in the phonebook,

the name will be displayed. Otherwise,

the phone number of the incoming call

will be displayed.

When prompted, speak or touch the

item number on the screen to place the

call. Select the “Next” key to move

through the list of incoming calls.

∙ Outgoing Calls

Speak this command to list the last 20

outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the

call was to an entry in the phonebook,

the name will be displayed. Otherwise,

the phone number of the outgoing call

will be displayed.

When prompted, speak or touch the

item number on the screen to place the

call. Select the “Next” key to move

through the list of outgoing calls.

∙ Missed Calls

Speak this command to list the last 20

missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the missed call will be

displayed.

When prompted, speak or touch the

item number on the screen to place the

call. Select the “Next” key to move

through the list of missed calls.

“Read Text/Send Text” (if so

equipped)

Speak this command to access text mes-

saging functions. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this sec-

tion.

“Phonebook through voice

command”

Speak “Phonebook” to view a list of quick

steps to access entries stored in the

phonebook. Commands are organized by

the phone number type selected in the cel-

lular device. For additional information, re-

fer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual.

The following commands are available:

∙ <Say a Contact Name>

∙ <Say a Contact Name> Main

∙ <Say a Contact Name> Home

∙ <Say a Contact Name> Mobile

∙ <Say a Contact Name> Office

∙ <Say a Contact Name> Other

For additional information on manually se-

lecting phonebook entries, refer to “Making

a call” in this section.

“Quick dial”

Speak this command to access the Quick

dial menu. After the prompt, speak or se-

lect an item number on the displayed list to

place the call. For additional information,

refer to “Making a call” in this section.

“Redial”

Speak this command to call the last num-

ber dialed. After the prompt, say “Redial” to

dial the number of the last outgoing call.

The system will display “Redialing

<name/number>”. The name of the

phonebook entry will be displayed if it is

available, otherwise the number being re-

dialed will be displayed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55

“Select Phone”

Speak this command to access the Con-

nections menu. For additional information,

refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in

this section.

“Add Phone”

Speak this command to access the Con-

nections menu. For additional information,

refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in

this section.

“Settings”

Speak this command to access the Sys-

tem Voice settings menu. The system will

exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of

the following options on the screen to

change the settings.

∙ Beep Only for Opening Prompt

By touching the “ON” key, the indicator

light will illuminate, the system voice will

turn off and only a tone will sound when

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem is activated. To turn the system

voice back on, touch the “ON” key again,

the indicator light will turn off.

∙ Best Match List

When the system doesn’t recognize a

phonebook name it will provide a list of

similar sounding names. To turn this off,

touch the “ON” button, the indicator

light will turn off. To turn on, touch the

“ON” key again, the indicator light will

turn on.

PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN

The Phone screen can be displayed by

pressing the button on the control

panel.

The following options are displayed:

∙ Quick Dial

Displays the Quick Dial screen. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Quick dial” in

this section.

∙ Phonebook

Displays the Phonebook screen. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Making a

call” in this section.

LHA4705

4-56 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

∙ Call History

Displays the Call History screen. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Making a

call” in this section.

∙ Dial Number

Displays the Dial Number screen. For

additional information, refer to “Making

a call” in this section.

∙ Text Message

Displays the received message screen.

For additional information, refer to “Text

messaging” in this section.

∙ Connections

Displays the Connections screen. For

additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® connections screen” in this

section.

∙ Volume

Displays the volume adjustment

screen. For additional information, refer

to “Volume & beeps” in this section.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call press the button on

the control panel. Touch an option from

menu screen:

∙ Phonebook

Select a person and the phone number

you wish to call from the phonebook.

Depending on the device, the phone-

book will be downloaded from the cel-

lular phone automatically when it is

connected. If the automatic download

does not take place, the phone number

must be transferred to the hands-free

phone system from the cellular phone

prior to using this method. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Phone and

text message settings” in this section.

∙ Call History

Select a phonebook name or phone

number from the recent incoming, out-

going or missed calls tabs. Touch a

phonebook name or phone number

listed to initiate the call.

∙ Dial Number

Enter the phone number manually us-

ing the keypad displayed on the screen.

Press the “OK” key on the screen to initi-

ate the call.

For additional options to make a call, refer

to “Voice commands” in this section.

Quick Dial

Quick Dial entries can be used to quickly

make a call. The system allows up to 20

entries to be stored. To set up a quick dial

press the button on the control

panel. Touch the “Quick Dial” key to display a

list of quick dial entries. Touch the “Edit” key

to edit current entries or touch the “Add

New” key to make a new entry. Two meth-

ods are given to create a quick dial entry:

∙ Touch the “Copy from Call History” key

to save a phone number from the In-

coming, Outgoing or Missed call history

lists. Select the person or phone num-

ber from the menu to be added. A reg-

istration menu will display the Entry #,

phone number, phone number type

stored in the cellular phone and Voice

Tag. Select the “OK” key.

∙

Touch the “Copy from Phonebook” key to

save a number from the phonebook. Use

the scroll keys on the side to move up

and down through the menu. Select a

person to be added. A menu will display

the Entry #, phone number, phone num-

ber type stored in the cellular phone and

Voice Tag. Select the “OK” key.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57

Voice tag

A voice tag can be recorded for each of the

registered Quick Dial numbers and can be

used to dial the number by speaking it. On

the Quick Dial registration screen, touch

the “Voice Tag” key. Select a relationship

from the list or create a new voice tag. To

record a new voice tag touch the “Custom-

ize” key on the screen then touch the “Store”

key. Speak a name after the prompt, the

new tag will be stored. To edit or create a

new voice tag select the “Customize” key

again. Touch the “Play” key to play the re-

corded voice tag, touch the “Restore” key to

edit the voice tag or “Delete” to delete the

current voice tag.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received by the phone con-

nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System, the call information is

displayed on the control panel display.

Press the button on the steering

wheel or touch the “ Answer” key on

the screen to accept the call. To reject the

call touch the “ Decline” key on the

screen.

If the user is not able to answer the call

right away, touch the “Hold Call” key dis-

played on the screen. A message will be

played for the caller: “I’m not able to take a

call right now.” The user may then accept

the call when available or reject the call.

To reject a call, press and hold the

button on the steering wheel.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active the following options

will appear on the control panel display:

∙ Mute

Touch this key to mute or unmute the

system.

∙ Dial Number

Touch this key to dial digits during the

phone call.

∙ Use Handset

Touch this key to transfer the call to the

handset. To transfer the call back from

the handset to the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System, press the

button on the control panel then select

the “Transfer Hands-free” key on the

screen.

∙ Switch Call

This option will only be available when a

second call is active.

If supported by the phone, the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

allows for call waiting functionality. If a

call is received while another call is al-

ready active, a message will be dis-

played on the screen. Press the

button on the steering wheel or touch

the “ Answer” key on screen to ac-

cept the incoming call. Touch the

“Decline” key on the screen to re-

ject the second call.

While a call is active, press the button

on the steering wheel to access additional

options. Speak one of the following com-

mands:

∙ “Send Digits”

Speak this command followed by the

digits to enter digits during the phone

call.

∙ “Switch call”

Speak this command to hold the sec-

ond call and switch back to the original

call.

ENDING A CALL

To end an active call, press the button

on the steering wheel or touch the

“Hang up” key on the screen.

4-58 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.

Check local regulations before using

this feature.

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of some of the applica-

tions and features, such as social net-

working and texting. Check local

regulations for any requirements.

∙ Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion. If you have to use the feature

while driving, exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while using

the text messaging feature, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle.

NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled if

the connected device does not support

the Message Access Profile (MAP). For

additional information, refer to the

phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and

instructions.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special per-

mission to enable text messaging. Check

the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®

pairing. For some phones, you may need

to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s

Bluetooth® menu for text messages to

appear on the headunit. For additional

information, refer to your phone’s Own-

er’s manual. Text message integration

requires that the phone support MAP

(Message Access Profile) for both receiv-

ing and sending text messages. Some

phones may not support all text mes-

saging features. Please refer to

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-

ibility information, as well as your de-

vice’s Owner’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and re-

ceiving of text messages through the ve-

hicle interface.

The availability of the text message func-

tion may vary depending on the cellular

phone.

When the cellular phone connected to the

vehicle receives a text message, a notifica-

tion will appear on the control panel dis-

play. To check the message, touch the

“Read” key. Touch the “Ignore” key to save

the message to be checked later.

Access text messaging through the ve-

hicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or

through the vehicles control panel.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-59

Text messaging using Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System (if so

equipped)

Sending a text message (if so equipped)

1. Press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for more than 1.5 sec-

onds.

2. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

3. The system will provide a list of avail-

able commands in order to determine

the recipient of the text message.

Choose from the following:

∙ Phonebook

∙ Quick Dial

∙ Incoming Calls

∙ Outgoing Calls

∙ Missed Calls

∙ Dial

4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send.

Nine predefined messages are avail-

able as well as three custom mes-

sages. To choose one of the predefined

messages, speak one of the following

after the tone:

∙ “Driving, can’t text”

∙ “Call me”

∙ “On my way”

∙ “Running late”

∙ “Okay”

∙ “Yes”

∙ “No”

∙ “Where are you?”

∙ “When?”

To send one of the custom messages,

say “Custom Messages”. If more than

one custom message is stored, the

system will prompt for the number of

the desired custom message. For ad-

ditional information on setting and

managing custom text messages, re-

fer to “Phone and text message set-

tings” in this section.

Reading a received text message

1. Press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for more than 1.5 sec-

onds.

2. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The display will show a list of 20 messages

with the sender and delivery time. Touch

the “Next” key on the screen to view all mes-

sages. To view a text message press

the button on the steering wheel and

speak the number item list on the screen.

The following options will be available:

∙ Play

Speak this command to have the sys-

tem say the message.

∙ Reply

Speak this command to send a text

message response to the sender of the

text message.

∙ Call

Speak this command to call the sender.

∙ Previous

Speak this command to move to the

previous text message (if available).

∙Next

Speak this command to move to the

next text message (if available).

4-60 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)

If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,

it can also be used to create custom mes-

sages that are sent through the phone. For

additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes

Free” in this section.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph

(8 km/h).

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones®, text messages can

only be sent through Siri.

Text messaging using the control

panel

Display received message list

1. Press the button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the

screen

3. Touch an item on the list to read or

reply to the message.

Up to 100 messages can be stored in the

message list.

Received message screen

Touching the “Read” key on the incoming

message notification screen or selecting a

message from the message list will show

the details of the received message on the

display.

Available actions:

∙Prev.

Touch this key to read the previous

message.

∙Next

Touch this key to read the next mes-

sage.

∙ Play/Stop

Touch the “Play” key to have the hands-

free phone system read out the re-

ceived message. Touch the “Stop” key to

stop reading.

∙ Call

If the sender of the message is regis-

tered in the phonebook, touch the “Call”

key to make a call to the sender.

∙ Reply

A reply message can be selected from

the predefined list or by a custom mes-

sage.

Sending a text message (if so equipped)

This function may not be supported de-

pending on the cellular phone.

1. Press the button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the

screen.

3. Touch the “Create Message” key on the

screen.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-61

The following items are available:

Available item Action

To Enter Number by Keypad Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm.

Quick Dial Select a recipient from the quick dial list.

Phonebook Select a recipient from the phonebook.

Call History Select a recipient/phone number from call history.

Select Text Fixed Touch to display a list of predefined text messages.

Customized Touch to display a list of custom text messages. Custom text can be created or edited from the setting

menu. For additional information, refer to “Phone and text message settings” in this section.

Send Touch to send the message.

4-62 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS

SCREEN

1. “” (back) key

2. Bluetooth tab

3. Connections screen

4. “Add New” key

5. “” (settings) key

6. “” (info) key

7. “” (Bluetooth® Audio connec-

tion) key

8. “” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System connection) key

Access the Connections screen to change

settings and view Bluetooth® information.

To access the Connections screen press

the MENU button on the control

panel. Touch the “Connections” key on the

screen then select the Bluetooth tab.

The paired phone will be added to the list

on the Bluetooth® connections screen.

Touching the name of another device on

the list will switch the connected device.

“ ” (back) key

Touch the “ ” key to go back to the

previous screen.

Connecting Bluetooth®

For additional information on connecting a

cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Con-

necting procedure” in this section.

NOTE:

Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a differ-

ent location may reduce or eliminate the

noise.

Bluetooth tab

This tab will display up to 6 Bluetooth® de-

vices. If 6 devices are already connected,

one of the devices must be deleted before

another device can be connected.

“Add New” key

Touch the this key on the screen to con-

nect a new Bluetooth® device. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Connecting

procedure” in this section.,

“” (Bluetooth® settings) key

Touch the “ ” key on the screen to dis-

play a list of options.

∙Bluetooth

Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth®

connection on or off

∙Favorite (Connection first)

Touch this key to change which device

will be connected first when multiple

devices are connected to the vehicle.

Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the

device a favorite connection.

Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the

device a favorite connection.

LHA4716

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-63

∙Pin

Touch this key to customize the PIN

code. Input a four digit number then

touch the “OK” key. The new PIN will be

set.

“ ” (info) key

Touch the “ ” key on the screen to dis-

play the information of the cellular phone

or to delete the device.

Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paired

device then select “Yes” when a message

appears.

“” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System connection)

key

A list of connected devices will be displayed

on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to

the name to connect a device to the

Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is

listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the

icon. Select the key again to disconnect the

device. The device will not be removed

from the list. For additional information on

removing a device, refer to “Info key” in this

section.

“” (Bluetooth® Audio

connection) key

A list of connected devices will be displayed

on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to

the name to connect a device to

Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a

favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Se-

lect the key again to disconnect the device.

The device will not be removed from the

list. For additional information on removing

a device, refer to “Info key” in this section.

PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE

SETTINGS

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System set-

tings can be changed according to the us-

er’s preference. To access the “Phone” set-

tings menu press the MENU button

on the control panel. Touch the “Settings”

key then select the “Phone” key.

LHA4721

4-64 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The following options are available:

Menu Item Result

Quick Dial Edit Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, refer to “Quick dial” in this section.

Delete All Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial.

Phonebook Download Entire Phone-

book

All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle

are downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phones Owner’s manual.

Auto Downloaded Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected.

Text Message Text Message Turns the text messaging function on/off.

Text Message Ringtone Turn the incoming message sound on/off.

Signature Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off.

Auto Reply Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off.

Auto Reply Text Message Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages or cre-

ate a custom message.

Edit Custom Text Create or edits a customized text message reply. To set a custom message, touch the “Add New” key. Select a

message from the recent text log. Touch the “OK” key to set the message or the “Select” key to choose a differ-

ent message. Up to three custom messages can be set. To delete a message select the custom message and

touch the “Delete” key.

Notifications Driver Only When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset.

Vehicle Ringtone Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off.

Automatic Hold When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-65

Volume & beeps

There are several methods to customize

the volume settings.

Volume & Beeps

The Volume & Beeps screen can be found

by pressing the MENU button on the

control panel, touching the “Settings” key

on the screen and selecting “Volume &

Beeps”. To adjust the volume of the follow-

ing options, touch the “–” and “+” keys on the

screen.

The available settings are:

∙ Ringtone

Adjust the volume level of the ringtone

of incoming calls.

∙ Outgoing Call

Adjust the volume level of the outgoing

calls.

∙ Voice Prompt Vol.

Adjust the volume level of the system

voice.

∙ Text-to-speech Vol.

Adjust the volume of the replay voice for

text messaging.

∙ Button Beeps

Turns on/off the button beep sounds

and alarm for prohibited operations.

Volume Settings

The Volume settings screen can be found

by pressing the button on the control

panel then touching the “Volume” key on

the screen. To adjust the volume of the

following options, touch the “–” and “+” keys

on the screen.

The available settings are:

∙ Ringtone

Adjust the volume level of the ringtone

of incoming calls.

∙ Outgoing Call

Adjust the volume level of the outgoing

calls.

4-66 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ..........5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..............5-2

Three-way catalyst ...........................5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover ................5-6

Off-roadrecovery ............................5-6

Rapid air pressure loss .......................5-7

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...........5-8

Ignition switch...................................5-8

Continuously Variable Transmission (if

so equipped) .................................5-8

Manual transmission (if so equipped) .........5-9

Ignition switch positions......................5-9

Before starting the engine......................5-10

Starting the engine .............................5-10

Driving the vehicle ...............................5-11

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) (if so equipped) .........................5-11

Manual transmission (if so equipped) ........5-16

Parking brake ..................................5-18

Cruise control (if so equipped) ..................5-19

Precautions on cruise control................5-19

Cruise control operations....................5-19

Break-in schedule ..............................5-21

Fuel efficient driving tips ........................5-21

Increasing fuel economy .......................5-22

Parking/parking on hills ........................5-23

Power steering .................................5-24

Brake system...................................5-25

Brake precautions ...........................5-25

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..............5-25

Brake Assist .................................5-26

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .........5-27

Brake force distribution......................5-28

Cold weather driving ...........................5-29

Freeing a frozen door lock ...................5-29

Antifreeze ...................................5-29

Battery......................................5-29

Draining of coolant water....................5-30

Tire equipment ..............................5-30

Special winter equipment ...................5-30

Driving on snow or ice .......................5-30

Engine block heater (if so equipped) .........5-31

WARNING

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the ve-

hicle inspected immediately.

∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-

gine running for any extended length

of time.

∙ Keep the rear vent windows, doors

and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed

while driving, otherwise exhaust

gases could be drawn into the pas-

senger compartment. If you must

drive with one of these open, follow

these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Turn the air recirculation mode off

and set the fan speed control to

the highest level to circulate the

air.

∙ The exhaust system and body should

be inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system,

underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission con-

trol device installed in the exhaust system.

Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst

are burned at high temperatures to help

reduce pollutants.

WARNING

∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-

mals or flammable materials away

from the exhaust system

components.

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

CAUTION

∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability

to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if no-

ticeable loss of performance or other

unusual operating conditions are de-

tected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not race the engine while warming

it up.

∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is

the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-

rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation

has not reached the level to trigger illumi-

nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illu-

minated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-

tion indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-

ing the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

does not monitor the tire pressure of

the spare tire.

∙ The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire pres-

sure (for example, a flat tire while driv-

ing).

∙ The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure of your tires are adjusted. After

the tires are inflated to the recom-

mended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn

off the low tire pressure warning light.

Use a tire pressure gauge to check the

tire pressure.

∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warn-

ing message is displayed in the odom-

eter when the low tire pressure warning

light is illuminated and low tire pressure

is detected. The CHECK TIRE PRES warn-

ing message turns off when the low tire

pressure warning light turns off.

∙ The low tire pressure warning light re-

mains illuminated until the tires are in-

flated to the recommended COLD tire

pressure.The CHECK TIRE PRES warning

message is displayed each time the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion as long as the low tire pres-

sure warning light remains illuminated.

∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES warning mes-

sage is not displayed if the low tire pres-

sure warning light illuminates to indi-

cate a TPMS malfunction.

∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending

on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-

eration and the outside temperature.

Do not reduce the tire pressure after

driving because the tire pressure rises

after driving. Low outside temperature

can lower the temperature of the air

inside the tire which can cause a lower

tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. If the warning light illumi-

nates, check the tire pressure for all four

tires.

∙ The Tire and Loading Information label

is located in the driver’s door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire

pressure warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for possible influences

before use.

5-4 Starting and driving

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon

as possible. (For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.)

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning

light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CAUTION

∙

The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with tire

chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

∙

Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows.

This may cause poor reception of the sig-

nals from the tire pressure sensors, and

the TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of the

TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate.

Some examples are:

∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi-

lar radio frequencies are near the ve-

hicle.

∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-

cies is being used in or near the vehicle.

∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or

a DC/AC converter is being used in or

near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may

illuminate in the following cases:

∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel

and tire without TPMS.

∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the

ID has not been registered.

∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

Starting and driving 5-5

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive

speed, high speed cornering, or sudden

steering maneuvers, because these driving

practices could cause you to lose control of

your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,

particularly if the loss of control causes

the vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving

when tired. Never drive when under the in-

fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which

may cause drowsiness). Always wear your

seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual, and also in-

struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person

is significantly more likely to be injured

or killed than a person properly wearing

a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side

wheels may unintentionally leave the road

surface. If this occurs, maintain control of

the vehicle by following the procedure be-

low. Please note that this procedure is only

a general guide. The vehicle must be driven

as appropriate based on the conditions of

the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

5-6 Starting and driving

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to

drive the vehicle back onto the road

surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires re-

turn to the road surface. When all tires

are on the road surface, steer the ve-

hicle to stay in the appropriate driving

lane.

∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-

turn the vehicle to the road surface

based on vehicle, road or traffic con-

ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a

stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged

due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air

pressure loss can also be caused by driving

on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-

dling and stability of the vehicle, especially

at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspecting the tires for wear and

damage. For additional information, refer

to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses

air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,

maintain control of the vehicle by following

the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The ve-

hicle must be driven as appropriate based

on the conditions of the vehicle, road and

traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-

sure. Losing control of the vehicle may

cause a collision and result in personal

injury.

∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe

location off the road and away from

traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-

ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers

and contact a roadside emergency

service to change the tire. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing a

flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

Starting and driving 5-7

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-

hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream

reduces coordination, delays reaction

time and impairs judgement. Driving

after drinking alcohol increases the

likelihood of being involved in an acci-

dent injuring yourself and others. Addi-

tionally, if you are injured in an accident,

alcohol can increase the severity of the

injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-

ever, you must choose not to drive under the

influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of

people are injured or killed in alcohol-related

collisions. Although the local laws vary on

what is considered to be legally intoxicated,

the fact is that alcohol affects all people dif-

ferently and most people underestimate the

effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,

prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t

drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is

impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other

physical condition.

WARNING

∙ Never remove the ignition key or place

the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion while driving. The steering wheel

will lock. This may cause the driver to

lose control of the vehicle and could

result in serious vehicle damage or

personal injury.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch cannot be turned to the

LOCK position until the shift lever is moved

to the P (Park) position.

∙ When placing the ignition switch in the

LOCK position, make sure that the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

∙ When removing the key from the igni-

tion switch (if it is inserted), make sure

that the shift lever is in the P (Park) po-

sition.

SSD0392

IGNITION SWITCH

5-8 Starting and driving

When the ignition switch cannot be placed

in the LOCK position:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Move the ignition switch slightly in the

ON direction.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK

position.

4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the

ignition switch.

If the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK

position, the shift lever cannot be moved

from the P (Park) position.

The shift lever can be moved if the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position and the

foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position 䊊

1between the

LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF posi-

tion is indicated by a “1” on the key cylin-

der.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

The ignition switch includes a device that

helps prevent accidental removal of the

key while driving.

The key can only be removed when the

ignition switch is in the LOCK position.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked,

it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clock-

wise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, place the ig-

nition switch in the LOCK position. Re-

move the key. To unlock the steering

wheel, insert the key and turn it gently

while rotating the steering wheel slightly

right and left.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (1)

The engine can be turned off without lock-

ing the steering wheel.

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accesso-

ries such as the radio when the engine is

not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system

and the electrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as

the engine has started, release the key. It

automatically returns to the ON position.

WSD0052

Starting and driving 5-9

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,

coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so

equipped), and windshield-washer fluid

as frequently as possible, or at least

whenever you refuel.

∙ Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-

ance and condition. Also check tires for

proper inflation.

∙ Lock all doors.

∙ Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

∙ Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position. For additional information,

refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights

and audible reminders” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission

models:

Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift lever cannot be moved out

of P (Park) and into any of the other

gear positions if the ignition key is

turned to the OFF position or if the

key is removed from the ignition

switch.

The starter is designed not to oper-

ate if the shift lever is in any of the

driving positions.

Manual transmission (M/T) models:

For best practice when operating an

M/T, depressing the clutch before

moving the shift lever is ideal.

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). De-

press the clutch pedal to the floor

while cranking the engine.

The starter is designed not to oper-

ate unless the clutch pedal is fully

depressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal by turning the

ignition key to the START position. Re-

lease the key when the engine starts. If

the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat

the above procedure.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-

starting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the

floor) and hold it and then crank the

engine. Release the key and the ac-

celerator pedal when the engine

starts.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-

cause it is flooded, depress the accel-

erator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Crank the engine for

5-6 seconds. After cranking the en-

gine, release the accelerator pedal.

Crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal by turning the

ignition key to the START position. Re-

lease the key when the engine starts.

If the engine starts, but fails to run,

repeat the above procedure.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-10 Starting and driving

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, turn the key off and wait

10 seconds before cranking again, oth-

erwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least

30 seconds after starting. Do not race

the engine while warming it up. Drive at

a moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly

and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so

equipped)

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

CAUTION

∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade,do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically

controlled to produce maximum power

and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures

for this transmission are shown on the fol-

lowing pages. Follow these procedures for

maximum vehicle performance and driv-

ing enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

Starting and driving 5-11

Starting the vehicle

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

CAUTION

To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving the

shift lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed

and move the shift lever into a driving

gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually

start the vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before

moving the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

The Continuously Variable Transmission

is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST

be depressed before shifting from P

(Park) to any drive position while the ig-

nition switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of P

(Park) and into any of the other gear po-

sitions if the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the

keyisremoved.

5-12 Starting and driving

To move the shift lever:

Press the button 䊊

Awhile depressing

the brake pedal

Press the button 䊊

Ato shift

Shift without pressing the button 䊊

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal and move the shift lever from P

(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever

is in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal in-

jury or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or

ACC position for any reason while the ve-

hicle is in N (Neutral), or any drive position,

the key cannot be turned to the LOCK po-

sition and be removed from the ignition

switch. If this occurs, perform the following

steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the ve-

hicle is stopped.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) to park

the vehicle and place the ignition

switch in the LOCK position to remove

the key.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the P (Park) position only when the ve-

hicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when

the vehicle is parked or when starting the

engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed and the shift lever button

pressed in to move the shift lever from N

(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a

hill, apply the parking brake first, then place

the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the R (Reverse) position only when the

vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)

position. R (Reverse) speed is limited to

30 mph (48 km/h). Do not exceed 30 mph

(48 km/h) in the R (Reverse) position. The

brake pedal must be depressed and the

shift lever button pressed in to move the

shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or

any drive position to R (Reverse).

LSD2013

Starting and driving 5-13

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The engine can be started in this

position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and

restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is

moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

L(Low)

Use this position for engine braking on

steep downhill gradients/climbing steep

slopes and whenever approaching sharp

bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in

any other circumstances.

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift lever

may not be moved from the P (Park) posi-

tion even with the foot brake pedal de-

pressed.

To move the shift lever, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a

screwdriver, remove the shift lock re-

lease cover.

∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also

be used.

4. Push down the shift lock release using

a suitable tool.

5. Press the shift lever button 䊊

Aand

move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position while holding down the shift

lock release.

6. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition to unlock the steering wheel.

7. Release the parking brake.

The vehicle may be moved to the desired

location.

Replace the removed shift lock release

cover after the operation.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the

P (Park) position, have the Continuously

Variable Transmission system checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2011

5-14 Starting and driving

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch

When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with

the shift lever in the D (Drive) position,

the light in the instrument panel illu-

minates. For additional information, refer

to “Overdrive OFF indicator light” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

Use the overdrive OFF mode when you

need improved engine braking.

To turn off the overdrive OFF mode, push

the O/D OFF switch again. The indi-

cator light will turn off.

Each time the engine is started, or when

the shift lever is shifted to any position

other than D (Drive), the overdrive OFF

mode will be automatically turned off.

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts

the transmission down into a lower gear,

depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, the

Continuously Variable Transmission will

not be shifted into the selected driving po-

sition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel

spinning and subsequent hard braking,

the fail-safe system may be activated.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

may come on to indicate the fail-safe

mode is activated. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual. This will oc-

cur even if all electrical circuits are func-

tioning properly. In this case, place the

ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait for 10 seconds. Then place the igni-

tion switch back in the ON position. The

vehicle should return to its normal oper-

ating condition. If it does not return to its

normal operating condition, have the

transmission checked and repaired, if

necessary. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature pro-

tection mode or fail-safe operation oc-

curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re-

duced.The reduced speed may be lower

than other traffic, which could increase

the chance of a collision. Be especially

careful when driving. If necessary, pull

to the side of the road at a safe place

and allow the transmission to return to

normal operation, or have it repaired if

necessary.

LSD2012

Starting and driving 5-15

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so

equipped)

WARNING

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

∙ Do not over-rev the engine when

shifting to a lower gear. This may

cause a loss of control or engine

damage.

∙ Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position

while driving. Doing so may result in

an accident due to loss of engine

braking.

CAUTION

∙ Do not rest your foot on the clutch

pedal while driving. This may cause

clutch damage.

∙ Fully depress the clutch pedal before

shifting to help prevent transmission

damage.

∙ Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

∙ When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running (for example, at a stop

light), shift to N (Neutral) and release

the clutch pedal with the foot brake

applied.

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or

downshifting, depress the clutch pedal

fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then

release the clutch slowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully de-

press the clutch pedal before operating the

shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully

depressed before the transmission is

shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans-

mission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,

3rd, 4th and up to 5th gear in sequence

according to vehicle speed.

SSD0535

5-16 Starting and driving

On the manual transmission, you cannot

shift directly from 5th gear into R (Reverse).

First shift into N (Neutral), then into R (Re-

verse).

The shift lever ring returns to its original

position when the shift lever is moved to

the N (Neutral) position.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R

(Reverse) or 1st gear, shift into N (Neutral),

then release the clutch pedal. Depress the

clutch pedal again and shift into R (Re-

verse) or 1st gear.

Suggested up-shift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle

speeds for shifting into a higher gear.

These suggestions relate to fuel economy

and vehicle performance. Actual upshift

speeds will vary according to road condi-

tions, the weather and individual driving

habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude ar-

eas (less than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

GEAR CHANGE mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 9 (14)

2nd to 3rd 12 (19)

3rd to 4th 21 (34)

4th to 5th 28 (45)

5th —

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas

and high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft

[1219 m]):

Gear change mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th —

Suggested maximum speed in

each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is

not running smoothly, or if you need to ac-

celerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested

speed (shown below) in any gear. For level

road driving, use the highest gear sug-

gested for that speed. Always observe

posted speed limits, and drive according to

the road conditions, which will ensure safe

operation. Do not over-rev the engine

when shifting to a lower gear as it may

cause engine damage or loss of vehicle

control.

GEAR mph (km/h)

1st 28 (46)

2nd 52 (83)

3rd 76 (122)

4th 103 (166)

5th —

Starting and driving 5-17

WARNING

∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

∙ Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully

engaged.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up

䊊

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)

position.

Continuously Variable Transmission

models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake

lever slightly, press the button 䊊

Band

lower the lever completely.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-

ing light goes out.

WSD0169

PARKING BRAKE

5-18 Starting and driving

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. ON/OFF switch

∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-

tions, it cancels automatically.

∙ To properly set the cruise control sys-

tem, use the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

∙ When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.

∙ On winding or hilly roads.

∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

∙ In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models,do not

shift into N (Neutral) without depress-

ing the clutch pedal when the cruise

control is set. Should this occur, depress

the clutch pedal and turn the ON/OFF

switch off immediately. Failure to do so

may cause engine damage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-

out keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light

in the instrument panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. The

CRUISE indicator light in the instrument

panel comes on. Take your foot off the ac-

celerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the

set speed.

∙To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-

ously set speed.

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, drive without the

cruise control.

LSD2430

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-19

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the CRUISE

indicator light in the instrument panel

goes out.

∙ Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE indica-

tor light goes out.

∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. The CRUISE

indicator light in the instrument panel

goes out.

The cruise control is automatically can-

celed and the CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument panel goes out if:

∙ You depress the brake or clutch pedal

while pushing the ACCEL/RES or

SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is

deleted from memory.

∙ The vehicle slows down more than

8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

∙ You depress the clutch pedal (manual

transmission), or move the shift lever

into N (Neutral) (Continuously Variable

Transmission).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST/SET

switch.

∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you

desire, release the switch.

∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed increases by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the COAST/SET switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle

slows to the desired speed.

∙ Push and release the COAST/SET

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed decreases by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle

returns to the last set cruising speed when

the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

5-20 Starting and driving

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance

and ensure the future reliability and

economy of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may re-

sult in shortened engine life and re-

duced engine performance.

∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-

stant speed, either fast or slow, and do

not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

∙ Avoid quick starts.

∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-

sible.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient

Driving Tips to help you achieve the most

fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.

∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

∙ Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever pos-

sible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.

∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your num-

ber of stops.

∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-

mize red light stops and improve fuel

efficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the

vehicle due to reduced engine load.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle

due to increased aerodynamic drag.

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling

load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

∙ Observing the speed limit and not

exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where

legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-

ciency due to reduced aerodynamic

drag.

∙ Maintaining a safe following distance

behind other vehicles reduces un-

necessary braking.

∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced

braking and smooth acceleration

changes.

∙ Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Starting and driving 5-21

5. Use Cruise Control

∙ Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady

speed.

∙ Cruise control is particularly effective

in providing fuel savings when driving

on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save

time.

7. Avoid Idling

∙ Shutting off your engine when safe

for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds

saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll

Roads

∙ Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruis-

ing speed through the toll and avoid

stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact

to fuel economy.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to

effectively circulate the engine oil be-

fore driving.

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-

ating temperature more quickly

while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever pos-

sible.

∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening

the windows will help to reduce the

inside temperature faster, resulting in

reduced demand on your A/C sys-

tem.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases

tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine

oil. For additional information, refer to

“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tions” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

5-22 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park) or in

an appropriate gear for manual trans-

mission (M/T) models. Failure to do so

could cause the vehicle to move unex-

pectedly or roll away and result in an

accident. Make sure the shift lever has

been pushed as far forward as it can

go and cannot be moved without de-

pressing the foot brake pedal.

∙ Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. M/T models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)

position. When parking on an uphill

grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear.

Continuously Variable Transmission

models:

Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into traffic when parked on an incline, it

is a good practice to turn the wheels as

illustrated.

SSD0488

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-23

∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the curb

side wheel gently touches the curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away

from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position and remove the key.

WARNING

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

∙ When the power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine run-

ning, there will be no power assist for

the steering. You will still have control

of the vehicle, but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

The power steering system is designed to

provide power assist while driving to oper-

ate the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated re-

peatedly or continuously while parking or

driving at a very low speed, the power as-

sist for the steering wheel will be reduced.

This is to prevent overheating of the power

steering system and protect it from getting

damaged. While the power assist is re-

duced, steering wheel operation will be-

come heavy. When the temperature of the

power steering system goes down, the

power assist level will return to normal.

Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-

erations that could cause the power steer-

ing system to overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering

wheel is operated quickly. However, this is

not a malfunction.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the power steering system is not

functioning properly and may need servic-

ing. Have the power steering system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the power steering warning light illu-

minates with the engine running, there will

be no power assist for the steering, but you

will still have control of the vehicle. At this

time, greater steering effort is required to

operate the steering wheel, especially in

sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power

steering warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

POWER STEERING

5-24 Starting and driving

The brake system has two separate hy-

draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,

you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using

engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you

can stop the vehicle by depressing the

brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-

sure on the brake pedal will be required to

stop the vehicle and stopping distance will

be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will overheat the brakes,

wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce

gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent

the brakes from overheating, reduce speed

and downshift to a lower gear before going

down a slope or long grade. Overheated

brakes may reduce braking performance

and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-

celerating could cause the wheels to

skid and result in an accident.

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-

ing will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet. As

a result, your braking distance will be lon-

ger and the vehicle may pull to one side

during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until

the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving

the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever

the stopping effect of the parking brake is

weakened or whenever the brake shoes

and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order

to assure the best brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but

it cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain ve-

hicle control during braking on slip-

pery surfaces. Remember that stop-

ping distances on slippery surfaces

will be longer than on normal sur-

faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads, or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain

a safe distance from the vehicle in

front of you. Ultimately, the driver is

responsible for safety.

∙ Tire type and condition may also af-

fect braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-25

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and

type as specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Tire

and Loading Information label” in

the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels

do not lock during hard braking or when

braking on slippery surfaces. The system

detects the rotation speed at each wheel

and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding.

By preventing each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving

and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

Anti-lock Braking System will operate to

prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-

cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,

hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start

the engine and move the vehicle at a low

speed in forward or reverse. When the self-

test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.

This is normal and does not indicate a mal-

function. If the computer senses a mal-

function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-

nates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then

operates normally but without anti-lock

assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-

ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-

10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-

sure. This action is similar to pumping the

brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-

tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise

from under the hood or feel a vibration

from the actuator when it is operating. This

is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-

erating properly. However, the pulsation

may indicate that road conditions are haz-

ardous and extra care is required while

driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is

activated generating greater braking force

than a conventional brake booster even

with light pedal force.

5-26 Starting and driving

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to

monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.

Under certain driving conditions, the VDC

system helps to perform the following

functions:

∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel

so power is transferred to a non-

slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

∙ Controls brake pressure and engine

output to reduce drive wheel slip based

on vehicle speed (traction control func-

tion).

∙ Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle in

the following conditions:

– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-

low the steered path despite in-

creased steering input)

– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due

to certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to

maintain control of the vehicle, but it can-

not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-

ing situations.

When the VDC system operates, the

indicator in the instrument panel flashes

so note the following:

∙ The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required

to help keep the vehicle on the steered

path.

∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise or vibration from

under the hood. This is normal and indi-

cates that the VDC system is working

properly.

∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip in-

dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system,

the indicator light comes on in the

instrument panel. The VDC system auto-

matically turns off when this indicator light

is on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The indicator illumi-

nates to indicate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-27

prevent one drive wheel from slipping by

transferring power to a non-slipping drive

wheel. The indicator flashes if this oc-

curs. All other VDC functions are off and

the indicator will not flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to

on when the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-

ture that tests the system each time you

start the engine and move the vehicle for-

ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When

the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-

tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator light may flash or

illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and

the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the indi-

cator light may illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator light

may flash or illuminate. Do not drive

on these types of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator light may

flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-

function. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator light

may flash or illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns,

the system optimizes the distribution of

force to each of the front and rear wheels

depending on the radius of the turn.

5-28 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator light may flash or

illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and

the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the indi-

cator light may illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator light

may flash or illuminate. Do not drive

on these types of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator light may

flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-

function. Restart the engine after

driving onto a stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator light

may flash or illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

de-icer through the key hole. If the lock

becomes frozen, heat the key before in-

serting it into the key hole or use the re-

mote keyless entry key fob.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),

check the antifreeze to assure proper win-

ter protection. For additional information,

refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the

battery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly.

For additional information, refer to “Battery”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-29

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, in-

cluding the engine block. Refill before oper-

ating the vehicle. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance

of these tires will be substantially re-

duced in snowy and icy conditions. If

you operate your vehicle on snowy or

icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use

of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES

on all four wheels. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire

type, size, speed rating and availability

information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some U.S. states and Canadian prov-

inces prohibit their use. Check local,

state and provincial laws before install-

ing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional

information, refer to “Tire chains” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during winter:

∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows

and wiper blades.

∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-

drifts.

∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” un-

der these conditions.Try to avoid driv-

ing on wet ice until the road is salted

or sanded.

∙ Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

∙ Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

∙ Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

reaching it. Try not to brake while on

the ice, and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

5-30 Starting and driving

∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so

equipped) on slippery roads.

∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist

with cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)

or lower.

WARNING

∙ Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system

or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be

seriously injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded

connection.

∙ Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least 10 A.

Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to

use the proper extension cord or a

grounded outlet can result in a fire or

electrical shock and cause serious

personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into

a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-

sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be

plugged in for at least 2 to 4 hours,

depending on outside temperatures,

to properly warm the engine coolant.

Use an appropriate timer to turn the

engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away

from moving parts.

Starting and driving 5-31

MEMO

5-32 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ..................6-2

Flat tire ..........................................6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................6-2

Changing a flat tire ...........................6-3

Jump starting ...................................6-9

Push starting ....................................6-11

If your vehicle overheats.........................6-11

Towing your vehicle ............................6-12

Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........6-12

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck

vehicle) ......................................6-14

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under emer-

gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

∙

Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

∙ Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition

switch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use

of the hazard warning flasher switch

while driving.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors

tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

When the low tire pressure warning light is

lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure)

warning message is displayed in the trip

computer, one or more of your tires is sig-

nificantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is be-

ing driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS

will activate and warn you of it by the low

tire pressure warning light. This system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible reminders” in

the “Instruments and controls” section, and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light OFF. If you have a

flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Shift the manual trans-

mission into R (Reverse) or the Continu-

ously Variable Transmission into P

(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic

and to signal professional road assis-

tance personnel that you need assis-

tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-

hicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the manual trans-

mission is shifted into R (Reverse), or

the Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion into P (Park).

∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-

fessional road assistance.

In case of emergency 6-3

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the

flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving

when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

Open the trunk. Lift the floorboard 䊊

Remove the bag containing the jacking rod

and wheel nut wrench. 䊊

To remove the jack 䊊

3, collapse the jack

from the storage location. If necessary, re-

move the spare tire first to easily access

the jack.

LCE2142

LCE2418

6-4 In case of emergency

To remove the spare tire, loosen the bolt by

turning counterclockwise. Once free, re-

move the bolt. Remove the spare tire.

Removing wheel cover (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel

caps or wheel covers. Doing so could

result in personal injury.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jacking

rod 䊊

1as illustrated.

Apply cloth 䊊

2between the wheel and

jacking rod to prevent damaging the wheel

and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover

or wheel surface.

SCE0913 SCE0630

In case of emergency 6-5

Jacking up vehicle and removing

the damaged tire

WARNING

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle on

other vehicles. The jack is designed

for lifting only your vehicle during a

tire change.

∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for

jack support.

∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.

∙ Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)

off the ground. It may cause the ve-

hicle to move.

LCE2235

6-6 In case of emergency

Always refer to the proper illustrations for

the correct placement and jack-up points

for your specific vehicle model and jack

type.

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following in-

structions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by

turning counterclockwise with the

wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the

wheel nuts until the tire is off the

ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the

jack-up point as illustrated so the top

of the jack contacts the vehicle at the

jack-up point. Align the jack head be-

tween the 2 notches in the front or the

rear. Also fit the groove of the jack head

between the notches.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack

lever and rod with both hands. Carefully

raise the vehicle until the tire clears the

ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and

then remove the tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and

tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the

sequence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D) until

they are tight.

LCE2059 WCE0048

In case of emergency 6-7

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence as illus-

trated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D). Lower the vehicle

completely.

WARNING

∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the

nuts to become loose.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a

torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened

to specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specification at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-

sure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mi (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information Label.

5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle.

NOTE:

You may need to remove the wheel cap

(if so equipped) to secure the damaged

tire using the spare tire clamp.

6. Install the jack in its storage area and

tighten the jack screw clockwise.

7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk

floor carpeting over the damaged tire.

8. Close the trunk.

WCE0157

6-8 In case of emergency

WARNING

∙ Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can be-

come dangerous projectiles in an ac-

cident or sudden stop.

∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. For additional information,

refer to specific instructions under

the heading “Wheels and tires” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery,

the instructions and precautions below

must be followed.

WARNING

∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting

in severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulfuric acid solution which

can cause severe burns. If the fluid

should come into contact with any-

thing, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye protec-

tors (for example, goggles or indus-

trial safety spectacles) and remove

rings, metal bands, or any other jew-

elry. Do not lean over the battery

when jump starting.

∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause

serious injury.

∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

JUMP STARTING

In case of emergency 6-9

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause per-

sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-

hicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring

their batteries near each other.

Do not allow the 2 vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift

lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmis-

sion) or to P (Park) (Continuously Vari-

able Transmission). Switch off all un-

necessary electrical systems (lights,

heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Ensure the vent caps are level and

tight.

4. Connect jumper cables in the se-

quence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

CAUTION

∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi-

tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body

ground (for example, strut mounting

bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to

the battery.

∙

Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start

the engine of the vehicle being jump

started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 15 seconds. If the engine

does not start, place the ignition switch

in the OFF position and wait 10 seconds

before trying again, otherwise the

starter could be damaged.

7. After starting the engine, carefully dis-

connect the negative cable and then

the positive cable.

LCE2223

6-10 In case of emergency

CAUTION

∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

∙ Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) and manual transmission mod-

els cannot be push-started or tow-

started. Attempting to do so may

cause transmission damage.

∙ For manual transmission models,

never try to start the vehicle by tow-

ing it. When the engine starts, the for-

ward surge could cause the vehicle to

collide with the tow vehicle.

∙ Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models cannot be push-started

or tow-started. Attempting to do so

may cause transmission damage.

If your vehicle is overheating, indicated by

an extremely high temperature gauge

reading (if so equipped) or a red high tem-

perature warning light (if so

equipped), or if you feel a lack of engine

power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the

following steps.

WARNING

∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause en-

gine damage or a vehicle fire.

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while

the engine is still hot. When the radia-

tor cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-

ply the parking brake and move the

shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual trans-

mission) or to P (Park) (Continuously

Variable Transmission).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maxi-

mum hot and fan control to high

speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen

for steam or coolant escaping from the

radiator before opening the hood. (If

steam or coolant is escaping, turn off

the engine). Do not open the hood fur-

ther until no steam or coolant can be

seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage

or looseness. Also check if the cooling

fan is running. The radiator hoses and

radiator should not leak water. If cool-

ant is leaking, the water pump belt is

missing or loose, or the cooling fan

does not run, stop the engine.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-11

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or

the engine cooling fan. The engine cool-

ing fan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank with the engine running.

Add coolant to the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank if necessary. Have your ve-

hicle repaired. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin-

cial in Canada) and local regulations for

towing must be followed. Incorrect towing

equipment could damage your vehicle.

Towing instructions are available from a

NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are

generally familiar with the applicable laws

and procedures for towing. To assure

proper towing and to prevent accidental

damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom-

mends having a service operator tow your

vehicle. It is advisable to have the service

operator carefully read the following pre-

cautions:

WARNING

∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

∙ Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

∙ When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working condi-

tion. If any of these conditions apply,

dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be

used.

∙ Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For additional information, refer to “Flat

towing” in the “Technical and Consumer In-

formation” section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle

based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-

tional information, refer to the diagrams in

this section to ensure that your vehicle is

properly towed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-12 In case of emergency

2WD models with Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT)

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (front) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed

truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

∙ Never tow Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) models with the

front wheels on the ground or four

wheels on the ground (forward or

backward), as this may cause serious

and expensive damage to the trans-

mission. If it is necessary to tow the

vehicle with the rear wheels raised al-

ways use towing dollies under the

front wheels.

∙ When towing Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) models with the

rear wheels on the ground or on tow-

ing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. Never

secure the steering wheel by plac-

ing the ignition switch in the LOCK

position. This may damage the

steering lock mechanism (for

models with a steering lock

mechanism).

LCE2345

In case of emergency 6-13

2WD models with manual

transmission

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

be used when towing your vehicle or place

the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illus-

trated.

If you must use a pull behind tow truck put

the manual transmission in N (Neutral).

Your vehicle speed should never exceed

60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your ve-

hicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle

the engine with the transmission in N (Neu-

tral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en-

gine after every 500 miles of towing may

cause damage to the transmission’s inter-

nal parts.

CAUTION

Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ If you have to tow manual transmis-

sion models with the rear wheels on

the ground (if you do not use towing

dollies) or four wheels on the ground:

– Always release the parking brake.

– Move the transmission shift lever

to the N (Neutral) position

– Observe the following restricted

towing speeds and distances for

manual transmission models only:

Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)

Distance: Less than 500 miles

(805 km)

When towing long distances or speeds in

excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the

propeller shaft before towing to prevent

damage to the transmission.For additional

information, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a

stuck vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-

sonal injury or death when recovering a

stuck vehicle:

∙ Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any

questions regarding the recovery

procedure.

LCE2346

6-14 In case of emergency

∙ Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to main structural mem-

bers of the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

∙ Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

∙ Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the ve-

hicle. Never pull at an angle.

∙ Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except

the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device de-

signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) System.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind

the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to

clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive) (Continuously

Variable Transmission models) or 1st

(Low) and R (Reverse) (manual trans-

mission models).

∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion.

∙ Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive) (Continuously Variable Trans-

mission models) or 1st (Low) and R

(Reverse) (manual transmission

models).

∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional towing

service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ................................7-2

Washing......................................7-2

Waxing .......................................7-2

Removing spots ..............................7-3

Underbody ...................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) .......7-3

Chromeparts................................7-4

Tire dressings ................................7-4

Cleaning interior.................................7-4

Air fresheners ................................7-5

Floor mats (if so equipped) ...................7-5

Seatbelts .................................... 7-7

Corrosion protection ............................ 7-7

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion ............................. 7-7

Environmental factors influence the

rate of corrosion.............................. 7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion ..........7-8

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to take proper

care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain.

∙ After driving on coastal roads.

∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface.

∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-

face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-

hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in

a shady area or protect the vehicle with a

body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-

face when putting on or removing the

body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-

ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed

with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, es-

pecially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to function

properly. Always check with your car

wash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical de-

tergents, gasoline or solvents.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot,

as the surface may become

water-spotted.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

clean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-

fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.

Take care that the drain holes in the lower

edge of the door are open. Spray water

under the body and in the wheel wells to

loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the

vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove

built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-

ered appearance before re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing

the proper product.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-

sives, cutting compounds or cleaners

that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-

ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-

ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the surface of the paint to avoid last-

ing damage or staining. Special cleaning

products are available at a NISSAN dealer

or any automotive accessory store. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it

is necessary to clean the underbody regu-

larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from

building up and causing the acceleration of

corrosion on the underbody and suspen-

sion. Before the winter period and again in

the spring, the underseal must be checked

and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be

easier to clean if the high-mounted stop

light (if so equipped) is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high-

mounted stop light to reduce the risk of

damaging the high-mounted stop light

wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

䊊

1Push toward rear of vehicle.

䊊

2Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be

properly reinstalled before driving your ve-

hicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-

mal for glass to become coated with a film

after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.

Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily

remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-

age the electrical conductors, radio an-

tenna elements or rear window de-

froster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so

equipped)

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge

dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-

cially during winter months in areas where

road salt is used. If not removed, road salt

can discolor the wheels.

WAI0007

Appearance and care 7-3

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

ambient temperature.

∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after

the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a

non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain

the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-

ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-

plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-

ing and form a compound. This compound

may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easily

than with an oil-based tire dressing.

∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-

cult to remove).

∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is

completely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufac-

turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a

vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe

the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-

faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in

mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some

fabric protectors contain chemicals that

may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifi-

cation sensor. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and re-

sult in serious personal injury.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

CAUTION

∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to leather (if so

equipped) surfaces and should be re-

moved promptly. Do not use saddle

soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, clean-

ing fluids, solvents, detergents or

ammonia-based cleaners as they

may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

∙ Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that

could affect the vehicle interior. If you use

an air freshener, take the following precau-

tions:

∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they

contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place

the air freshener in a location that al-

lows it to hang free and not contact an

interior surface.

∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip

on the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration

when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions before using the air fresh-

eners.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision, injury or

death:

∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front po-

sition or install them upside down or

backwards.

LAI2010

Appearance and care 7-5

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-

cifically designed for use in your ve-

hicle model and model year.

∙ Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat position-

ing hook. For additional information,

refer to "Floor mat installation" in this

section.

∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-

terfere with pedal operation.

∙ Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure

they are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular clean-

ing and replaced if they become exces-

sively worn.

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-

sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of

the floor mat positioning hooks for each

seating position varies depending on the

vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided

with the mat and the following:

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the

shift lever in P (Park) position (Continu-

ously Variable Transmission models) or

the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position

(manual transmission models) and

with the parking break fully applied, po-

sition the floor mat in the floorwell so

that the floor mat grommet holes are

aligned with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the

hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is

properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-

fere with pedal operation. With the igni-

tion still in the OFF position, the shift

lever in the P (Park) position (Continu-

ously Variable Transmission models) or

the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position

(manual transmission models) and

with the parking break applied, fully ap-

ply and release all pedals. The floor mat

must not interfere with pedal opera-

tion or prevent the pedal from return-

ing to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for details about installing the floor

mats in your vehicle.

7-6 Appearance and care

The illustration shows the location of the

floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-

pletely in the shade before using them. For

additional information, refer to “Seat belt

maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these materials may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

∙ The accumulation of moisture-

retaining dirt and debris in body panel

sections, cavities, and other areas.

∙ Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can accelerate

corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry

completely inside the vehicle and should

be removed for drying to avoid floor panel

corrosion.

Positioning hooks

LAI2034

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those ar-

eas where the temperatures stay above

freezing and where atmospheric pollution

exists and road salt is used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of

corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use accelerates the corrosion process.

Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-

tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to

keep the vehicle clean.

∙ Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula-

tion.

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with

water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or

broom.

∙ Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan

and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be

cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended that you consult

a NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................8-2

Engine compartment check locations...........8-3

Engine cooling system ..........................8-4

Checking engine coolant level ................8-5

Changing engine coolant.....................8-5

Engine oil........................................8-6

Checking engine oil level .....................8-6

Changing engine oil ..........................8-7

Changing engine oil filter .....................8-8

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid (if so equipped) .............................8-9

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ...........8-9

Brake fluid ...................................8-10

Clutch (if so equipped) fluid ..................8-10

Windshield-washer fluid ........................8-10

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir............8-10

Battery..........................................8-11

Jump starting ...............................8-13

Variable voltage control system

(if so equipped) .................................8-13

Drive belt .......................................8-14

Spark plugs ....................................8-15

Replacing spark plugs .......................8-15

Air cleaner......................................8-15

Windshield wiper blades ........................8-16

Cleaning ....................................8-16

Replacing ...................................8-16

Brakes..........................................8-17

Fuses...........................................8-18

Engine compartment .......................8-18

Passenger compartment....................8-19

Battery replacement ...........................8-21

Key fob (if so equipped) ......................8-21

Lights ..........................................8-22

Headlights...................................8-22

Fog lights (if so equipped) ...................8-24

Exterior and interior lights ...................8-24

Wheels and tires................................8-28

Tire pressure ................................8-28

Tire labeling .................................8-31

Types of tires ................................8-34

Tire chains ..................................8-35

Changing wheels and tires ..................8-36

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always take

care to prevent serious accidental injury to

yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-

lowing are general precautions which

should be closely observed.

WARNING

∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. For manual trans-

mission models, move the shift lever

to N (Neutral). For CVT models, move

the shift lever to P (Park).

∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position when perform-

ing any parts replacement or repairs.

∙ If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans,

belts and any other moving parts.

∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jew-

elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-

fore working on your vehicle.

∙ Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

∙ If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

∙

Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-

gine models are under high pressure

even when the engine is off, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come

on at any time without warning, even

if the ignition key is in the OFF position

and the engine is not running. To

avoid injury, always disconnect the

negative battery cable before work-

ing near the fan.

CAUTION

∙ Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

∙

Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

∙ Never leave the engine or the trans-

mission related component harness

connector disconnected while the ig-

nition switch is in the ON position.

∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-

tery or any transistorized component

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-

tions regarding only those items which are

relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also

available. For additional information, refer

to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties or excessive emissions, and

could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, it is recommended

that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

HR16DE engine

1. Drive belt location

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Air cleaner

4. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)

fluid reservoir

5. Fusible link

6. Battery

7. Engine coolant reservoir

8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI3231

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to

provide year-round antifreeze and coolant

protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-

tional engine cooling system additives are

not necessary.

WARNING

∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional informa-

tion on precautions, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a Genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

∙ Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Additives

may clog the cooling system and

cause damage to the engine, trans-

mission and/or cooling system.

∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-

diluted to provide antifreeze protec-

tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional

freeze protection is needed due to

weather where you operate your ve-

hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-

trate following the directions on the

container. If an equivalent coolant

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-

low the coolant manufacturer’s in-

structions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The

use of other types of coolant solu-

tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent may damage the engine

cooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),

including Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water will reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer

to the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir

when the engine is cold. If the coolant

level is below the MIN level 䊊

B, add coolant

to the MAX level 䊊

A. If the reservoir is empty,

check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-

cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX

level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing

any other type of coolant or the use of

non-distilled water will reduce the life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-

ditional information, refer to the "Mainte-

nance and schedules" section of this

manual.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, it is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information on the location

of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-

gine compartment check locations” in this

section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine

coolant. The service procedure can be

found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine over-

heating.

WARNING

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the

engine is hot.

∙ Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burns could

be caused by high pressure fluid es-

caping from the radiator.

∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-

erly. Check your local regulations.

LDI2794

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back

into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check

the oil level. It should be between the H

(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the

normal operating oil level range. If the

oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊

remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-

ommended oil through the opening.

Do not overfill 䊊

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some engine oil be-

tween oil maintenance intervals depend-

ing on the severity of operating conditions

or depending on the property of the en-

gine oil used. More engine oil is consumed

by frequent acceleration/deceleration es-

pecially when the engine rpm is high. Con-

sumption is likely to be higher when the

engine is new. If the rate of oil consump-

tion, after driving for 3,000 miles

(5,000 km), is more than 0.5 liter per

600 miles (1,000 km), consult a NISSAN

dealer

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the en-

gine, and such damage is not covered

by warranty.

LDI3091 LDI2795

ENGINE OIL

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature, then

turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug 䊊

5. Remove the drain plug 䊊

Bwith a

wrench by turning it counterclockwise

and completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove

and replace it at this time. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

engine oil filter” in this section.

WARNING

∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin

cancer.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

∙ Be careful not to burn yourself. The

engine oil may be hot.

∙ Waste oil must be disposed of

properly.

∙ Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug 䊊

and a new washer. Securely tighten the

drain plug 䊊

Bwith a wrench. Do not use

excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil

through the oil filler opening, then install

the oil filler cap 䊊

Asecurely.

For additional information on drain

and refill capacity, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity depends

on the oil temperature and drain time.

Use these specifications for reference

only. Always use the dipstick to deter-

mine when the proper amount of oil is

in the engine.

LDI2788

Do-it-yourself 8-7

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage

around the drain plug 䊊

Band oil filter.

Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil

filter 䊊

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench by turning it counterclockwise.

Then remove the oil filter by turning it

by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-

gine oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface

with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket mate-

rial remaining on the sealing surface of

the engine. Failure to do so could lead to

engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil .

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-

tance is felt, then tighten an additional

2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

13 ft-lb (18 N·m)

LDI2789

8-8 Do-it-yourself

8. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-

gine oil by removing the oil filler cap 䊊

if necessary.

CAUTION

∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)

ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with

other fluids.

∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission

Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission

fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam-

age the CVT. Damage caused by the

use of fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may

also damage the CVT. Damage caused

by the use of fluids other than as rec-

ommended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid

is required, it is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

For additional information on brake fluid

specification, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake and

clutch (if so equipped) systems. The

use of improper fluids can damage

the brake and clutch system and af-

fect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

∙ Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous

and should be stored carefully in

marked containers out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid

is spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so

equipped)

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)

FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-9

BRAKE FLUID

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If

the fluid level is below the MIN line 䊊

B, or the

brake warning light comes on, add Genu-

ine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3

fluid up to the MAX line 䊊

A. If fluid must be

added frequently, the system should be

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The

brake fluid reservoir is shared with the

clutch hydraulic system for manual trans-

missions. If the level is below the MIN line 䊊

or the brake warning light comes on, add

Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent

DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line 䊊

A. If fluid

must be added frequently, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

servicing.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Add a washer solvent to the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir for better cleaning. In

the winter season, add a windshield-

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN

Windshield-Washer Fluid Concentrate

Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

LDI2790 LDI2790 LDI2791

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

8-10 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer solu-

tion. This may result in damage to the

paint.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the washer fluid concentrate and

water.

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of bak-

ing soda and water.

∙ Make certain the terminal connections

are clean and securely tightened.

∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for

30 days or longer, disconnect the nega-

tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent

discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,

an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-

drogen gas generated by the battery

is explosive. Explosive gases can

cause blindness or injury. Do not allow

battery fluid to contact your skin,

eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-

furic acid can cause blindness or in-

jury. After touching a battery or bat-

tery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If

the acid contacts your eyes, skin or

clothing, immediately flush with wa-

ter for at least 15 minutes and seek

medical attention.

∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the battery is low. Low battery fluid

can cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce bat-

tery life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

∙ When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

BATTERY

Do-it-yourself 8-11

∙ Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent cap(s) with a screw-

driver as shown. Use a cloth to protect

the battery case.

Battery (Type A) (if so equipped)

LDI3216

Battery (Type B) (if so equipped)

WDI0528

8-12 Do-it-yourself

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only dis-

tilled water to bring the level up to the

bottom of the filler opening. Do not

overfill. Reinstall the vent cap(s).

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or

under severe conditions require frequent

checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump

starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual. If the engine does not

start by jump starting, the battery may

have to be replaced. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

CAUTION

∙ Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable

voltage control system. This system mea-

sures the amount of electrical discharge

from the battery and controls voltage gen-

erated by the generator.

WDI0529

LDI2250

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Do-it-yourself 8-13

The current sensor 䊊

Ais located near the

battery along the negative battery cable. If

you add electrical accessories to your ve-

hicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable

body ground such as the frame or engine

block area.

1. Water pump pulley

2. Generator pulley

3. Manual tensioner pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor pulley

5. Crankshaft pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF or LOCK position before servic-

ing drive belt. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-

usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is

in poor condition, have it replaced or

adjusted. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for

condition.

LDI2399

DRIVE BELT

8-14 Do-it-yourself

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-

tipped 䊊

Aspark plugs as frequently as con-

ventional type spark plugs because they

last much longer. Follow the maintenance

log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-

ules" section of this manual. Do not service

platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or

regapping.

∙Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch

are off and that the parking brake is

engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

∙ Operating the engine with the air

cleaner filter off can cause you or oth-

ers to be burned. The air cleaner filter

not only cleans the intake air, it also

stops the flame if the engine back-

fires. If the air cleaner is not installed

and the engine backfires,you could be

burned. Never drive with the air

cleaner filter off. Be cautious working

on the engine when the air cleaner is

off.

SDI1895 LDI2708

SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER

Do-it-yourself 8-15

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with

the air cleaner removed. Doing so

could result in serious injury.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner,

release the retaining clips 䊊

A, then release

the holders at the back of the unit. Pull the

unit upward 䊊

The viscous paper type filter element (if so

equipped) should not be cleaned and re-

used. The dry paper type filter element (if so

equipped) may be cleaned and reused. Re-

place the air filter according to the mainte-

nance log shown in the “Maintenance and

schedules” section of this manual.

When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside

of the air cleaner housing and the cover

with a damp cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner filter,

make sure the air cleaner cover is seated

in the housing and latch the clips 䊊

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using

the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other mate-

rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer fluid or a mild detergent.Your wind-

shield is clean if beads do not form when

rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer fluid or a mild deter-

gent. Then rinse the blades with clear wa-

ter. If your windshield is still not clear after

cleaning the blades and using the wiper,

install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-

shield.

2. Push and hold the release tab 䊊

A, and

then move the wiper blade down 䊊

the wiper arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the

wiper arm until it clicks into place.

LDI2725

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-16 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

∙ After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when

the hood is opened.

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arms may be

damaged from wind pressure.

Be careful not to let anything get into the

washer nozzle 䊊

D. This may cause clogging

or improper windshield–washer operation.

If something gets into the nozzle, remove it

with a needle or small pin 䊊

If the brakes do not operate properly, have

the brakes checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front disc-type brakes self-adjust ev-

ery time the brake pedal is applied.The rear

drum-type brakes self-adjust every time

the parking brake is applied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brakes pedal height does not return to

normal. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have

audible wear indicators. When a brake pad

requires replacement, a high pitched

scraping or screeching sound will be heard

when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will

be heard whether or not the brake pedal is

depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

LDI2710

BRAKES

Do-it-yourself 8-17

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

noise may be heard. Occasional brake

noise during light to moderate stops is nor-

mal and does not affect the function or

performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information re-

garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-

propriate maintenance schedule informa-

tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

Fuses are used in the passenger compart-

ment. Spare fuses are provided and can be

found in the passenger compartment fuse

box.

When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is

installed in the fuse box securely.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate and the fuses are in good condition,

check the fusible links 䊊

Ain the holder. If

any of the fusible links are melted, replace

only with Genuine NISSAN parts.

LDI2385 LDI3023

FUSES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

For checking and replacing the fusible links,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The fuse box is located on the driver’s

side of the instrument panel.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are OFF.

2. Remove the fuse box cover 䊊

Awith a

suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid dam-

aging the trim.

3. Locate the fuse that needs to be re-

placed.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

䊊

LDI2712

Do-it-yourself 8-19

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

C, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse 䊊

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.

If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Extended storage switch

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, remove the extended storage switch

and check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used for

long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-

tended storage switch is broken it is not

necessary to replace it. Replace only the

open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

How to replace the extended storage

switch:

1. To remove the extended storage

switch, be sure the ignition switch is in

the OFF or LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the

OFF position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊

Aand 䊊

Bfound

on each side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out

from the fuse box 䊊

LDI2713 LDI2747

8-20 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal-

low the battery or removed parts.

KEY FOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the key fob as fol-

lows:

1. Remove the screw 䊊

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of

the corner 䊊

Band twist it to separate

the upper part from the lower part. Use

a cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

∙ Make sure that the + side faces the

bottom of the case 䊊

Recommended battery: CR1620 or equiva-

lent.

4. Close the lid and install the screw se-

curely.

5. Operate the buttons to check its op-

eration.

If you need assistance for replacement, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 5.

∙An improperly disposed battery can

hurt the environment. Always con-

firm local regulations for battery dis-

posal.

SDI2134A

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Do-it-yourself 8-21

∙The key fob is water-resistant; how-

ever, if it does get wet, immediately

wipe completely dry.

∙The operational range of the key fob

extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)

from the vehicle. This range may vary

with conditions.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

HEADLIGHTS

For additional information on headlight

bulb replacement, refer to the instructions

outlined in this section.

LIGHTS

8-22 Do-it-yourself

Replacing the halogen headlight

bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type

which uses a replaceable headlight (halo-

gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside

the engine compartment without remov-

ing the headlight assembly.

CAUTION

∙ High-pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the bulb. The bulb may break if

the glass envelope is scratched or the

bulb is dropped.

∙ Aiming should not be necessary after

replacing the H4 bulb. When aiming

adjustment is necessary, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a

long period of time. Dust, moisture,

smoke, etc. entering the headlight

body may affect bulb performance.

Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly just before a replacement

bulb is installed.

∙ Only touch the base when handling

the bulb. Never touch the glass enve-

lope. Touching the glass could signifi-

cantly affect bulb life and/or head-

light performance.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector 䊊

from the rear end of the bulb.

3. Pull off the rubber cap 䊊

4. Push and turn the retaining pin 䊊

Cto

loosen it.

5. Remove the headlight bulb. Do not

shake or rotate the bulb when remov-

ing it.

6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order

of removal.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens

of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car

wash. A temperature difference between

the inside and the outside of the lens

causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If

large drops of water collect inside the lens,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

JVM0002X

Do-it-yourself 8-23

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

For additional information on fog light bulb

replacement, refer to the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Replacing the fog light bulb

If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the

chart.

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog

light for a long period of time as dust,

moisture and smoke may enter the

fog light body and affect the perfor-

mance of the fog light.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly*

High/Low 60/55 HB2

Turn/Position 28/8 3457A

Side marker 5 W5W

Fog light (if so equipped)* 55 H11

Room light 8 —

Map light 5 W5W

Trunk light 3.4 158

High-mounted stop light*

Inside (if so equipped) 16 W16W

Spoiler (if so equipped) — —

Rear combination light*

Turn 21 PY21W

Stop/Tail 21/5 P21/5W

Backup (reversing) 21 P21W

License plate light* 5 W5W

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts informa-

tion.

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

8-24 Do-it-yourself

1. Map light

2. Room light

3. Headlight assembly

4. Fog light (if so equipped)

5. High-mounted stop light (spoiler)

(if so equipped)

6. License plate light

7. Trunk light

8. High-mounted stop light (inside)2

(if so equipped)

9. Rear combination light

LDI3124

Do-it-yourself 8-25

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the

lens, lamp and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth to protect the housing.

SDI1805

Map light

LDI2044

Trunk light

LDI2135

8-26 Do-it-yourself

To change the stop/tail, turn signal or

backup (reversing) light bulbs, perform the

following:

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Remove the two clips 䊊

Aand carefully

pull the carpet back.

3. Remove the two nuts 䊊

Band the rear

combination light from the vehicle.

License plate light

JVC0014X

Rear combination light

LDI2807

Do-it-yourself 8-27

4. Disconnect the electrical connector 䊊

from the rear combination light.

5. Remove four screws 䊊

Dand the hous-

ing from the rear combination light.

6. Replace the necessary bulbs.

Follow the instruction in reverse order to

install the rear combination light and car-

pet.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment.

Those who use a pacemaker

should contact the electric medi-

cal equipment manufacturer for

the possible influences before

use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

It monitors tire pressure of all tires

except the spare. When the low tire

pressure warning light is lit and the

“CHECK TIRE PRES” warning is dis-

played in the odometer, one or more

of your tires is significantly under-

inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system

may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in

the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including

the spare) often and always prior to

long distance trips. The recom-

mended tire pressure specifications

are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label or the Tire and

Loading Information label under the

“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire

and Loading Information label is af-

fixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checked

regularly because:

LDI2808

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-28 Do-it-yourself

∙ Most tires naturally lose air over

time.

∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob-

jects or if the vehicle strikes a

curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be

checked when the tires are cold. The

tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including

under inflation, may adversely af-

fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an

accident.

∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight

capacity is indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

Do not load your vehicle beyond

this capacity. Overloading your

vehicle may result in reduced

tire life, unsafe operating condi-

tions due to premature tire fail-

ure, or unfavorable handling

characteristics and could also

lead to a serious accident. Load-

ing beyond the specified capac-

ity may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

∙ Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Tire and Loading Information

label

䊊

1Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can

be seated in the vehicle.

䊊

2Vehicle load limit: For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle

loading information” in the

“Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

䊊

3Tire size: Refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the

tires to this pressure when the

tires are cold. Tires are consid-

ered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours,

or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

at moderate speeds. The rec-

ommended cold tire inflation is

set by the manufacturer to pro-

vide the best balance of tire

wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-

ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-

cle’s GVWR.

䊊

5Original tire size: The size of the

tires originally installed on the

vehicle at the factory.

䊊

6Spare tire size.

LDI2007

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge

squarely onto the valve stem. Do

not press too hard or force the

valve stem sideways, or air will

escape. If the hissing sound of air

escaping from the tire is heard

while checking the pressure, re-

position the gauge to eliminate

this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare to the

specification shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If

too much air is added, press the

core of the valve stem briefly

with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the

pressure and add or release air

as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-

tion Pressure

Front and Rear

Original Tires:

P185/65R15

230 kPa, 33 PSI

Spare Tire:

T125/70D15 420 kPa, 60 PSI

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufac-

turers to place standardized infor-

mation on the sidewall of all tires.

This information identifies and de-

scribes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides the

Tire Identification Number (TIN) for

safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

LDI0393

Example

WDI0394

Do-it-yourself 8-31

䊊

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15

95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles

(not all tires have this informa-

tion).

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in milli-

meters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This

number, known as the aspect

ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter

in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):

This number is the tire’s load in-

dex. It is a measurement of how

much weight each tire can sup-

port. You may not find this infor-

mation on all tires because it is

not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should

not drive the vehicle faster than

the tire speed rating.

Example

WDI0395

8-32 Do-it-yourself

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number)

for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX

XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-

partment Of Transportation”.

The symbol can be placed

above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.

For example, the numbers 3103

means the 31st week of 2003. If

these numbers are missing then

look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester and others.

䊊

4Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When re-

placing the tires on the vehicle, always

use a tire that has the same load rat-

ing as the factory installed tire.

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires

an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

Example

LDI2786

Do-it-yourself 8-33

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire

has radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that

are defined throughout this section,

Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the

sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model

name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on

the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)

the outward facing sidewall of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-

ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

∙ When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information

about tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

∙ Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the low tire

pressure warning system.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels. Failure to

do so may result in a circumference

difference between tires on the front

and rear axles which can cause the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

to malfunction resulting in personal

injury or death, excessive tire wear

and may damage the transmission

and differential gears.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some

models to provide good performance all

year, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.

Snow tires have better snow traction than

All Season tires and may be more appropri-

ate in some areas.

8-34 Do-it-yourself

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire traction

rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy

or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the

use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all

four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load rat-

ing to the original equipment tires. If you do

not, it can adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-

ings than factory equipped tires and may

not match the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum speed

rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-

ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit

their use. Check local, state and provincial

laws before installing studded tires. Skid

and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer

than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-

cording to location. Check the local laws

before installing tire chains. When installing

tire chains, make sure they are the proper

size for the tires on your vehicle and are

installed according to the chain manufac-

turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”

chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-

hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-

ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains

are designed to meet the minimum clear-

ances between the tire and the closest ve-

hicle suspension or body component re-

quired to accommodate the use of a

winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are de-

termined using the factory equipped tires.

Other types may damage your vehicle. Use

chain tensioners when recommended by

the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a

tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. If possible,

avoid fully loading your vehicle when using

tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced

speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be

damaged and/or vehicle handling and

performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving

with chains in such conditions can cause

damage to the various mechanisms of the

vehicle due to some overstress.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the

tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire re-

placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”

in the “In case of emergency” section

of this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times.

It is recommended that wheel nuts

be tightened to specification at

each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

∙ After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

∙ Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

∙ Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

WDI0258 WDI0259

8-36 Do-it-yourself

∙ The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

∙ Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious per-

sonal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

tread design, speed rating and load carry-

ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tires

of different brands, construction

(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread

patterns can adversely affect the ride,

braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire

chain clearance, speedometer cali-

bration, headlight aim and bumper

height. Some of these effects may

lead to accidents and could result in

serious personal injury.

∙ If your vehicle was originally

equipped with four tires that were the

same size and you are only replacing

two of the four tires, install the new

tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires

on the front axle may cause loss of

vehicle control in some driving condi-

tions and cause an accident and per-

sonal injury.

∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear, de-

grade vehicle handling characteris-

tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-

terference with the brake

discs/drums. Such interference can

lead to decreased braking efficiency

and/or early brake pad wear. For ad-

ditional information on wheel off-set

dimensions, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if

it is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for ID registration.

∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by NISSAN. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve

may be clogged up with dirt and

cause a malfunction or loss of

pressure.

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could

have structural damage and could fail

without warning.

∙ The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with

tires of the same size, brand, construction

and tread pattern. The tire pressure and

wheel alignment should also be checked

and corrected as necessary. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle

handling and tire life. Even with regular use,

wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,

they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

∙For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside

of the vehicle is washed.

∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents

or corrosion. Such damage may cause

loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire

bead.

∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in

areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire)

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS

such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not

function.

Observe the following precautions if the

TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be

used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be

damaged or involved in an accident:

8-38 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

∙ The spare tire should be used for

emergency use only. It should be re-

placed with the standard tire at the

first opportunity to avoid possible tire

or differential damage.

∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving.

∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of

the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).

∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle

at speeds faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the

rear wheels and the original tire used

on the front wheels (drive wheels).

∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster

rate than the standard tire. Replace

the spare tire as soon as the tread

wear indicators appear.

∙ Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause

damage to the vehicle.

∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original

tire, ground clearance is reduced. To

avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive

the vehicle through an automatic car

wash since it may get caught.

Do-it-yourself 8-39

MEMO

8-40 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements......................9-2

General maintenance ........................9-2

Scheduled maintenance .....................9-2

Where to go for service .......................9-2

General maintenance ...........................9-2

Explanation of general maintenance

items.........................................9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5

Emission control system maintenance:.......9-5

Chassis and body maintenance:..............9-6

Maintenance schedules .........................9-7

Additional maintenance items for

severe operating conditions ..................9-7

Standard maintenance..........................9-8

Emission control system maintenance .......9-8

Chassis & body maintenance................9-10

Maintenance under severe operating

conditions......................................9-12

Severe driving conditions ....................9-12

Maintenance log ...............................9-13

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your vehicle

good mechanical condition, as well as its

emissions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure

that the scheduled maintenance, as well as

general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

proper maintenance. You are a vital link in

the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal

day-to-day operation. They are essential

for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-

sponsibility to perform these procedures

regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and only

a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you

prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this sec-

tion are required to be serviced at regular

intervals. However under severe driving

conditions, additional or more frequent

maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and serviced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up-to-date with the

latest service information through techni-

cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-

grams. They are completely qualified to

work on NISSAN vehicles before work be-

gins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-

er’s service department can perform the

service needed to meet the maintenance

requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of

the vehicle, general maintenance should

be performed regularly as prescribed in

this section. If you detect any unusual

sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to

check for the cause or have it checked

promptly. In addition, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think

that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-

nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the

doors and engine hood operate properly.

Also ensure that all latches lock securely.

Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers

and links if necessary. Make sure that the

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

secondary latch keeps the hood from

opening when the primary latch is re-

leased.

When driving in areas using road salt or

other corrosive materials, check lubrica-

tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other

lights are all operating properly and in-

stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-

ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are

missing, and check for any loose wheel

nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-

ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all

tires, including the spare, to the pressure

specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts

or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the

TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core

and cap when the tires are replaced due to

wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-

hicle should pull to either side while driving

on a straight and level road, or if you detect

uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may

be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-

ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-

way speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at least

every six months for cracks or other dam-

age. Have a damaged windshield repaired

by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for

cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing scheduled maintenance,

cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the

pedal does not catch or require uneven

effort. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer

to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-

diately. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the

floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism (if so

equipped): On a fairly steep hill check that

the vehicle is held securely with the shift

lever in the P (Park) position without apply-

ing any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only

the parking brake applied. If the parking

brake needs adjustment, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seats: Check seat position controls such

as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to

ensure they operate smoothly and all

latches lock securely in every position.

Check that the head restraints/headrests

move up and down smoothly and the locks

(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,

adjusters and retractors) operate properly

and smoothly, and are installed securely.

Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,

wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering system, such as excessive free

play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly

and in sufficient quantity when operating

the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check

that the wipers and washer operate prop-

erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically (for example, each

time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.

The fluid should be at the bottom of the

filler opening. Vehicles operated in high

temperatures or under severe conditions

require frequent checks of the battery fluid

level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid

level*: Make sure that the brake and clutch

fluid levels are between the MIN and MAX

lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive

belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level surface with

the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes

for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no

loose supports, cracks or holes. If the

sound of the exhaust seems unusual or

there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-

ately have the exhaust system inspected. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-

oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

vehicle has been parked for a while. Water

dripping from the air conditioner after use

is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if

fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause

and have it corrected immediately.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-

mation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control dust. It

is very important to remove these sub-

stances from the underbody, otherwise

rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and exhaust system. At the end of

winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, in those

areas where mud and dirt may have accu-

mulated. For additional information, refer

to the “Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that

there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to

give you a better understanding of the

scheduled maintenance items that should

be regularly checked or replaced. The

maintenance schedule indicates at which

mileage/time intervals each item requires

service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance,

your vehicle requires that some items be

checked during normal day-to-day opera-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“General maintenance” in this section.

Items marked with “*” are recommended

by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.

You are not required to perform mainte-

nance on these items in order to maintain

the warranties which come with your

NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-

tervals are required.

When applicable, additional information

can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of

non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-

ing systems and strongly advises

against performing these services on a

NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-

ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-

proved chemicals or solvents, the use of

which has not been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer in-

formation” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE:

Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for

wear, fraying or cracking and for proper

tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-

vals. When driving for prolonged periods in

dusty conditions, check/replace the filter

more frequently.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the

specified interval. When adding or replac-

ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For

additional information on the proper mix-

ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling

system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant

or the use of non-distilled water may re-

duce the recommended service interval

of the coolant.

Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil

and oil filter at the specified intervals. For

recommended oil grade and viscosity refer

to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping

and connections for leaks, looseness, or

deterioration. Tighten connections or re-

place parts as necessary.

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.

Install new plugs of the type as originally

equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY

MAINTENANCE:

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for

proper installation. Check for chafing,

cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.

Replace any deteriorated or damaged

parts immediately.

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:

Check for wear, deterioration and fluid

leaks. Replace any deteriorated or dam-

aged parts immediately.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-

haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,

cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-

pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check

for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil

or grease. Under severe driving conditions,

inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in-

structions under “General maintenance” in

this section. When rotating tires, check for

damage and uneven wear. Replace if nec-

essary.

Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for

signs of leakage at specified intervals.

If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top

carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads,

replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles

(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect

the fluid deterioration data using a CON-

SULT. If the deterioration data is more than

210000, replace the CVT fluid.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-

cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-

nance schedules that may be used, de-

pending upon the conditions in which you

usually drive. These schedules contain

both distance and time intervals, up to

120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For

most people, the odometer reading will in-

dicate when service is needed. However, if

you drive very little, your vehicle should be

serviced at the regular time intervals

shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/

144 months, continue maintenance at

the same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING

CONDITIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions should be per-

formed on vehicles that are driven under

especially demanding conditions. Addi-

tional maintenance items should be per-

formed if you primarily operate your vehicle

under the following conditions:

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distances, such as police,

taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Using a car-top carrier.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both

standard and severe maintenance items

should be performed at every interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

The following tables show the standard

maintenance schedule. Depending upon

weather and atmospheric conditions,

varying road surfaces, individual driving

habits and vehicle usage, additional or

more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired. After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

interval.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Spark plugs Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (6)

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Spark plugs Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (6)

NOTE:

(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if

found damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) Maintenance-free item.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles

(120,000 km) or 60 months.

(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%

demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy

of the factory fill coolant.

(6) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

*: Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not

perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items

and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brakelines&cables IIIIII

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings夝IIIIII

Brake fluid夝RRR

Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (1) I IIIII

CVTfluid SeeNOTE(2)IIIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Drive shaft boots夝IIIIII

Exhaust system夝III

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brakelinesandcables IIIIII

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings夝IIIIII

Brake fluid夝RRR

Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (1) I IIIII

CVTfluid SeeNOTE(2)IIIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Drive shaft boots夝IIIIII

Exhaust system夝III

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.

(1) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or

24 months.

(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at

NISSAN dealers every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change

(not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km).

(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under

severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distance, such as police, taxi

or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Drive shaft boots Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE

OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or

120 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities ......................................10-2

Fuel recommendation.......................10-4

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendations ..........................10-7

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations .......................10-8

Specifications ..................................10-9

Engine ......................................10-9

Wheels and tires............................10-10

Dimensions and weights ...................10-10

When traveling or registering in another

country.........................................10-11

Vehicle identification ...........................10-11

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

plate ........................................10-11

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ............................10-11

Engine serial number....................... 10-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label .................. 10-12

Emission control information label .........10-12

Tire and Loading Information label ......... 10-13

Air conditioner specification label........... 10-13

Installing front license plate.................... 10-13

Vehicle loading information ...................10-14

Terms ......................................10-14

Vehicle load capacity .......................10-15

Loading tips ................................ 10-17

Measurement of weights ................... 10-17

Towing a trailer ................................10-18

Flat towing .................................10-18

Uniform tire quality grading....................10-18

Emission control system warranty.............10-19

Reporting safety defects ......................10-20

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

test............................................10-21

Event Data Recorders (EDR)....................10-21

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information ...................................10-22

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel 41 L 10-7/8 gal 9 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in

this section.

Engine oil*1

Drain and refill

1*: For additional

information, refer to “Engine

oil” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

With oil filter

change 3.5 L 3-3/4 qt 3-1/8 qt

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.

• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor

oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional

information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”

in this section.

• As an alternative to this recommended oil, SAE 10W-30 conven-

tional petroleum based oil may be used and meet all specifica-

tions and requirements necessary to maintain the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty

Without oil filter

change 3.2 L 3-3/8 qt 2-7/8 qt

Engine coolant

with reservoir

With manual trans-

mission 6.7 L 1-3/4 gal 1-1/2 gal

• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent

With continuously

variable transmis-

sion

7.2 L 1-7/8 gal 1-5/8 gal

Manual transmission gear oil (if so equipped) — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi

75W-85, or equivalent.

• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid HQ-Multi is not

available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a tem-

porary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual

Transmission Fluid HQ-Multi as soon as it is available.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid (if

so equipped)

For additional information, refer to the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or

equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.

Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid

NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids

other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid

Refill to the proper level according to the

instructions in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid, available in

mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer, or equivalent DOT 3.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-

frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R (KLHOO-PAGRO) or

equivalent

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-

frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 3.5 L 7/8 gal 3/4 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An-

tifreeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85.Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)

specifications where it is available. Many of

the automobile manufacturers developed

this specification to improve emission con-

trol system and vehicle performance. Ask

your service station manager if the gaso-

line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-

formulated gasolines. These gasolines are

specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-

sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards

cleaner air and suggests that you use re-

formulated gasoline when available.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-

ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl

Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with

or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

fuels of which the oxygenate content and

the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-

not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask

your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,

please take the following precautions as

the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle

performance problems and/or fuel system

damage.

∙The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

∙If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 15% oxygenate.

∙If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable

amount of appropriate cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-

erly formulated with appropriate co-

solvents and corrosion inhibitors,

such methanol blends may cause fuel

system damage and/or vehicle per-

formance problems. At this time, suf-

ficient data is not available to ensure

that all methanol blends are suitable

for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine

stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-

rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,

immediately change to a non-oxygenate

fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-

fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%

fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.

E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed

to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-

tions require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percent-

age for that region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel

Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-

hicle. U.S. government regulations require

fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and black

label with the common abbreviation or the

appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-

ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the

use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may

adversely affect vehicle performance, in-

cluding the emissions control system. Note

that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to

consult your gasoline retailer for more de-

tails.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-

ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane

booster, intake valve deposit removers,

etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of

these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active sol-

vents or similar ingredients that can be

harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can

cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”

(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping

noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine

damage. If you detect a persistent heavy

spark knock even when using gasoline

of the stated octane rating, or if you hear

steady spark knock while holding a

steady speed on level roads, it is recom-

mended that you have a NISSAN dealer

correct the condition. Failure to correct

the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for

which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in

spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,

which may cause excessive fuel consump-

tion or engine damage. If any of the above

symptoms are encountered, have your ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not

a cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in this section. NISSAN recommends the

use of an energy conserving oil in order to

improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the

American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standard-

ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)

certification and SAE viscosity standard.

These oils have the API certification mark

on the front of the container. Oils which do

not have the specified quality label should

not be used as they could cause engine

damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used

and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or

has been previously used should not be

used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness

changes with temperature. Because of

this, it is important to select the engine oil

viscosity based on the temperatures at

which the vehicle will be operated before

the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-

ity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or

its equivalent for the reason described in

“Change intervals.”

LTI2051

Technical and consumer information 10-7

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for

your engine are based on the use of the

specified quality oils and filters. Using en-

gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-

fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil

and filter change intervals could reduce

engine life. Damage to the engine caused

by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is

not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality

engine oil when it was built. You do not have

to change the oil before the first recom-

mended change interval. Oil and filter

change intervals depend upon how you

use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions

may require more frequent oil and filter

changes:

∙ repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures

∙ driving in dusty conditions

∙ extensive idling

∙ stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the

“Maintenance and schedules” section of

this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the

refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and

NISSAN A/C system oil Type R (KLH00-

PAGRO) or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil

will cause severe damage to the air con-

ditioning system and will require the re-

placement of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does

not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain

government regulations require the recov-

ery and recycling of any refrigerant during

automotive air conditioner system service.

A NISSAN dealer has the trained techni-

cians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system re-

frigerant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer when servicing your air conditioner

system.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE

Model HR16DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.071 x 3.291 (78.0 x 83.6)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 97.51 (1,598)

Firing order 1–3–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

M/T in N (Neutral) position

CVT in N (Neutral) position

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug PLZKAR6A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum and steel 15 x 5.5J 1.57 (40)

Tire size P185/65R15

Spare tire T125/70D15

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Body Type Sedan

Unit: in (mm)

Overall length 175.4 (4,455)

Overall width 66.7 (1,695)

Overall height 59.6 (1,514)

Track width

Front 58.3 (1,480)

Rear 58.5 (1,485)

Wheelbase 102.4 (2,600)

Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) For additional information,

refer to the “F.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label” on the center pillar

between the driver’s side

front and rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lbs. (kg)

Rear lbs. (kg)

10-10 Technical and consumer information

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first

find out if the fuel available is suitable for

your vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too

low may cause engine damage. All gaso-

line vehicles must be operated with un-

leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking

your vehicle to areas where appropriate

fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of

your vehicle to another country, state,

province or district, it may be necessary

to modify the vehicle to meet local laws

and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards

vary according to the country, state, prov-

ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-

tions may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, trans-

portation and registration are the re-

sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-

sponsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

plate is attached as shown. This number is

the identification for your vehicle and is

used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is lo-

cated as shown.

TI1050M LTI2274

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Technical and consumer information 10-11

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

(F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as

shown. This label contains valuable vehicle

information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight

Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture,

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Re-

view it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached to the underside of the hood as

shown.

HR16DE engine

LTI2020 STI0349 WTI0198

10-12 Technical and consumer information

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label. The label is

located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is af-

fixed as shown.

LTI0197 WTI0167

LTI2316

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Technical and consumer information 10-13

Use the following steps to mount the front

license plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm

that the following parts are enclosed in the

plastic bag:

∙ License plate bracket

∙ License plate bracket screws x 2

∙ Screw grommets x 2

1. Hold the license plate bracket 䊊

1and

make a shallow hole in the bumper fas-

cia using a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid

damaging the area behind the fascia,

apply only light pressure to the drill.

2. Insert the grommets 䊊

2into the holes

in the bumper fascia.

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver

into the grommet hole to turn the

threaded part of the grommet 90°.

4. Mount the license plate bracket using

the two longer screws 䊊

WARNING

∙ It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself

with the following terms before

loading your vehicle:

∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of

your vehicle) - vehicle weight in-

cluding: standard and optional

equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly.

This weight does not include

passengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight

of passengers and cargo.

∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other op-

tional equipment. This informa-

tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit

specified for the front or rear axle.

This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total

weight rating of the vehicle, pas-

sengers, cargo, and trailer.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

10-14 Technical and consumer information

∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load

limit, Total load capacity - maxi-

mum total weight limit specified

of the load (passengers and

cargo) for the vehicle. This is the

maximum combined weight of

occupants and cargo that can be

loaded into the vehicle. If the ve-

hicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load.

This information is located on the

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

∙ Cargo capacity - permissible

weight of cargo, the subtracted

weight of occupants from the

load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo” on

the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel. Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Ca-

pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

To get “the combined weight of oc-

cupants and cargo”, add the weight

of all occupants, then add the total

luggage weight. Examples are

shown in the following illustration.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

Steps for determining correct

load limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the XXX amount equals

1,400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lbs. passengers in your ve-

hicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =

650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

Example

LTI2335

10-16 Technical and consumer information

Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in step 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

or the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Measure-

ment of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label” in this section.

LOADING TIPS

∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the F.M-

.V.S.S. certification label.

∙ Do not load the front and rear

axle to the GAWR. Doing so will

exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This

could result in loss of control

and cause personal injury.

∙

Overloading and improper load-

ing not only can shorten the life

of your vehicle and the tire, but

can also cause unsafe vehicle

handling and longer braking dis-

tances. This may cause a prema-

ture tire failure which could re-

sult in a serious accident and

personal injury. Failures caused

by overloading are not covered

by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent

weight shifts that could affect the

balance of your vehicle.When the ve-

hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and

weigh the front and the rear wheels

separately to determine axle loads.

Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight

Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle

loads should not exceed the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These

ratings are given on the vehicle cer-

tification label. If weight ratings are

exceeded, move or remove items to

bring all weights below the ratings.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is sometimes called flat towing.

This method is sometimes used when

towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve-

hicle with the front tires on the

ground. Doing so may cause serious

and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

∙ DO NOT tow any continuously variable

transmission vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground (flat towing).

Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal trans-

mission parts due to lack of transmis-

sion lubrication.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

Manual Transmission (if so

equipped)

∙ Always tow with the manual transmis-

sion in N (Neutral).

∙ After towing 500 miles (805 km), start

and idle the engine with the transmis-

sion in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Fail-

ure to idle the engine after every

500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause

damage to internal transmission parts.

Continuously Variable

Transmission (if so equipped)

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu-

ously variable transmission, an appropriate

vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the

towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow

the dolly manufacturer’s recommenda-

tions when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must

conform to federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-

ing based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to low-

est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-

sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include ac-

celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the high-

est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat, and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-

perature can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-

cessive temperature can lead to sudden

tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the mini-

mum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly in-

flated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-

lowing emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-

formation Booklet which comes with your

NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-

ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you

may obtain a replacement by writing to:

∙ Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-

formation Booklet which comes with your

NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-

ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you

may obtain a replacement by writing to:

∙ Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

Technical and consumer information 10-19

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-

fying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a re-

call and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or

write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contact-

ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

request that NISSAN conduct a recall

campaign. However, Transport

Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s

Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-

sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You

may also report safety defects online

at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)

or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)

Additional information concerning

motor vehicle safety may be ob-

tained from Transport Canada’s

Road Safety Information Centre at

1-800-333-0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English

speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/

securiteroutiere (French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety con-

cerns please contact our Consumer

Information Centre toll free at 1-800-

387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

10-20 Technical and consumer information

Due to legal requirements in some states

and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may

be required to be in what is called the

“ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the

emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving

patterns. Usually, the ready condition can

be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-

hicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-

paired or the battery is disconnected, the

vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-

tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the

vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test

readiness condition. Place the ignition

switch in the ON position without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-

tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-

dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data

that will assist in understanding how a ve-

hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-

signed to record data related to vehicle dy-

namics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-

cord such data as:

∙ How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

∙ Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better un-

derstanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-

trivial crash situation occurs; no data are

recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g.

name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR

data with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash in-

vestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN

dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, that have the special equipment, can

read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be

accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Technical and consumer information 10-21

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for

your vehicle. This manual is the same one

used by the factory-trained technicians

working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-

chased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this

model year and prior, please contact your

nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-

ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your

area, call the NISSAN Information Center at

1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-

resentative will assist you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

10-22 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system) .....................1-42

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air

bagsystem)................1-51

Air bag warning labels ............1-59

Airbagwarninglight..........1-60, 2-17

Air bag warning light,

supplemental ..............1-60, 2-17

Air cleaner housing filter ..........8-15

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ........4-18

Air conditioner service..........4-23

Air conditioner specification label . .10-13

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations ............10-8

Air conditioner system refrigerant

recommendations ............10-8

Heater and air conditioner controls. .4-15

Servicing air conditioner ........4-23

Air flow charts .................4-19

Anchor point locations ...........1-25

Antenna ....................4-43

Antifreeze ...................5-29

Anti-lock brake warning light........2-13

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......5-25

Audible reminders ..............2-20

Audio system .................4-23

AM/FMradio............4-28,4-30

AM radio operation............4-30

AMradioreception............4-24

Auxliliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-31

Bluetooth® audio .............4-39

FM radio operation ............4-31

FMradioreception............4-23

iPod®Player................4-36

iPod® player operation .........4-36

Radio ....................4-23

Steering wheel audio control

switch....................4-43

USB Connections.............4-34

USBinterface...............4-33

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port.....................4-33

Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . .2-32

Automatic door locks .............3-6

Battery..................5-29,8-11

Charge warning light...........2-14

Battery replacement.............8-21

Keyfob................8-21,8-21

Before starting the engine .........5-10

Belt(Seedrivebelt)..............8-14

Block heater

Engine....................5-31

Bluetooth® audio ...............4-39

Bluetooth® hands-free phone system . .4-47

Bluetooth® connections ........4-63

Connecting procedure .........4-52

Phone indicators .............4-51

Text messaging..............4-59

Booster seats .................1-38

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....5-25

Brakefluid..................8-9

Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-24

Brakesystem...............5-25

Brakewarninglight............2-13

Brakewearindicators.......2-20,8-17

Parking brake operation.........5-18

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Brakeassist..................5-26

Brakefluid....................8-9

Brakes......................8-17

Brakesystem.................5-25

Break-in schedule ..............5-21

Brightness/contrast button .........4-7

Brightness control

Instrument panel.............2-24

Bulb check/instrument panel .......2-12

Bulb replacement ..............8-24

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants....................10-2

Cargo

(See vehicle loading information) . . . .10-14

Car phone or CB radio............4-47

Child restraints . . . . . . .1-18, 1-19, 1-20, 1-23

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System..............1-23

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38

Top tether strap anchor point

locations...................1-25

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-6

Chimes, audible reminders .........2-20

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

Clockset.....................4-5

Clutch

Clutchfluid.................8-10

Coldweatherdriving.............5-29

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) .....................5-8,5-11

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid...................8-9

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ..........5-8,5-11

Control panel buttons .............4-2

Brightness/contrast button .......4-7

Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel).....4-43

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-15

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-5

Checking engine coolant level ......8-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Corrosionprotection..............7-7

Cruisecontrol..................5-19

Cupholders...................2-29

Curtain side-impact and rollover air

bag........................1-57

Defroster switch

Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-22

Dimensions and weights ..........10-10

Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-24

Display controls

(see control panel buttons) ..........4-2

Door locks ....................3-4

Door open warning light ...........2-14

Drivebelt ....................8-14

Driving

Cold weather driving ...........5-29

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ..........5-8,5-11

Driving with manual

transmission..............5-9,5-16

Precautions when starting and

driving.....................5-2

Drivingthevehicle...............5-11

Economy - fuel.................5-22

Emission control information label . . . .10-12

Emission control system warranty . . . .10-19

Engine

Before starting the engine ........5-10

Blockheater ................5-31

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-5

Changing engine oil ............8-7

Changing engine oil filter .........8-8

Checking engine coolant level ......8-5

Checking engine oil level .........8-6

Engine compartment check

locations...................8-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Engine cooling system ..........8-4

Engine oil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-7

Engine oil pressure warning light....2-14

Engine oil viscosity.............10-7

Engine serial number ..........10-12

Engine specifications ...........10-9

Starting the engine ............5-10

Engine coolant temperature gauge ....2-9

EventDatarecorders ............10-21

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......5-2

Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance

items .......................9-5

Extended storage switch ..........8-20

Flashers

(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2

lattire....................6-2,6-3

Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Fluid

Brakefluid..................8-9

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Clutchfluid.................8-10

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid......................8-9

Engine coolant ...............8-4

11-2

Engine oil ...................8-6

F.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-12

Foglightswitch................2-25

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system). . . .1-51

Front-door pocket...............2-27

Frontseats....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Fuel economy ...............5-22

Fuel-filler cap ................3-14

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-14

Fuel-filler lid .................3-14

Fuel gauge ..................2-9

Fueloctanerating.............10-6

Fuel recommendation ..........10-4

Loose fuel cap warning ..........2-7

Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Fuel-filler door .................3-14

Fuel gauge ....................2-9

Fuses .......................8-18

Fusiblelinks...................8-18

Gascap.....................3-14

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Fuel gauge ..................2-9

Odometer ..................2-6

Speedometer ................2-5

Tachometer .................2-8

Trip computer ...............2-10

Trip odometer .............2-5,2-6

General maintenance .............9-2

Glovebox....................2-29

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-47

Hazard warning flasher switch........6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch......2-22

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Headlights...................8-22

Headrestraints .................1-5

Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-15

Heater operation..............4-17

Hood .......................3-11

Horn.......................2-25

Ignition switch ..................5-8

Important vehicle information label . . .10-12

Increasing fuel economy...........5-22

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders)....................2-18

Instrument brightness control .......2-24

Instrument panel .............0-6,2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-24

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 2-33

Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

iPod®Player...................4-36

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-23

Jumpstarting...............6-9,8-13

Key.........................3-2

Key fob battery replacement . . . . .8-21, 8-21

Keyless entry

Without Intelligent Key system

(See remote keyless entry system) . . .3-7

Labels

Air conditioner specification label . . .10-13

Emission control information label . .10-12

Engine serial number ..........10-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-12

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.....................10-11

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-59

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Hildren)System................1-23

Launch bar menu................4-7

License plate

Installing the license plate .......10-13

Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-17

Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . .8-24

Bulb check/instrument panel ......2-12

Bulb replacement .............8-24

11-3

Charge warning light ...........2-14

Exterior and Interior lights. . . . . . . .8-24

Foglights..................8-24

Foglightswitch..............2-25

Headlight and turn signal switch....2-22

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-22

Headlights.................8-22

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 2-33

Lightbulbs.................8-22

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-15

Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51

Trunklight..................2-34

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ..................2-18

Lights......................8-22

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ........3-6

Door locks ..................3-4

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-14

Power door locks ..............3-5

Trunk lid lock opener lever ........3-12

Loose fuel cap warning ............2-7

Lowfuelwarninglight ............2-15

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-15

Luggage

(See vehicle loading information) .....10-14

Maintenance

General maintenance ...........9-2

Insidethevehicle..............9-3

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

Outsidethevehicle.............9-2

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-17

Under the hood and vehicle .......9-4

Maintenance log ................9-13

Maintenance requirements..........9-2

Maintenance schedules ............9-7

Maintenance under severe operation

conditions....................9-12

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Manual front seat adjustment ........1-3

Manual windows................2-32

Menu button ...................4-5

Meters and gauges ...............2-3

Instrument brightness control .....2-24

Mirror

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Outsidemirrors ..............3-18

Rearview...................3-18

Vanitymirror................3-17

Mirrors......................3-18

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6

Odometer ....................2-6

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine oil ............8-7

Changing engine oil filter .........8-8

Checking engine oil level .........8-6

Engine oil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-7

Engine oil viscosity.............10-7

One shot call ..................4-50

Outsidemirrorcontrol............3-18

Outsidemirrors ................3-18

Overheat

Ifyourvehicleoverheats.........6-11

Owner's manual order form ........10-22

Owner's manual/service manual order

information..................10-22

Parking

Parking brake operation .........5-18

Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-23

Parkingbrake..................5-18

Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-47

Power

Power door locks ..............3-5

Poweroutlet................2-26

Power steering system..........5-24

Powerwindows..............2-30

Rearpowerwindows...........2-31

Poweroutlet..................2-26

Powersteering.................5-24

Precautions

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

Precautions on booster

seats............1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38

Precautions on child

estraints.........1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-42

Precautions when starting and

driving .....................5-2

Programmable features............4-5

Push starting ..................6-11

11-4

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ..........4-47

FM/AMradio................4-28

Steering wheel audio control

switch....................4-43

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)

test .......................10-21

Rearpowerwindows.............2-31

Rearseat.....................1-4

Rearviewmirror................3-18

RearViewMonitor.............4-8,4-10

Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . .2-22

Recommended Fluids ............10-2

Recorders

EventData.................10-21

Refrigerant recommendation........10-8

Registering a vehicle in another

country .....................10-11

Remote keyless entry system ......3-6,3-7

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-20

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ........3-6

Childseatbelts......1-20, 1-27, 1-33, 1-38

Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-20

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment......1-3

Rear seat adjustment ...........1-4

Seatback pockets ...............2-28

Seat belt

Childsafety.................1-18

Infants and small children ........1-19

InjuredPerson................1-13

Largerchildren...............1-19

Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-10

Pregnant women..............1-13

Seat belt extenders ............1-17

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-17

Seatbelts................1-10, 7-7

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-16

Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-13

Seat belt extenders ..............1-17

Seatbeltwarninglight .........1-13, 2-17

Seats

Adjustment ..................1-2

Frontseats..................1-2

Manual front seat adjustment ......1-3

Rearseat...................1-4

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Service manual order form.........10-22

Servicing air conditioner ...........4-23

Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) .....................5-13

Manual transmission ...........5-16

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-16

Side air bag system

(See supplemental side air bag, curtain

and rollover air bag systems) ........1-57

Siri® Eyes-Free .................4-44

Spark plug replacement ...........8-15

Spark plugs ...................8-15

Specifications..................10-9

Speedometer ..................

2-5

SRS warning label ...............1-59

Stability control ................5-27

Standard maintenance ............9-8

Starting

Before starting the engine ........5-10

Jumpstarting.............6-9,8-13

Precautions when starting and

driving .....................5-2

Push starting ................6-11

Starting the engine ............5-10

Starting the engine ..............5-10

Steering

Power steering system..........5-24

Tilting steering wheel ...........3-16

Steering wheel .................3-16

Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-43

Stoplight....................8-24

Storage.....................2-27

Storagetray ..................2-28

Sunvisors....................3-17

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-59

Supplemental air bag warning

light.....................1-60, 2-17

Supplemental front impact air bag

system......................1-51

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . .1-59

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-42

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .......1-42

Switch

Automatic power window switch . . .2-32

Foglightswitch..............2-25

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-22

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-22

Ignition switch ................5-8

Instrument brightness control .....2-24

11-5

Power door lock switch ..........3-5

Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-22

Turn signal switch .............2-24

Tachometer ...................2-8

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-9

Three-waycatalyst...............5-2

Tilting steering wheel .............3-16

Tire

Flattire..................6-2,6-3

Spare tire ...............6-4,8-38

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13

Tire chains .................8-35

Tire pressure ................8-28

Tirerotation................8-36

Types of tires ................8-34

Uniform tire quality grading ......10-18

Wheels and tires ..........8-28,10-10

Wheel/tire size...............10-10

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-15

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). .5-3

Towing

2-wheel drive models ...........6-14

4-wheel drive models ...........6-13

Flattowing.................10-18

Towtrucktowing .............6-12

Trailertowing...............10-18

Towingatrailer................10-18

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid......................8-9

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ..........5-8,5-11

Driving with manual

transmission..............5-9,5-16

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another

country) .....................10-11

Trip computer .................2-10

Trip odometer ...............2-5,2-6

Trunk lid lock opener lever ..........3-12

Trunklight....................2-34

Turn signal switch ...............2-24

Uniform tire quality grading ........10-18

USBinterface..................4-33

Vanitymirror..................3-17

Variablevoltagecontrolsystem......8-13

Vehicle dimensions and weights .....10-10

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch......................2-26

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-27

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-27

Vehicle identification .............10-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) ...............10-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.......................10-11

Vehicle loading information ........10-14

Vehiclerecovery................6-14

Ventilators....................4-14

Visors.......................3-17

Voice Prompt Interrupt............4-50

Warning

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-60, 2-17

Anti-lock brake warning light ......2-13

Battery charge warning light ......2-14

Brakewarninglight............2-13

Door open warning light .........2-14

Engine oil pressure warning light....2-14

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Loosefuelcapwarning..........2-7

Lowfuelwarninglight ..........2-15

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-15

Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-51

Seatbeltwarninglight .......1-13, 2-17

Supplemental air bag warning

light...................1-60, 2-17

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ..................2-18

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-59

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................2-18

Audible reminders .............2-18

Indicatorlights...............2-18

Warninglights...............2-18

Warninglights.................2-18

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................2-12

Weights

(See dimensions and weights) .......10-10

Wheels and tires ............8-28,10-10

11-6

Wheel/tire size.................10-10

When traveling or registering in another

country .....................10-11

Windows.....................2-30

Locking passengers' windows .....2-31

Manual windows..............2-32

Powerwindows..............2-30

Rearpowerwindows...........2-31

Windshield-washer fluid ...........8-10

Windshield wiper blades ...........8-16

Wiper

Wiper blades ................8-16

Wiper and washer switch ..........2-21

11-7

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock In-

dex) number (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85.Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is

recommended.

• If the above motor is not available, use an

equivalent motor oil that matches the

above grade and viscosity. For additional

information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter

recommendations” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this

manual.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

Refer to the Tire and Loading Information

label.

The label is typically located on the driver

side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For

additional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

2018 Nissan Versa Sedan | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation